.

Mortgage rates increased to 6 % this year, according to Freddie Mac, the buyer, on Thursday.

The benchmark 30-year fixed mortgage‘s average rate increased by 6 % from last week’s reading of 5. 98 %, according to Freddie Mac’s most recent Primary Mortgage Market Survey, which was released on Thursday. &nbsp,

The 30-year loan’s ordinary rate was 6. 63 % a year ago.

OVERWARDS NATIONAL RATE, TEXAS CAPITAL’S HOUSEHOLD GROWTH SURGES

Prices are almost a full percentage point lower than they were at this time in 2024, which has sparked interest from buyers, vendors, and owners, according to Sam Khater, Freddie Mac&rsquo’s chief economist. ” Mortgage activity is off, and order applications are ahead of last year’s pace as a result. “

The average rate on a 15-year fixed mortgage increased from last week’s reading of 4. 44 % to 5. 43 %.

RENT HELS ARE MORE COMFORTABLE FOR MANY AMERICAN MARKET STABILIZES, AVAILABLE FOR MANY.

The Federal Rȩserve and politics are jμst two ȩxamples σf how ɱortgage rates are affected by various components. Although the Fed’s interest rate choices don’t directly affect mortgage rates, they do carefully monitor the 10-year Treasury offer. As oil pricȩs rosȩ αs a result of the Iran war, the 10-year yįeld was hovering aƫ 4. 14 % as of Thursday afternoon.

Ƭhe staɾt of the conflict in Iran oveɾ the weekend and its subsequent escalation have stσked worriȩs about war prices, which are causiȵg the 10-year Treasμry ყield to rise, accordinǥ to Realtor. com older Joel Berner.

Visiting HERE WILL Getting FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO.

He added that despite industry conditions, such as lower prices, higher products, and lower loan rates, being favorable for buyers so far, consumer trust has had an impact on sales activity.

The Iran fight only added to the stress mound that already included tariffs, last year’s gentle labor market, stock market volatility, and AI job loss concerns, according to Berner. “Economic uncertainty is not a position froɱ whįch many ρeople are interested įn making the largest purchase of thȩir lįfe.

This post was originally published here


Elon Musk made one of his boldest claims yet about Tesla’s future on March 4, posting on X that Tesla will be among the companies to develop AGI and will “probably” be the first to achieve it in humanoid form through its Optimus robot program.

The statement instantly grabbed Wall Street‘s attention. Tesla stock gained more than 3% in the session that followed, as investors weighed what an AGI-capable Optimus robot could mean for a company already carrying a massive premium valuation tied to its AI and robotics ambitions.

But the claim lands against a complicated backdrop. Tesla’s core vehicle business has been under real pressure, and Musk has a well-documented history of setting aggressive timelines that slip. Here is what investors and consumers need to understand about this announcement.

What Musk actually said about Tesla and AGI

Artificial general intelligence refers to AI systems that can reason, plan, and learn across different domains the way humans do, rather than excelling at one specific task like driving or generating text. It remains one of the most debated and elusive goals in all of technology.

Musk’s post used the phrase “atom-shaping form” to describe where he sees Tesla winning. His argument is that true general intelligence requires a physical body that can interact with and manipulate the real world, not just process text or code.

That is where Tesla claims a unique edge. No other major AI lab has a humanoid robot in production, a large-scale manufacturing infrastructure, or the real-world sensor data that Tesla’s fleet of vehicles continuously generates.

The Optimus robot is central to the entire bet

Tesla’s Optimus humanoid robot is the physical centerpiece of this AGI vision. The company is converting its Fremont, Calif., facility that previously built the Model S and Model X into an Optimus production line. The long-term target is one million units annually.

More Tech Stocks:

Musk has also said Tesla is building an “Optimus Academy” to train the robot using the same reality-simulation tools that power its Full Self-Driving system. That FSD infrastructure, built on billions of miles of real-world driving data, is the foundation Tesla believes gives it a path to embodied AGI that pure software labs cannot replicate.

What makes Tesla’s AGI case different from rivals:

  • Real-world physical data from millions of vehicles operating across complex environments, not just digital text or synthetic simulations
  • Optimus robots already performing tasks inside Tesla factories, creating a live feedback loop between the robot’s actions and its AI training
  • In-house AI chip design aimed at on-device intelligence rather than relying solely on cloud compute
  • Integration with xAI’s Grok models, which Musk has positioned as the intelligence layer running inside Optimus

The rivals are not standing still

Tesla is not operating in a vacuum. OpenAI CEO Sam Altman has publicly targeted 2027 as the point at which AI could surpass human-level intelligence across domains. Google DeepMind CEO Demis Hassabis said at the India AI Summit that AGI will feel like ten Industrial Revolutions happening at ten times the speed.

Anthropic, which builds the Claude family of AI models, has emphasized careful safety standards over speed. That measured approach has drawn both praise from researchers and criticism from those who believe the competitive window for AGI leadership is closing fast.

Where the major players stand on AGI timelines:

  • Elon Musk and Tesla: AGI in humanoid form, targeting 2026 as the pivotal year
  • OpenAI’s Sam Altman: Surpassing human-level intelligence possible by 2027
  • Google DeepMind’s Demis Hassabis: Near-term AGI with civilizational-scale consequences
  • Anthropic: No fixed public timeline, prioritizing safety and alignment first

Related: History of Tesla & its stock: Timeline, facts & milestones

The skeptics have a real track record to point to

Musk’s critics are not short on evidence. He has predicted Tesla would achieve full self-driving capability every year from 2019 through 2025.  It never happened. Kalshi’s prediction market gives Optimus just a 14.5% chance of being available for consumer sale in 2026.

He predicted AGI would arrive by 2025. When it did not, the timeline shifted to 2026. Earlier this year, Musk declared that “we have entered the Singularity” and that 2026 is the year it arrives. Tesla’s robotaxi service, launched in Austin, Texas, still relied on safety monitors inside the vehicles for most of its pilot run.

Meanwhile, Tesla’s business fundamentals have deteriorated sharply. The company delivered 1.64 million vehicles in 2025, an 8.6% decline from 2024 and the second consecutive year of falling deliveries. Revenue dropped roughly 3%, the first year-over-year decline in Tesla’s history. Net income fell 61% in the fourth quarter alone.

What investors are actually pricing in

Despite those results, Tesla’s stock has held a sky-high valuation because Wall Street is pricing in the robotics and AGI upside, not the car business. Wedbush analyst Dan Ives named Tesla a top AI play for 2026, saying the “robotics chapter” for the company is just beginning.

ARK Invest has maintained a long-term price target on TSLA that assigns roughly 70% of its valuation to robotics and autonomy rather than electric vehicles. That framing turns every Optimus update and every AGI claim into a direct stock catalyst.

Key milestones investors are watching in 2026:

  • Optimus Gen 3 reveal, expected in Q1 2026 from the Fremont facility
  • Cybercab production ramp, which began in low volumes in early 2026
  • Removal of safety monitors from the Austin robotaxi fleet
  • xAI’s Grok integration into Optimus for real-time voice and reasoning

The core tension for Tesla investors is straightforward: if Musk is even partially right about Optimus and AGI, the current valuation could look conservative in hindsight. If the timelines slip again, as they repeatedly have, the stock’s premium will be difficult to defend against the backdrop of a declining car business.

What is clear is that the race for physical AI is real, the competition is intensifying, and Tesla has placed the biggest and most public bet on humanoid robots as the path to general intelligence. Whether that bet pays off, 2026 will be the most telling year yet.

Related: Tesla proves it truly is a tech (not car) company with latest move

This post was originally published here.  


Sponsored Story

Key takeaways

  • The SALT deduction is a federal itemized deduction for certain state and local taxes you paid during the tax year.
  • You can only deduct state and local income taxes (or sales taxes), real property taxes, and personal property taxes.
  • Your SALT deduction can’t be greater than the SALT cap for the year ($40,000 for the 2025 tax year), but the cap can be reduced if your modified adjusted gross income is above a certain amount.
  • The SALT cap was $10,000 before the “One Big Beautiful Bill” temporarily increased it for the 2025 to 2029 tax years, and it will revert back to that amount in 2030.

What is the SALT deduction?

The SALT deduction is a federal tax deduction for certain state and local taxes you paid during the year (SALT is short for “state and local taxes”). The total deduction is subject to an annual limit – known as the SALT cap – that’s set by law.

The deduction helps reduce double taxation by providing a federal offset for taxes already paid to state and local governments. “In effect, by claiming the SALT deduction, the federal government reimburses you for some of the taxes you paid to the state,” says Kelly Wallace, a CPA and TurboTax Expert based in Homedale, Idaho.

What is the SALT deduction cap?

The SALT deduction cap is the annual limit placed on the federal deduction for state and local taxes. It didn’t exist before the 2018 tax year, which is when the first cap (created by the Tax Cuts and Jobs Act of 2017) took effect. From 2018 to 2024, the SALT cap was set at $10,000 ($5,000 for married people filing separate returns).

The cap was then increased by the “One Big Beautiful Bill” (OBBB), also known as the Working Families Tax Cut, which was enacted in July 2025. Under the OBBB, the cap jumped to $40,000 ($20,000 if married filing separately) for the 2025 tax year. However, it will increase by 1% each year until 2030, when the cap will drop back down to $10,000 again ($5,000 for MFS filers).

The higher SALT deduction cap isn’t available to everyone, though. For the 2025 to 2029 tax years, it’s gradually reduced if your modified adjusted gross income (MAGI) is above a certain amount. If that’s the case, the SALT cap is cut by 30 cents for every dollar your MAGI is over the threshold amount – but the cap won’t dip below $10,000 ($5,000 for married filing separately filers).

For the 2025 tax year, the phase-out is triggered if your MAGI exceeds $500,000 ($250,000 if you’re married filing separately). As with the SALT cap itself, this threshold is increased by 1% each year from 2026 to 2029.

Since the limit reverts back to $10,000 in 2030, the phase-out – and, therefore, the phase-out thresholds – no longer apply after 2029.

Note: To calculate your MAGI for SALT cap purposes, start with your adjusted gross income (AGI), then add any deduction or exemption you claim that year for:

  • foreign earned income
  • foreign housing costs
  • income for residents of Guam, American Samoa, the Northern Mariana Islands, or Puerto Rico

Example

Let’s take a look at an example of how the SALT cap phase-out works:

For the 2025 tax year, you and your spouse pay $35,000 in eligible state and local taxes, file a joint return, and have a MAGI of $530,000. Since your MAGI is $30,000 over the $500,000 threshold for joint filers, your SALT cap is reduced by $9,000 ($30,000 x .30 = $9,000). That means you can only deduct $31,000 of your state and local taxes ($40,000 – $9,000 = $31,000). The remaining $4,000 of state and local taxes you paid for the year are not deductible ($35,000 – $31,000 = $4,000).

Related: Related:

Who is eligible to claim the SALT deduction?

Since the SALT deduction is an itemized deduction, you must “itemize” on your return to claim it. When you itemize, you claim as many of the deductions on Schedule A that you qualify for. The total amount of all itemized deductions is then subtracted from your AGI, which lowers your taxable income.

However, if you itemize, you can’t take the Standard Deduction, which is a set amount that’s based on your filing status. Like itemized deductions, the Standard Deduction is subtracted from your AGI and lowers your taxable income.

“In most cases, you can choose the higher of the standard deduction or itemized deductions, but you cannot claim both,” Wallace says. Fortunately, you can generally pick whichever amount is higher. However, if you and your spouse file separate returns and one of you itemizes, then the other spouse has to itemize, too. 

What taxes qualify for the SALT deduction?

The following state and local taxes can be deducted on your federal income tax return as part of the SALT deduction:

  • income or general sales taxes
  • real estate taxes
  • personal property taxes

Note that you can deduct income or sales taxes – but not both. You can pick whichever amount is higher. For example, if you live in a state that doesn’t have an income tax but does have a sales tax, you’ll want to deduct your sales tax if you otherwise qualify for the SALT deduction. In addition, Wallace says that the sales tax option “can be especially beneficial if you paid sales taxes on particularly expensive purchases, such as a car, major appliances, or home building or repair materials.”

The total amount of deductible state and local taxes is added together before the SALT cap is applied. So, for instance, if you paid $25,000 in state income taxes, $21,000 in real estate taxes, and $14,000 in personal property taxes in 2025 (for a total of $60,000), you still can only deduct $40,000 (the SALT deduction cap for 2025) even though each separate type of tax was less than $40,000.

Let’s drill down a bit more on the deductibility of each type of state and local tax included in the SALT deduction.

Income taxes

You can deduct state and local income taxes withheld from your paycheck during the tax year. This amount is found on the W-2 form you get from your employer.

You can also deduct withheld state and local income taxes reported on:

However, you can’t deduct any state or local taxes as part of the SALT deduction if they’re deducted on other forms, such as on Schedule C (business profit or loss), Schedule E (supplemental income or loss), or Schedule F (farming profit or loss).

You can also deduct state and local income taxes paid during the tax year for a prior year. For example, when you’re filling out your federal return for the 2025 tax year (which you’ll file in 2026), you can deduct taxes paid in 2025 with your state or local income tax return for the 2024 tax year.

Estimated state and local income tax payments made during the tax year can be deducted, too. This includes any part of a refund from a prior tax year that is credited to your state or local income taxes for the current tax year.

  • TurboTax Tip: “A common strategy for maximizing tax deductions is to ‘bunch’ your expenses all in one year by accelerating or delaying when you pay deductible expenses. The SALT deduction is no different. For instance, prepaying property or state estimated income taxes before year end can give you a much larger deduction.” Kelly Wallace, CPA, Homedale, Idaho

Sales taxes

If you chose to deduct sales taxes instead of income taxes, you can calculate the amount of deductible sales taxes using either the:

  • optional sales tax tables found in the instructions for Schedule A
  • actual state and local general sales taxes you paid during the tax year

The IRS also has an online sales tax deduction calculator that can help you figure the SALT deduction. It’s based on the optional sales tax tables, but also allows you to add sales tax for the purchase of a motor vehicle, boat, airplane, home, or home renovation.

The optional sales tax tables provide an estimated amount of general sales taxes you paid during the year. The estimate is based on your location, income, and the size of your family. You can also add on sales tax from certain “big ticket” items you bought during the year, such as a:

  • motor vehicle (including a car, truck, van, motorcycle, off-road vehicle, or recreational vehicle)
  • airplane
  • boat
  • home (including a mobile home or prefabricated home)
  • major home improvement

The IRS also has an online sales tax deduction calculator that’s based on the optional sales tax tables and related worksheets. The tables won’t necessarily generate the most accurate calculation of your sales tax burden, but this method is much easier than keeping track of all your sales tax payments during the year.

If you’re a big spender and/or purchased expensive items during the year that aren’t reflected in the optional sales tax tables (such as jewelry or art), you might want to use the actual amount of sales tax you paid for the year. That’s because the actual amount could be higher than the estimated amount calculated with the optional sales tax tables. But you’ll have to keep very good records for all your purchases if you go this route.

If you do use your actual sales tax payments, you normally can only deduct “general” sales taxes, which are taxes imposed at one rate for the retail sale of a broad range of items. However, there are two exceptions to the “one rate” rule – you can deduct sales taxes on:

  • food, clothing, and medical supplies even if the tax rate on these items is less than the general sales tax rate
  • motor vehicles even if the tax rate on them is different than the general sales tax rate, but your deduction can’t be based on a rate that’s higher than the general sales tax rate

Compensating use taxes – which some states impose on the use, storage, or consumption of taxable items instead of a sales tax – are also treated as general sales taxes for SALT deduction purposes.

“You will want to carefully consider which method, the tables or actual taxes paid, results in a larger deduction, as the tables may or may not correctly approximate your family’s spending pattern,” says Wallace.

Real estate taxes

Only state and local real estate taxes on non-business property qualify for the SALT deduction. In addition, the tax must be assessed uniformly at a similar rate on all real property in the community, and the tax proceeds have to be used for general community or governmental purposes. 

If they satisfy these requirements, real estate taxes paid at a settlement or closing, through an escrow account, or directly to a taxing authority are deductible. If part of your mortgage payment is for real estate taxes, and your mortgage company keeps them in an escrow account until they’re paid, you can only deduct the amount of tax the mortgage company actually paid during the year.

If you’re thinking of prepaying real estate taxes at the end of the year to boost your SALT deduction, first check to see when the taxes are officially assessed (which is determined under state or local law). That’s because you can only deduct real estate taxes for a particular tax year if they’re assessed before the end of that year. For example, if your real estate taxes aren’t officially assessed until Jan. 1, 2026, but you paid them in December 2025, you can’t deduct them on your 2025 tax return.

Personal property taxes

Only personal property taxes that are based solely on the value of property you own (such as a car or boat) are deductible. They also must be imposed on a yearly basis (although they can be collected more or less than once per year).

If only part of your personal property tax is based on value, then only that portion of the overall tax is deductible. For instance, if you pay an annual tax for your car, and part of the tax is based on the car’s value and part is based on its weight, you can deduct only the part that’s based on value.

As with real estate taxes (see above), you can’t deduct personal property taxes that you pay early unless the tax is actually assessed (under state or local law) before the end of the year that you paid the tax.

What doesn’t count toward the SALT deduction?

State and local taxes, fees, or charges that can’t be deducted as part of the SALT deduction (or elsewhere on your federal tax return) include:

  • alcoholic beverage taxes
  • assessments for improvements that may increase the value of your real property (such as an assessment to build a new sidewalk)
  • cigarette or other tobacco taxes
  • estate taxes
  • fines or penalties paid to a government agency
  • foreign personal or real property taxes
  • gasoline taxes
  • gift taxes
  • homeowner’s association fees
  • inheritance taxes
  • license fees (such as for a marriage or driver’s license)
  • motor vehicle registration fees based on weight, age of the vehicle, or something other than the car’s value 
  • motor vehicle inspection fees
  • service charges for homeowners (such as for water, sewer, or trash collection)
  • transfer or “stamp” taxes paid when you buy or sell a home

In addition, the following federal taxes and fees generally aren’t deductible on your federal income tax return:

  • customs duties
  • estate taxes
  • excise taxes
  • gift taxes
  • income taxes
  • payroll taxes (such as Social Security, Medicare, unemployment, and railroad retirement taxes)

How can I maximize my tax savings when claiming the SALT deduction?

If you plan to itemize on your federal income tax return, there are some things you can do now to boost your tax savings. For instance, you may want to consider:

  • prepaying your real estate or personal property taxes
  • making final state estimated income tax payment early
  • purchasing big-ticket items before the end of the year
  • reducing your MAGI
  • working around the SALT cap (only for certain business owners)

Most of these tax planning strategies will increase your SALT deduction for the current tax year. If your SALT deduction is higher, then the total amount of all your itemized deductions will be higher, too – which can mean the difference between claiming the Standard Deduction or itemizing in the first place (since you can generally pick whichever one is larger).

On the other hand, if your state and local tax burden is already very close to, or more than, the SALT deduction cap for the year, it might not make sense to raise your SALT deduction any further. That’s because anything over the SALT cap will not be deductible. In that case, it may be better to save the increased SALT deduction for the following year.

Let’s take a closer look at each of these strategies. But before taking any action, it might help to consult a tax professional who can set up an overall tax savings plan for you.

Prepaying real or personal property taxes

Depending on where you live, you might have a property tax bill due in January. By paying the bill early – say, in December – you may be able to increase your SALT deduction for the tax year ending in December. This strategy of shifting future payments into the current tax year to increase a tax deduction is called “bunching.” 

However, as noted earlier, bunching property tax payments into a single year only works if the taxes have been officially assessed under state or local law by the end of that tax year.

For example, suppose the local real estate tax on your home is officially assessed on Jan. 1, 2027, and payment is due by Jan. 15, 2027. Since the tax isn’t assessed until 2027, you can’t deduct a December 2026 payment of that tax on your federal income tax return for the 2026 tax year.

On the other hand, suppose the tax is officially assessed on Dec. 1, 2026, and payment is due by Jan. 15, 2027. In that case, if you pay the tax in December 2026, you can include it as part of the SALT deduction claimed on your return for the 2026 tax year.

Just remember that you won’t be able to deduct that payment on your return for the 2027 tax year if you pull it into the 2026 tax year. So, before prepaying a property tax bill, think about whether the increased deduction will be more valuable in the current tax year or the next. If, say, you expect to be in a higher tax bracket next year, it might be better to wait until the real estate taxes are due to pay them.

Making final state estimated income-tax payment early

You can also “bunch” state estimated income tax payments. As with federal estimated tax payments, most states require estimated tax payments for the last quarter of each year to be paid by Jan. 15 of the following year. However, if you pay your fourth-quarter state estimated taxes for the year in December, you can include them in your SALT deduction for that year.

But, again, paying and deducting the estimated tax early means you can’t use it to increase your SALT deduction for the following tax year. So, think twice before moving a deductible payment into the current year, because the deduction might save you even more money next year.

Related: Read more:

Purchasing big-ticket items before the end of the year

If you plan to use the general sales tax you paid during the year to figure your SALT deduction (instead of state and local income taxes), buying certain big-ticket items before the end of the year can increase your SALT deduction. That’s because you generally can deduct the sales tax on the new item when you file your tax return for the year of purchase.

Of course, we don’t recommend buying an expensive new toy just so you can deduct the related sales tax. But if you’re planning to make a purchase soon anyway, buying the item before the end of this year rather than next year might be a savvy tax move.

Also, as with other “bunching” strategies, don’t forget that you’re typically just moving the deduction from one year to another. So, while your SALT deduction will be higher in one year, it will be lower in the other.

Reducing your MAGI

As discussed earlier, the SALT deduction cap is reduced if your MAGI is too high. If your SALT cap is reduced, your SALT deduction might be, too. So, for some higher-income people, one way to raise their SALT deduction is to lower their MAGI – so that the SALT cap isn’t reduced, or reduced as much.

One of the best ways to lower your MAGI (which, for most people, is the same as their AGI) is to contribute to certain tax-advantaged accounts, such as traditional IRAs, traditional 401(k) plans, and health savings accounts. That’s because you may qualify for a tax deduction for your contributions to these accounts, and the deduction will in turn reduce your MAGI.

There are other ways to reduce your MAGI. For instance, if you’re expecting a year-end bonus, ask your boss to delay it until next year. Or, if you’re self-employed, wait until next year to submit some of your late-year invoices. By deferring income to the following year, you reduce your MAGI for the current year.

You can also lower your MAGI by claiming all the “above-the-line” tax deductions you can. That’s because above-the-line deductions reduce your AGI, which then lowers your MAGI. (“Below-the-line” deductions, including the Standard Deduction and itemized deductions, don’t affect your AGI.)

Tax-loss harvesting” can also reduce your MAGI. This is a strategy whereby you sell stock or other assets at a loss that can then be used to offset capital gains (and maybe up to $3,000 of ordinary income).

Working around the SALT cap

Most states with a personal income tax have adopted SALT deduction cap “workarounds,” which help certain business owners bypass the cap by shifting the payment of state taxes from the owners (who are subject to the cap) to the business (which aren’t). The workarounds are optional, so it’s not something business owners have to do. 

These state laws benefit owners of pass-through entities (PTEs), such as partnerships, S corporations, and many limited liability companies. PTEs aren’t subject to the federal income tax, but their income, gains, losses, deductions, and credits are “passed through” to their owners. The owners, in turn, claim those items on their own tax returns.

The rules can differ from state to state, but SALT cap workarounds typically require the PTE to pay a special state tax that’s roughly equal to the state tax the owners would pay on their income from the business. So, in essence, the PTE pays the owners’ personal income tax for them.

In addition, since the tax reduces the net income the PTE can pass through to the owners, the owners usually receive a state tax credit or other type of tax break to help offset the lost income. This also prevents double taxation of that income at the state level.

At the federal level, the special tax is a deductible business expense, which is subtracted from the PTE’s income. The PTE’s income, which is reduced by the business deduction, is passed through to the owners, who claim it on their own federal return. However, unlike the deduction for state and local taxes, the PTE’s business deduction isn’t limited by the SALT cap. So, ultimately, the owners can essentially end up deducting the full amount of the business deduction, even if it exceeds the SALT cap.

The owners’ state tax break also reduces the amount of state and local income taxes they have to deduct on their federal return. This gives them more room under the SALT cap for state and local property taxes. 

Again, a tax adviser or other financial professional may be able to uncover additional strategies that work for you.

Related: Be sure to read:

What should taxpayers expect in the future for the SALT deduction?

As it stands right now, the $40,000 SALT cap in place for the 2025 tax year ($20,000 for married people filing separate returns) will continue to increase by 1% each year through 2029. After that, the cap is scheduled to drop back down to $10,000 ($5,000 for married people filing separately). The MAGI thresholds for the cap’s phase-out will also increase by 1% each year until 2030, when the phase-out is repealed.

However, the increased SALT cap could be temporarily extended, made permanent, or changed in other ways before it expires in 2030. New legislation would have to be passed in order for that to happen, but it’s certainly not out of the question.

If changes are made, we’ll be sure to let you know. So, stay tuned…and don’t worry about missing out on potential tax savings in the future.

Frequently asked questions about the SALT deduction

Q1: Where do I claim the SALT deduction on my tax return?

You can claim the SALT deduction on Schedule A along with all your other itemized deductions. See if you’re better off claiming the Standard Deduction or itemized deductions.

Q2: Who benefits from the SALT deduction?

Typically, wealthier taxpayers and people who live in states with higher state and local taxes benefit the most from the SALT deduction.

If your income is on the high end, you’re more likely to claim itemized deductions instead of the Standard Deduction. And, of course, if you don’t itemize, you can’t claim the SALT deduction. Wealthier people also tend to pay more in state and local taxes, since their income is higher, they buy more stuff, their homes are more valuable, and they own more items that are subject to personal property taxes.

Itemizers who live in high-tax states also benefit more from the SALT deduction – again, because their state and local tax burden is higher.

The higher SALT cap is particularly helpful for both groups, since they now may be able to deduct more of the state and local taxes they pay. Find out which states have the highest and lowest taxes.

Q3: What are some common SALT deduction mistakes?

Some common mistakes people make when claiming the SALT deduction include:

  • including non-deductable payments, like special assessments for local improvements, homeowners’ association fees, or inheritance taxes
  • failing to deduct sales taxes when they’re greater than your state and local income taxes 
  • claiming both sales taxes and state and local income taxes
  • forgetting to add the tax on certain big-ticket items if you’re deducting sales taxes using the optional sales tax tables
  • ignoring the SALT cap and claiming too much
  • deducting state and local taxes that weren’t actually paid during the tax year (even though a tax bill arrived in the mail during the tax year)
  • prepaying property taxes that weren’t assessed during the tax year
  • counting taxes twice, such as when you pay property taxes as part of your monthly mortgage payment and then again when the mortgage company pays your tax bill
  • overlooking the Alternative Minimum Tax (AMT), which can be triggered by a large SALT deduction
  • including business-related tax payments in the SALT deduction

Check out some other common mistakes to avoid when doing your taxes.

When you want to do your own taxes, it’s quick and easy with TurboTax Do It Yourself. We’ll get you your max refund with step-by-step guidance and 100% accurate calculations—guaranteed.

Get started now by logging into TurboTax and file with confidence.

Related: Read next:

This post was originally published here.  


Century-old brands are increasingly finding that nostalgia alone is not enough to survive today’s retail environment. Changing consumer preferences, rising operating costs, and intensifying competition have forced many once-leading retailers to shrink their footprints or disappear entirely.

Over the past few decades, iconic names such as Sears and C&A have enacted mass store closures or completely exited markets. For many legacy retailers, the loss of a physical presence has also reduced their relevance among younger consumers.

Now, another longstanding brand is dramatically scaling back its brick-and-mortar footprint, selling dozens of locations across North America after 106 years in the retail business as it navigates its bankruptcy restructuring.

Eddie Bauer puts 174 North America store leases up for sale

Eddie Bauer LLC, the retail operator of several Eddie Bauer stores across the U.S. and Canada, is putting its entire retail footprint up for sale, as confirmed in a press release.

Real estate brokerage firm RCS Real Estate Advisors has been hired to market around 174 store leases, including 150 locations across 40 U.S. states and 24 locations across six Canadian provinces.

In total, the portfolio represents more than 1.08 million square feet of retail space, with stores averaging around 6,300 square feet each. The locations include malls, lifestyle centers, and high-traffic retail corridors.

RCS Real Estate Advisors will manage all marketing efforts, lease assignments, and negotiations with Eddie Bauer and its advisor. Any final transactions will require approval from the bankruptcy court. 

“This portfolio represents a rare opportunity to secure legacy retail locations in established centers nationwide,” said RCS Real Estate Advisors CEO Ivan Friedman in the press release. “Our team is actively engaging the market to drive competitive interest and efficient lease dispositions.”

The sale process is part of the company’s ongoing Chapter 11 restructuring, and RCS Real Estate Advisors is focused on “maximizing value and identifying opportunities for landlords, retailers, and other uses seeking quality retail space in proven trade areas.”

Founded in 1920 in Seattle, Washington, Eddie Bauer became one of the best-known outdoor apparel brands in the U.S. At its peak in 2001, the retailer operated nearly 600 locations, according to data from CoStar Group Inc.

While the Eddie Bauer brand and intellectual property are owned by Authentic Brands Group and SPARC Group LLC, day-to-day physical store operations are managed by Catalyst Brands, which includes Eddie Bauer LLC among its operating entities.

Eddie Bauer operator files for Chapter 11 bankruptcy

Eddie Bauer LLC filed for Chapter 11 bankruptcy protection on February 9, 2026, in the U.S. Bankruptcy Court for the District of New Jersey.

According to the court documents reviewed by The Street, the company reported more than $1 billion in debt, citing declining sales, supply chain disruptions, inflation, tariff uncertainty, and other retail industry headwinds.

As part of the filing, the company reached a restructuring support agreement with its secured lenders, allowing it to begin liquidation sales at approximately 180 stores while simultaneously seeking a buyer for its North American retail business.

If no buyer is found, this could lead to a full wind-down of Eddie Bauer’s U.S. and Canada stores by April 30, 2026.

The bankruptcy proceedings do not affect the brand’s e-commerce operations, wholesale partnerships, or international stores, which are managed by several licensees.

Eddie Bauer has filed for bankruptcy before

This is not the first time Eddie Bauer has faced financial distress.

Eddie Bauer’s former parent company, Spiegel Inc., filed for Chapter 11 bankruptcy in March 2003, leading to the closure of more than 80 underperforming stores and outlet locations.

Following a restructuring, Eddie Bauer emerged from Spiegel’s bankruptcy in June 2005 as an independent company called Eddie Bauer Holdings, Inc., according to the SEC filings.

More Retail Store Closures:

However, the turnaround was short-lived.

In June 2009, Eddie Bauer Holdings Inc. filed for Chapter 11 bankruptcy protection as the company struggled with heavy debt, declining sales, and pressure from the recession.

A month later, the retailer was acquired out of bankruptcy by private equity firm Golden Gate Capital for around $286 million, according to a press release.

Retail analysts say Eddie Bauer lost its competitive edge

Despite Eddie Bauer’s long history, some retail analysts say the brand has gradually lost its competitive edge.

GlobalData Managing Director Neil Saunders has criticized the company’s store experience and lack of differentiation.

“I really struggle to understand what the point of difference is,” wrote Saunders on RetailWire. “Stores are crammed full of product, are hard to shop, and don’t provide anywhere near enough inspiration.”

Others say Eddie Bauer’s struggles reflect broader challenges facing traditional apparel retailers.

Benedict Enterprises LLC Scott Benedict said the company’s bankruptcy highlights how quickly established brands can lose relevance.

“Eddie Bauer’s exit from physical retail and its subsequent bankruptcy underscore timeless lessons about relevance, investment discipline, and the unforgiving pace of change in apparel retail,” wrote Benedict. “Even well-known heritage brands can quickly lose ground when their value proposition no longer aligns with what today’s consumers want, where they shop, and how they engage.”

CEO and Strategic Board Advisor Mohamed Amer added that brand ownership structures can sometimes prioritize financial returns over long-term brand stewardship.

“The question is whether retail investors will finally admit that brand licenses without brand stewardship are expensive ways to disappoint customers while generating returns for portfolio operators,” wrote Amer.

Other retailers face similar struggles

Eddie Bauer joins a growing list of retail chains struggling with store closures and bankruptcy filings over the past few years, as traditional mall traffic declines and online competition intensifies.

Other retail chains facing bankruptcy and closures 

  • Claire’s: Filed for Chapter 11 bankruptcy for the second time in August 2025 and plans to close nearly 300 stores, according to The Street.
  • Forever 21: Filed for Chapter 11 bankruptcy again in March 2025 and liquidated all its U.S. stores ahead of closures, as reported by The Street.
  • Francesca’s: Francesca’s filed for Chapter 11 bankruptcy a second time in January 2026 and liquidated all its remaining 457 stores to prepare for closures, per The Street.

Related: Apple closes all stores in fast-growing market

This post was originally published here.  


Whenever there’s a spike in geopolitical tensions, gold usually wastes no time in pushing forward with aplomb. 

However, since the Iran war has started, the shiny yellow metal hasn’t followed the usual script.

Morgan Stanley analysts, though, believe that the recent choppiness isn’t indicative of fading safe-haven demand. Instead, Amy Gower and her team point to a couple of potent forces, a stronger U.S. dollar and a scramble for liquidity, as reasons for the sluggishness.

For some color, according to Reuters, after the commencement of the Iran war, spot gold surged to $5,260/oz on Monday, then pulled back sharply with investors “dashing for cash.” 

The correction was more pronounced on March 3, when spot gold dropped nearly 3.6% to roughly $5,137/oz

Moreover, at the time of writing, as per GoldPrice.org, gold was $5,165.63 per ounce, or roughly $166.08 per gram and $166,078.74 per kilogram.

In my last piece, covering the safe-haven metal, I covered JPMorgan’s big reset higher in its long-term forecast, bumping it to $4,500 while also keeping its eye-popping $6,300 year-end 2026 call intact. 

When that story ran on Feb. 25, 2026, gold traded at around $5,202 per ounce, which implies a drop of $36.37 per ounce, or roughly 0.70% from current prices.

According to the big bank’s analysts, expectations around Fed rate cuts, evolving currency markets, geopolitical tensions, and broader liquidity issues continue to influence gold’s current trajectory.

Interestingly, I covered a Bank of America piece in which the bank dispelled the AI doom narrative, calling it mostly psychology-driven fear. That’s the same thread Morgan Stanley is running on, that narratives move quickly and often move markets.

Moreover, I also covered billionaire Ray Dalio recently after Davos, who also took a similar long-term view, arguing that having a 5% to 15% slant in your portfolios to gold makes sense considering the market’s fragility.

Morgan Stanley feels that dynamic is unlikely to last long. If geopolitical tensions remain elevated, the bank expects gold prices will eventually catch up.

Morgan Stanley links gold’s decline to dollar strength and liquidity pressures

Photo by adventtr on Getty Images

Wall Street’s targets on gold

  • Morgan Stanley: $5,700/oz (bull case, second half of 2026).
  • Goldman Sachs: $5,400/oz (by December 2026).
  • J.P. Morgan: $6,300/oz (2026 year-end / 4Q 2026).
  • UBS: $6,200/oz (target for March/June/September 2026).
  • Deutsche Bank: $6,000/oz (2026 target).
  • Citi Research: $5,000/oz (0–3 month target).
    Source: Reuters, Investing.

Related: Morgan Stanley delivers curt 2-word verdict on S&P 500

Morgan Stanley explains gold’s puzzling post-war pullback

As mentioned earlier, Morgan Stanley feels gold’s recent wobble is a result of multiple macro forces colliding at once. 

More Gold:

Gower and her team said that the king metal’s initial move following the Iran ation followed the usual script. 

Initially, gold rallied sharply, but the move quickly ran into significant pressure from currency markets and broader risk positioning.

That correction fed into a sudden bid for the greenback.

Related: Veteran analyst drops eye-popping price target on Palantir stock

As per a recent Reuters poll, the U.S. dollar has risen nearly 1.5% since the beginning of the war. Moreover, dollar strength also directly ties to Fed-cut expectations. By March 5, the dollar index continues rising higher, up 0.11% to 98.91.

On March 3, commentary linked the dollar’s ascent to fading easing bets, with money markets pricing in just 37 bps of cuts for the year, compared to 60 bps the previous Friday. That sentiment has everything to do with oil-driven inflation fears, which have made the near term much less certain.

On top of that, Morgan Stanley argues that liquidity dynamics are another critical piece of the puzzle. In times of market-related stress, investors usually sell off liquid assets, including gold, simply to raise cash. That leads to a temporary overpowering  of the metal’s safe-haven bid.

The bank sees that sluggishness as more tactical than structural. 

If geopolitical tensions continue to stay elevated and macro conditions stabilize, Morgan Stanley forecasts gold to catch up to the current risk backdrop, pushing toward $5,700 per ounce later this year.

SPDR Gold Shares vs SPDR S&P 500 ETF Trust returns

  • 2026 YTD (through March 4, 2026): SPDR Gold Shares (GLD) 19.05% vs SPDR S&P 500 ETF Trust (SPY) 0.47%.
  • 2025: GLD 63.68% vs SPY 17.72%.
  • 2024: GLD 26.66% vs SPY 24.89%.
  • 2023: GLD 12.69% vs SPY 26.18%.
  • 2022: GLD -0.77% vs SPY -18.17%.
  • 2021: GLD -4.15% vs SPY 28.73%.
  • 2020: GLD 24.82% vs SPY 18.33%.
    Source: FinanceCharts.

Related: Bank of America drops blunt message on the economy

This post was originally published here.  


Spectrum, which is owned by Charter Communications, has faced significant headwinds in its broadband business as it struggles to compete with growing rivals. After seeing hundreds of thousands of its internet customers jump ship over the past year, the company has received approval to acquire a major competitor to help reverse those losses. 

In Charter Communications’ latest earnings report, the company revealed that Spectrum lost a whopping 119,000 internet customers during the fourth quarter of 2025 alone. For the full year of 2025, Spectrum saw more than 400,000 internet customers cancel their service. 

During an earnings call in January, Charter Communications CEO Christopher Winfrey told analysts that in the company’s broadband business, “competition for new customers remains high.” Specifically, he flagged increased competition from fiber and fixed wireless internet providers and said that low move activity in the U.S. housing market has also created additional challenges. 

“The operating environment for new sales, in particular internet, continues to reflect low move rates and higher mobile substitution,” said Winfrey. “Along with both expanded cell phone internet competition and fiber overlap growth, similar to earlier in the year, collectively, that drove fourth-quarter internet sales slightly lower year over year.”

Many consumers across the country have been exploring nontraditional options for internet service as they battle higher prices, especially from cable TV providers. Spectrum was one of the providers that raised its internet plan prices in 2025. 

A survey from Reviews.org last year found that 63% of Americans want lower monthly costs attached to their internet service, and three in four have either downgraded, canceled, or considered switching internet providers to save money. 

Fixed wireless internet (or 5G home internet) services, often offered through phone carriers such as T-Mobile, Verizon, and AT&T, have become popular for their affordable prices and greater availability in rural areas compared to traditional wired internet.

“A 5G fixed wireless service is probably not for everyone, but more and more this technology has gained a reputation as a practical, useful, and cost-effective home internet option,” said Peter Holslin, managing editor at Reviews.org, in a statement.

Charter acquires major rival amid Spectrum customer losses, with caveats

Amid rising competition, Charter announced plans in May last year to acquire Cox Communications for $34.5 billion to “create an industry leader” in mobile, broadband and video entertainment, according to a press release.  

The acquisition will introduce Cox customers to Charter’s pricing and packaging structure, including no annual contracts for residential services. Also, Cox customers will have the option to pay less for Spectrum’s bundled services or keep their current plans.

“This combination will augment our ability to innovate and provide high-quality, competitively priced products, delivered with outstanding customer service, to millions of homes and businesses,” said Winfrey in the press release. 

On Feb. 27, the Federal Communications Commission finally approved the acquisition, but under several conditions that Charter has signed off on, affecting its customers and employees. 

As it acquires Cox, Charter will now invest billions of dollars to upgrade its network and deliver high-speed internet service to homes and businesses nationwide, especially in rural areas, according to a recent press release. This means that consumers will see “faster broadband and lower prices.”

Related: Spectrum drops bold new offer after heavy customer losses

Charter has also committed to onshoring all jobs that are currently handled offshore by Cox within 18 months, reflecting its “commitment to a 100% U.S.-based customer sales and service employee workforce.” 

It also agreed to offer Cox employees a minimum starting wage of $20 per hour and full benefits, including “Invest in America” Trump accounts.

In addition, Charter has agreed to “new safeguards to protect against DEI discrimination,” vowing to commit to hiring, recruiting, and promoting individuals based on their skills, qualifications, and experience.

“By approving this deal, the FCC ensures big wins for Americans,” said FCC Brendan Carr in a press release. “This deal means that jobs are coming back to America that had been shipped overseas.” 

“It means that modern, high-speed networks will get built out in more communities across rural America,” he continued. “And it means that customers will get access to lower priced plans. On top of this, the deal enshrines protections against DEI discrimination.”

Charter’s Spectrum falls behind broadband rivals as competition intensifies 

Charter’s FCC-approved acquisition of Cox comes after Verizon, another growing competitor in the broadband market, also completed a $20 billion acquisition of Frontier Communications in January. 

The deal aims to rapidly expand its wireless and broadband services to current and new customers. After the acquisition was finalized, Verizon’s network footprint increased. It now reaches 31 states and Washington, D.C., posing a major threat to Spectrum and other telecom giants.

More Telecom News:

AT&T, another Spectrum rival, also finalized its $5.75 billion acquisition of Lumen’s Mass Markets fiber business in February. As a result, AT&T’s fiber internet service is now available across 32 states. 

While Spectrum takes a bold step to battle intense competition, it struggles to surpass its fixed wireless and wired internet rivals in consumer satisfaction across several regions nationwide, according to a J.D. Power survey from last year.

How Spectrum compares to competitors in U.S. consumer satisfaction:

  • On a 1,000-point scale, the average satisfaction score for wired internet is 554, while wireless internet scores 647.
  • Along the East Coast, Spectrum trails several wired internet competitors, including Verizon, Cox Communications, and Xfinity, earning a satisfaction score of 526.
  • In the North Central region, Spectrum earned a 540 rating, placing behind AT&T (554) and Xfinity (551).
  • On the West Coast, consumer ratings favor AT&T and Frontier Communications over Spectrum.
  • In the South, Spectrum ranks below GFiber, AT&T, Xfinity and Frontier Communications.
    Source: J.D. Power 

Carl Lepper, senior director of technology, media and telecom intelligence at J.D. Power, notes in a press release that “the internet landscape is clearly evolving,” as more consumers favor wireless internet providers. 

“The high satisfaction we are seeing in the wireless internet segment is attributed to internet speed, availability and the hassle-free ability to start, combined with a lower price,” said Lepper. “Additionally, with more provider options, customers are able to choose the service that best fits their lifestyle.”

Related: Spectrum revamps internet service as customers exit

This post was originally published here.  


Seeing liquidation sales and store-closing signs at once-iconic mall anchors has become a familiar sight across North America, slowly taking away shopping options in many communities and signaling continued challenges across the retail sector.

Major department store chains such as Macy’s (M), JCPenney (JCP), and Kohl’s (KSS) have shuttered locations amid shifting consumer demand, higher operational costs, and intensifying competition.

Now, another legacy retailer is evaluating its future.

After navigating a U.S. bankruptcy restructuring, closing underperforming stores, and working to restore profitability, a Canadian outdoor apparel brand could potentially be selling its entire business after more than five decades.

Roots explores a potential sale

Roots Corporation (RROTF) confirmed in a recent press release that it has initiated a formal review of strategic alternatives to maximize shareholder value, including a potential sale of the company.

The review is part of a broader value-maximization strategy, and the company will continue executing its current business plan during the process. Roots stated it does not intend to provide further updates unless and until a specific transaction is approved or disclosure becomes legally required. There’s also no guarantee that a deal will occur.

The move follows the company’s appointment of Rosie Pouzar as Chief Commercial Officer in February 2026. Roots CEO Meghan Roach said the leadership addition intends to sharpen enterprise priorities, accelerate decision-making, and unlock new growth opportunities, according to a company press release.

Roots went public in October 2017 at $12 per share but has struggled to consistently meet profitability expectations since its IPO. While the company has generated free cash flow in multiple periods, margins have remained under pressure.

TD Cowen analyst Brian Morrison said in a note that a potential transaction could value the company’s shares between $4 and $4.5 based on valuation multiples of comparable retailers, as reported by Bloomberg.

Strategic review processes are often initiated when companies seek to unlock shareholder value, respond to market changes, reduce financial risk, gain access to capital, or pursue ownership structures better suited for long-term growth.

Roots U.S. Chapter 7 bankruptcy and restructuring

Roots filed for Chapter 7 bankruptcy protection in the U.S. in 2020 amid financial challenges resulting from the COVID-19 pandemic. At the time, the company reported approximately $9.6 million in assets and $15.4 million in liabilities tied to its U.S. operations.

The filing led to the liquidation and closure of nearly all its U.S. stores, leaving just two physical locations nationwide. However, Roots maintained its e-commerce platform to preserve market distribution without expanding its brick-and-mortar footprint.   

More Store Closures:

Today, the company operates around 100 stores in Canada, two in the U.S., and over 100 partner-operated locations in Asia. It also has an e-commerce platform that delivers to more than 70 countries worldwide.

Roots’ multi-year turnaround strategy shows progress, but profitability remains shaky

During a June 2025 earnings call, Roots unveiled a multi-year turnaround plan focused on in-store customer engagement, strengthening digital merchandising, optimizing inventory availability, and enhancing omnichannel capabilities to boost sales and get its business back on track.

As part of this strategy, the company has closed underperforming locations to allocate capital toward stores with stronger long-term profitability potential.

Roots said the strategy had begun showing early signs of progress.

In the first quarter of fiscal 2025, sales increased nearly 7% year over year. However, the company still reported a net loss of almost $8 million CAD ($5.87 million USD).

By the third quarter of fiscal 2025, sales rose 6.8% to $71.5 million CAD ($52.43 million USD). Net income totaled $2.3 million ($1.69 million USD), down 4.5% from the prior year, signaling slower earnings growth despite higher sales.

Roots CFO Leon Wu said in the earnings report that investments in strategic growth strategies continue to deliver results.

“We have sustained positive sales momentum and maintained the underlying margins of those sales, supporting a stronger balance sheet with year-over-year reductions in net debt,” Wu said.

Roots’ shares fell 4.1% on March 2 before rebounding 5.6% on March 4 following news of the strategic review. The company’s market capitalization stands at approximately $118.03 million CAD ($86.34 million USD), with a high debt-to-equity ratio and limited liquidity reflecting ongoing financial strain, according to MarketBeat.

What this means for investors

A potential sale of the business could provide new opportunities, including access to new capital. However, if no deal is made, the company’s ability to expand margins and reduce debt will likely determine long-term shareholder returns.

Related: Apple closes all stores in fast-growing market

This post was originally published here.  


For many households, tax season feels like a test you never studied for. You gather receipts, log into your tax software, and hope for the best.

But the truth is that much of what determines your tax bill was decided months ago by how you earned, saved, and spent your money.

The U.S. tax code already includes several deductions and credits aimed squarely at families. The problem is that many people either overlook them or assume they do not qualify. In some cases, missing just one benefit can mean leaving thousands of dollars on the table.

Here are five IRS-recognized strategies families should keep in mind before filing.

Strategy 1: Make the most of the Child Tax Credit

Few tax benefits matter more to families than the Child Tax Credit. Eligible taxpayers can claim up to $2,200 for each qualifying child under age 17, a permanent increase that took effect for the 2025 tax year under the One Big Beautiful Bill.

For some households, part of that credit is refundable, meaning it can increase a refund even if little tax is owed.

Who qualifies for the Child Tax Credit

  • The child must be under age 17 by the end of the tax year
  • The child must have a qualifying relationship to the taxpayer, such as a son, daughter, or stepchild
  • The child must have lived with the taxpayer for more than half the year
  • Income limits apply, with the credit phasing out for higher earners
  • Shared custody and multigenerational households are common sources of errors

For families with more than one child, this credit alone can significantly reduce a tax bill.

Strategy 2: Use the Child and Dependent Care Credit

Child care is expensive, and the tax code offers some relief for families who need it in order to work. The Child and Dependent Care Credit applies to qualifying expenses such as day care, after-school programs, and in some cases in-home caregivers.

More Personal Finance:

This credit does not require itemizing deductions, and it can make a noticeable difference for working parents who spend a large share of their income on care.

How the credit is calculated

  • Up to $3,000 in expenses for one qualifying person can be used to calculate the credit
  • Up to $6,000 for two or more qualifying persons
  • The percentage of expenses you can claim depends on income, with lower earners generally receiving a larger benefit
  • The credit applies to care for qualifying children and dependent adults

Strategy 3: Reduce taxable income through retirement savings

Retirement accounts remain one of the most reliable ways to lower taxable income while building long-term financial security.

Contributions to traditional employer plans such as 401(k)s and 403(b)s reduce taxable wages before they even appear on a W-2. Traditional IRA contributions may also be deductible, depending on income and whether a workplace plan is available.

Health Savings Accounts offer an additional option, especially for families enrolled in high-deductible health plans. Self-employed workers have even more flexibility through SEP IRAs and solo 401(k) plans, which allow deductions based on a percentage of net self-employment income.

For lower- and middle-income households, retirement contributions may also unlock the Saver’s Credit, which adds another layer of tax relief on top of the deduction itself.

Strategy 4: Use education tax benefits where they apply

Families paying for college or career training may be eligible for education-related tax breaks. The American Opportunity Tax Credit can be worth up to $2,500 per student for the first four years of higher education, and part of it may be refundable.

The Lifetime Learning Credit applies more broadly, including to graduate courses and job-skill programs.

Other education benefits to check

  • Some borrowers may deduct interest paid on student loans without itemizing
  • Income limits apply, and not all loans qualify
  • The American Opportunity Tax Credit requires the student to be enrolled at least half-time
  • The Lifetime Learning Credit has no limit on the number of years it can be claimed

Taken together, these benefits can meaningfully offset the cost of tuition and related expenses for households supporting students.

Strategy 5: Decide carefully between the standard deduction and itemizing

Every taxpayer faces the same basic choice: take the standard deduction or itemize deductions. The standard deduction is larger than it used to be, which means many families no longer itemize.

Still, itemizing can make sense for households with substantial deductible expenses. Mortgage interest, state and local taxes within the legal limit, and charitable contributions are among the most common itemized deductions.

When itemizing is worth calculating

  • You bought a home and paid significant mortgage interest during the year
  • You made large charitable donations
  • You faced major unreimbursed medical expenses exceeding a threshold of your income
  • Your combined state and local taxes were close to or above the deduction cap

Families who fall into any of these categories should calculate their taxes both ways. Choosing the higher of the two can lead to meaningful savings.

Tax savings rarely come from obscure loopholes. They come from understanding which deductions and credits already exist and applying them correctly. For families, that often means combining multiple strategies rather than relying on just one.

Because many of these benefits depend on income levels and personal circumstances, professional tax advice or reliable tax software can help ensure nothing is missed. The IRSregularly publishes guidance on these provisions through its Tax Tips and official publications, and staying informed can be one of the simplest ways to avoid paying more than necessary.

Related: Arizona retirement taxes explained

This post was originally published here.  


Pulling up to a gas station for a refill has become, well, unsettling, thanks to the U.S.-Israeli war with Iran.

The U.S. national average pump price, now at $3.198 a gallon, up nine cents from March 3, according to AAA data.

It’s risen 7.2% just since Feb. 27, less than a week ago. The price, in fact, is now up 12.65% year-to-date.

By many accounts, the United States and Israel have the upper hand in the campaign, but there have been no signs Iran will agree to demands it stop its nuclear research or that it halts being a belligerent in the Persian Gulf region.

For one thing, no one is sure yet who is leading Iran, following the Israeli attack that killed Supreme Leader Ali Khameinei on Feb. 28. And it’s even less clear how Iran will be governed going forward. It has been ruled by Shiite clerics since 1980.

So, motorists filling up and hoping for a reprieve will have to be patient.

A conflict that was slow to bubble up

Very few experts expected this situation when 2025 ended. The world was awash in crude oil, and crude prices had dropped nearly 53% since peaking in the summer of 2022.

Gasoline prices had dropped all the way through the summer.

Related: Crude, natural gas prices jump on Iranian news

Better, there was confidence the situation would get better for consumers in 2026 and maybe not so good for the companies that produce the fuel that fill the tanks of cars, SUVS, minivans, pickup trucks and big trucks that haul freight hither and yon.

Crises with Iran and allies blow up the scenario

Alas , it didn’t happen. And it’s not clear it will happen in the next few weeks. Maybe it will by the end of the year.

The problem facing motorists has been this: The business of producing oil and gas products is global. And 20% of the oil and a similar proportion of the world’s liquid natural gas is produced in and around the Persian Gulf.

That supply is at risk because all that oil and gas must pass through the Strait of Hormuz. Iran is on the north side of the strait. The other side of the strait is the Musandam Peninsula, controlled by the United Arab Emirates and the Musandam Governate. The governate is part of Oman.

Iran, mostly by threats, has largely closed the strait to traffic because it can attack ships with missiles, drones, long-range artillery and other weapons, energy consultant Bob McNally told CNBC.

McNally is the founder of the Rapidan Energy Group, based in Washington, D.C. McNally was a senior director for International Energy during President George W. Bush’s first term.

Much of Iran’s armed forces are controlled by the Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps, who also controls much of the Iranian economy, and McNally and others believe they won’t give up their influence/power willingly.

So, Iran will be dangerous for the near term at least.

There was hope oil prices were done rising. Light sweet crude, the U.S. benchmark, was up slightly at $74.66 a barrel on March 4.

But investors seemed more interested in what’s head and pushed energy stocks lower.

The Energy Select Sector SPDR exchange-traded fund was down 0.6% to $56.19. Exxon Mobil, Chevron, Halliburton, SLB (formerly Schlumberger) and ConocoPhillips were fell by 1% or more.

Why the tankers won’t move

The danger affects motorists this way: Maritime insurers are simply reluctant to insure ships going through the strait.

So, perhaps 150 tankers and more than 100 container ships are anchored in the Persian Gulf. Meanwhile, another 100 tankers are anchored outside the strait along dozens of cargo ships, according to DTN, a Minnesota company that tracks shipping, weather and financial patterns.

To combat the problem, President Trump promised Monday that U.S. naval forces could act as escorts to get ships in and out, and he said the U.S. International Development Finance Corp. could act as a backstop for maritime insurers.

But it wasn’t clear how fast the plans could be put in place. Which means there is continued risk for all concerned.

Defense Secretary Pete Hegseth announced on March 4 that a U.S. submarine sank an Irani warship off the coast of Sri Lanka. The Guardian newspaper said 87 Iranian sailors were killed in the torpedo attack. The ship had been engaged in a naval exercise organized by India.

Related: Big Oil supermajor stuns with blunt Venezuela message

This post was originally published here.  


On February 17, 2026, Blackstone announced its decision to acquire Champions Group, a provider of HVAC services, from Odyssey Investment Partners, LLC, in a definitive agreement.

Who is the Champions Group?

Leland Smith founded Champions Group in 2000. They provide home services, including residential repair, air conditioning, heating, and HVAC.  The Champions group  has 1,800 fields, technically, and 150,000 active members.

Though the terms of the deal will not be disclosed until the first half of 2026, Reports from Bloomberg and other industry insiders have valued it at around $2.5 billion.

Given earnings of $140 million, the deal trades at 18.5x EBITDA, which is a very high value and high cash flow, especially in a recession.

Odyssey Investment Partners is making a large minority investment, signaling that it values the business and the benefits of Blackstone’s ownership.

Think about it. The home repair industry is a lucrative business. Someone is always going to have their bathroom fixed or have heating issues in the winter.

More Fund Managers:

The “perpetual” powerhouse: why BXPE is lowkey built different

The Blackstone Private Equity Strategies Fund (BXPE) is executing the Champions Group acquisition, which Blackstone’s 10-K says is designed for “privately negotiated, equity-oriented investments” that will leverage the firm’s institutional scale.

Related: Blue Owl Capital liquidity trap or shadow bank misinformation wave?

Blackstone’s Perpetual Capital strategy crossed a large AUM threshold at the end of 2025, so BXPE isn’t pressured to the forced-exit timelines that make up traditional buyout funds.

Patient capital is required from the hundreds of local HVAC operators being rolled up, and Blackstone has the time & incentives to let compounding do its thing.

The broader asset management trend: less SaaS, more physicality

Blackstone’s total AUM reached $1.3 trillion at the end of December 31, 2025, yet the more interesting story is how Blackstone is deploying those numbers.

Within all the SaaS fears and AI craziness, Blackstone is ironically acting like an underdog, betting on “un-disruptable” labor. While you can use ChatGPT to ask ‘how to fix a burst pipe,’ you cannot replace human labor.

Related: KKR Arctos deal reshapes sports, GP solutions platform

It can be seen as almost a defense asset that has physical tangibility.

Champions Group has acquired brands like McAfee Heating and Bee’s Plumbing, and Blackstone aims to target “local mom-and-pop” shops under the Champions umbrella to reach a national scale.

For home services, the U.S. market exceeds $600 billion, but remains heavily fragmented, as most operators/businesses run on pen/paper workflows.

Blackstone is providing the institutional infrastructure to an industry that’s never had it.

The deal is being run by Blackstone’s Perpetual Private Equity Strategy (BXPE), which differs from traditional funds that are expected to sell companies in a short time period, such as 5-7 years.

BXPE is also meant to hold Champions Group “perpetual,” to focus on compounding growth and expansion rather than a traditional in-and-out.

Recent Blackstone (BX) insider activity: smart money is doubling down

Form 4 filings from February 2026 show key insiders’ share acquisitions, including Ruth Porat, a member of Blackstone’s Board of Directors.

At the leadership level, it suggests confidence in Blackstone’s pivot to tangible, not-so-easy-to-AI businesses far from being priced in.

Reporting Person

Issuer

Date

Amount

Price

Ownership

Blackstone Holdings IV

Blackstone Private Real Estate Credit & Income Fund

2/23/2026

191,131.498

$26.16

Indirect (via BCRED X)

Blackstone Holdings IV

Blackstone Private Real Estate Credit & Income Fund

2/23/2026

955,657.492

$26.16

Indirect (via BMACX)

Ruth Porat

Blackstone Inc. (BX)

2/17/2026

149.384

$131.11

Direct

Ruth Porat

Blackstone Inc. (BX)

2/17/2026

275.6036

$130.30

Direct

Ruth Porat

Blackstone Inc. (BX)

2/17/2026

99.589

$131.11

Indirect (Family LP)

Related: Bankrupt auto parts giant cuts 1,267 jobs

This post was originally published here.  

A Las Vegas hotel-casino was demolished on Thursday morning after the establishment closed during the COVID-19 pandemic and never reopened.

Eastside Cannery Hotel-Casino opened on the Boulder Strip in 2008, replacing the older Nevada Palace casino. It catered to locals rather than tourists, offering value-oriented gaming, dining and stays away from the crowded Las Vegas Strip.

The nearby Longhorn Casino hosted a demolition party to give guests a front-row seat to the implosion, selling parking spots for $25 and rooms for $250, FOX5 Las Vegas reported.

Las Vegas locals and people from across the country showed up at 2 a.m. to bid an explosive farewell to the building.

LAS VEGAS CASINO OWNER OFFERS UNIQUE DEAL TO ENTICE VISITORS BACK AMID SLUMP

“I’m from San Diego, and this is one of my favorite casinos,” Gus Biner told FOX5. “It’s just I have never seen a building come down live, you always see it on the news but never live.”

“I want to watch it, I want to feel it,” Mark Carson told the outlet. “I’m a retired carpenter. I spent all my career building them. This will be the first time I watch it in real life, bring ’em down.”

IVANA TRUMP’S MANHATTAN TOWNHOUSE SELLS FOR $14M AFTER $12.5M PRICE CUT

The Cannery closed in March 2020 due to the COVID-19 pandemic shutdowns in Nevada.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Boyd Gaming, which acquired the hotel-casino in 2016 as part of its purchase of Cannery Casino Resorts, said it remained shuttered after most other casinos reopened due to insufficient market demand after more than five years of closure.

This post was originally published here


The U.S. automotive market had a wild 2025, thanks to the uncertain climate under President Donald Trump’s mercurial tariff policy. Still, analysts at Bank of America believe that at least three U.S. car companies are worth investing in.

Carmakers such as Ford played the change in the U.S. economic policy perfectly. Ford rode dealer incentives, combined with consumer anxiety about tariffs, to become the top-selling brand in the U.S. during the year’s first half. Ford said total sales in the second quarter rose at a rate seven times that of the overall auto industry. 

It sold 1.1 million units in the first six months, a 6.6% year-over-year increase.

But Ford wasn’t the only beneficiary. GMincreased its U.S. market share above 17%, representing the most substantial presence in the U.S. since 2017, while other brands also saw sales rise.

“Automakers are providing healthy incentives to keep sales flowing. Prices are trending higher, but just as we are seeing in the broader retail markets, there’s sufficient demand and generous incentives out there, and that’s driving the market,” said Cox Automotive Executive Analyst Erin Keating earlier this year. 

But that was 2025.

It is a new year, and analysts at Bank of America see a different landscape for automakers in 2026.

Ford said its total sales in the second quarter rose at a rate seven times that of the overall auto industry.

Ford

Bank of America reinstates “buy” ratings on Ford, GM, Tesla

On Wednesday, March 4, Bank of America reinstated its coverage of the North American Automotive sector.

It picked three winners to which it assigned “buy” ratings: Ford, General Motors, and Tesla.

Related: Tesla proves it truly is a tech (not car) company with latest move

“We highlight Ford & General Motors (see reports) as OEM top picks as we see potential for upward estimate revisions given the shift away from EVs and emissions mandates that limited profitability over the past several years,” the firm said in a research report emailed to TheStreet.

BofA sees upside in U.S. sales, as its forecasts for both sales and production are above industry estimates. It says pent-up demand from years of constrained supply will coalesce with “slowly improving” affordability to drive more demand.

Here’s what the firm said about each company in its research report.

Ford gets “buy” rating and $17 price target, a 34% upside from March 4 opening price

  • “We think Ford is positioned well to capitalize on the significant shift in the regulatory backdrop under the current administration that should enable it to shift focus to its most margin accretive trucks/SUVs. We expect near-term benefits as Model E losses abate and the company’s high-margin commercial business stabilizes. We expect Ford to make progress toward its 8% EBIT margin guide (from 4.8% in 2026E), including a large step-up in 2027.”
  • “Ford improved its U.S. market share by 50bps in 2025, and we estimate the company is third in total share (with 13.2% retail share, including medium/heavy-duty trucks). Ford’s strong position is anchored by its #2 rank in pickup trucks (by unit volume), where it holds over 30% share, and by its F-Series, which is the #1 U.S. nameplate. Positively, Ford’s share in pickups is up by more than 300bps over the past two years.”

General Motors gets “buy” rating and $105 price target, a 14% upside from March 4 opening price

  • “We are reinstating coverage of General Motors with a Buy rating and $105 price objective based on an EV of 3.5X our 2027 EBITDA. We believe GM is a key beneficiary of recent regulatory changes, including the removal of CAFE penalties and GHG relief, which are enabling a mix shift toward its most margin-accretive trucks/SUVs and away from unprofitable EVs. The evidence is compelling: we estimate that the variable profit per unit for trucks/SUVs is $17.5K, vs. the corporate average of $10-12K. We also believe GM should benefit in 2026 from lower warranty costs & regulatory credits, lean inventory levels, and low incentives.”
  • “GM is the number 1 automaker by market share in the US (17.1% retail share, including medium/heavy duty trucks), which has improved 110bps over the past three years and should continue given benefits from a more favorable environment for ICE vehicles.”

Tesla gets “buy” rating and $460 price target, a 14% upside from March 4 opening price

  • “We expect TSLA to quickly become a leader in robotaxi services, given its ability to scale more profitably than competitors. We see autonomous vehicles spurring the next era of mobility and as the most significant change agent in the Auto 2.0 landscape, offering consumers the prospect of saving time, safer travel, and more accessible transportation.”
  • “We expect Tesla to quickly scale its Robotaxis, which now operate in San Francisco and Austin, with 7 additional markets expected in 1H26. The standard technology used in the autonomous industry is multi‑sensor fusion (LiDAR/radar/cameras), whereas Tesla’s camera‑only approach is technically more challenging but much cheaper and leverages a consumer‑fleet data engine. Tesla’s strategy should allow it to scale more profitably than Robotaxi competitors, while its driver shortage gives it a cost advantage vs. rideshare players. We estimate Robotaxi accounts for ~52% of TSLA’s valuation.”

Related: $50,000 average new car prices are here to stay

This post was originally published here.  


TheStreet aims to feature only the best products and services. If you buy something via one of our links, we may earn a commission.

Why we love this deal

Whether locking in with classical music during a late-night study session, catching up on an audiobook during your morning commute, or tuning into a podcast while hitting the gym, a premium pair of wireless headphones can elevate your listening experience. High quality often comes with a high price tag, but occasionally you’ll find a budget-friendly audio accessory that’s comparable to more expensive models, like the Beribes Wireless Bluetooth Over-Ear Headphones at Amazon, which has earned 10,000 perfect five-star reviews.

These affordable over-ear headphones normally retail for $29, but right now, a limited-time deal brings the total price down to just $20. This takes 31% off the price of the solid black pair, but the audio accessory also comes in five other colors, including green, orange, purple, pink, and white. These colorful headphone models are also discounted at various price points under $28.

Beribes Wireless Bluetooth Over-Ear Headphones, $20 (was $29) at Amazon

Courtesy of Amazon

Shop at Amazon

Why do shoppers love it?

Shoppers love the bargain price of these wireless headphones. “You honestly cannot beat the quality,” wrote one reviewer. This shopper explained that for the previous two years, they’d been using much more expensive name-brand headphones that cost hundreds of dollars. After trying these out, they wrote, “If you want high-end sound and superior functionality without the luxury price tag, these are the ones to get.”

Constructed for audiophiles, these wireless headphones are equipped with advanced dual 40 millimeter dynamic sound units that deliver a perfectly balanced mix of bass and treble. You can customize the sound to your preferences by switching between six equalizer modes, including sounds optimized for jazz, rock, vocals, and more. One shopper wrote about the sound quality, “The bass is booming, and the mid-range and treble are crisp and clear with no bleeding between the three.”

Related: Walmart’s $1,570 folding treadmill with a Bluetooth speaker and charging port is now just $280

These over-ear headphones were designed for your everyday convenience. Using advanced Bluetooth technology, you can easily and quickly connect to most Android and Apple devices. The audio accessory itself is lightweight, and the soft earcups make it comfortable to wear for prolonged periods. It also comes with a long-lasting battery that can play continuously for up to 65 hours on a single charge, so you’ll never be without your go-to background music. 

Details to know 

  • Weight: 0.38 pounds.
  • Color options: Six colors are available with prices starting at $20.
  • Are they foldable?: Yes, the swivel earcups allow these headphones to fold flat.

The one thing these wireless headphones do not offer is noise cancellation, but this is common for a budget-friendly selection. Another benefit of the over-ear design is that it better insulates your ears from outside noises for passive sound isolation, especially compared to earbuds. If you do want this feature, we’ve found a few deals at Amazon to also consider.

Shop more deals

Don’t miss your chance to score the top-rated Beribes Wireless Bluetooth Over-Ear Headphones for just $20 at Amazon. This limited-time deal won’t last long, so add it to your cart now.

This post was originally published here.  


The U.S.–Israeli war with Iran has officially reached Chevron’s Middle East growth engine. Israel ordered Chevron to shut production at its giant offshore Leviathan gas field after joint U.S.–Israeli strikes on Iran and retaliatory attacks raised security risks to critical energy infrastructure, according to OilPrice and Yahoo Finance.

Leviathan is Israel’s largest gas field and a key supplier to Israel, Egypt, and Jordan. In the first nine months of 2025, the field sold 8.1 billion cubic meters of gas, with Egypt taking more than half, said OilPrice. Chevron followed the shutdown order by declaring force majeure, a formal notice that it cannot meet some contract obligations because of events beyond its control, according to Rigzone and Reuters.

Israel’s energy ministry acted on a “security recommendation” when it told Chevron to suspend Leviathan operations until further notice, NewMed Energy said in a stock filing cited by Rigzone. Chevron told Morningstar that all personnel and facilities at Leviathan remain safe and that the company is complying with the temporary shut‑in directive from Israel’s Ministry of Energy.

When I look at that combination of forced shutdown plus expansion spending, it feels like a textbook example of geopolitical risk finally catching up with a big‑ticket growth narrative.

Chevron feels Iran war heat.

Shutterstock

How the Iran war is hitting Middle East energy flows

Chevron’s Leviathan pause is part of a broader pattern of Middle East energy assets going offline as the Iran war drags on. Israel has ordered shutdowns at multiple offshore gas fields and at its 197,000‑barrel‑a‑day Haifa refinery after U.S.‑Israeli strikes on Iran and retaliatory missile attacks, said Argus Media.

Related: Oil shock threatens Fed rate-cut bets

Energean confirmed that it was told to suspend production at the Karish gas field, trimming Israel’s export capacity further, according to OilPrice. Those moves worsen the region’s gas balance because Leviathan and Karish both supply Israel’s domestic demand and exports to neighbors that rely heavily on imported gas, said Argus

The disruption is not limited to Israel.

Qatar temporarily shut down its liquefied natural gas facilities at Ras Laffan and Mesaieed after drone strikes linked to the conflict, cutting around 20 percent of global LNG export capacity, according to Argus. Saudi Arabia also suspended production at its largest domestic refinery as a precaution after Iranian attacks and debris fell near key Gulf energy sites.

Global shipping is now tangled up in the conflict.

Traffic through the Strait of Hormuz has been closed for days after Iran attacked multiple ships, effectively blocking a route that carries about 20 percent of global oil and gas supply, said Channel NewsAsia. Hundreds of oil and LNG tankers are stranded near hubs such as Fujairah, and shipping rates have jumped to record levels as the war intensifies, the same report said.

More Oil and Gas:

When I connect all of that, Leviathan’s shut‑in looks less like a one‑off and more like one link in a chain of outages stretching from the Eastern Mediterranean to the Gulf.

What this means for prices, inflation, and central banks

A regional supply shock like this rarely stays contained to energy traders’ screens. Global oil and gas prices have climbed more than 15% since the latest round of strikes began, with Brent crude up about 6 percent on one recent trading day to above $82 per barrel, according to Channel NewsAsia.

European gas prices have spiked roughly 40% on top of a previous 40 percent jump as Qatar’s LNG halt and Israeli disruptions tighten supply, Channel NewsAsia said. At the same time, gasoline prices in the United States have moved back above $3 a gallon, reversing some of the relief drivers saw earlier this winter. 

Analysts are already warning that the energy shock could re‑ignite inflation and complicate central bank plans.

The war‑driven rise in oil and gas prices “risks triggering a renewed spike in inflation that could choke off economic recovery in Europe and Asia” if the conflict drags on in a region that delivers about one‑third of global oil and nearly one‑fifth of natural gas, Channel NewsAsia reported.

A Goldman Sachs note said a prolonged disruption could add a double‑digit dollar “risk premium” to crude and significantly raise global gas prices if LNG supply from Qatar and other exporters remains constrained, TheStreet reported.

For consumers, that likely shows up as:

  • Higher gasoline, diesel, and jet fuel prices that filter into commuting and travel costs.
  • Rising utility and heating bills in markets that depend on imported gas.
  • Higher odds that rate cuts are delayed or scaled back if headline inflation gets a second wind.

I see this conflict as an unwelcome reminder that energy security, inflation, and everyday budgets are still tightly linked.

Chevron’s Middle East strategy under new scrutiny

Before this crisis, Chevron was treating Israel as a major growth hub.

The company has been investing to boost Leviathan’s capacity from around the low‑teens in annual billion‑cubic‑meter output to about 21 billion cubic meters as part of a roughly 35 billion dollar export framework with Egypt, according to AzerNews.​

Chevron told investors its onshore operations in the Partitioned Neutral Zone between Kuwait and Saudi Arabia are running normally, which means its broader Middle East production has not been fully dragged into the conflict, Morningstar reported. Still, declaring force majeure at Leviathan signals the company knows contractual volumes and cash flows from that project are now at the mercy of security conditions, Rigzone noted.

Chevron’s stock, meanwhile, has reflected a mix of fear and opportunity.

Chevron shares recently hit record levels as investors flocked to large U.S. oil names on expectations that higher crude prices will boost earnings even as some overseas projects face disruptions, MarketWatch wrote. 

When I look at Chevron through a personal‑finance lens, I see two truths that can coexist:

  • The company’s diversified portfolio means rising global oil prices can offset lost Israeli gas volumes.
  • Its Middle East gas assets are clearly not the low‑volatility, utility‑like earnings stream some investors once imagined.

If you hold CVX, you’re now partly betting that management can keep harvesting higher prices while navigating an increasingly unstable political map.

What I’d do with this as a saver or investor

You can’t pick the next headline from Tehran or Jerusalem, but you can decide how much of your balance sheet is exposed to them.

If I were building or tweaking a portfolio around this:

  • I would size any position in Chevron and other Middle East‑heavy energy stocks so a prolonged Leviathan shutdown or further Gulf export disruption doesn’t threaten my long‑term plan.
  • I’d be careful about overweighting LNG exporters that depend heavily on the Strait of Hormuz or regional pipelines, given the tanker bottlenecks and infrastructure hits that Channel NewsAsia and Argus have detailed.
  • I’d also use this episode as a stress test: imagine oil staying in the 80s, gas prices elevated, and central banks cutting rates more slowly. If that scenario breaks your budget or your portfolio allocation, it’s a signal to reduce risk.

On the household side, I’d build in a bit more room in my 2026 budget for fuel and utility costs and look hard at any variable‑rate debt while central banks weigh how patient they can be. You don’t control the war, but you do control how exposed your finances are when a field like Leviathan suddenly goes dark.

Related: Analyst resets Chevron stock price target as oil strategy shifts

This post was originally published here.  


Snowflake, the cloud-based data platform company that helps companies store, analyze, and share big datasets across public clouds, reported its fourth-quarter and full-year 2026 earnings last week on February 25.

The company, best known for its AI data cloud platform that enables application development, data warehousing, and analytics, topped Wall Street expectations, driven largely by accelerating adoption of artificial intelligence.

The company stock has struggled in recent months, down 27% this past quarter and 23% year to date. But since reporting a strong quarter with future growth possibilities, despite an early setback, the stock is up 2.3% this past month.

Snowflake earnings: revenue and margins beat

In Q4, Snowflake reported $1.23 billion in product revenue, a 30% year-over-year increase, 2% above the Street consensus. With an 11% operating margin that far exceeded the 7% Street estimate, Snowflake also guided to increased product revenue growth in fiscal year 2027.

More Tech Stocks:

Snowflake earnings at a glance:

  • Product revenue $1,227 million, up 30%
  • Total revenue $1,284 million, up 30%
  • Gross profit margin up 72% at $921 million
  • Operating income at $139 million, up 11%
  • EPS $0.32, up 4% year over year

Goldman Sachs bullish but trims target

In a note shared with TheStreet, analysts Gabriella Borges, Maura Hager, and Matthew Martino at Goldman Sachs took a deep dive into Snowflake’s earnings report.

The firm maintains its buy rating after the earnings report, but lowered its price target to $216 from $246.

One highlight that stands out as promising, according to Goldman Sachs, is Snowflake’s new offering, Cortex Code.

This context-aware AI coding assistant is embedded directly into developer workflows, and since its launch in November 2025, has already attracted more than 4,400 users.

Goldman points out that customers found Cortex code efficient, some even suggesting that it compressed “16 workweeks into less than a month.”

The code is a good example of Snowflake’s push into AI automation, positioning the company as a platform that manages workflows across the full data lifecycle.

The firm also noted broader adoption of Snowflake, underscoring the company’s ability to capture greater wallet share.

  • Snowflake introduced 430+ new capabilities in FY26.
  • Signed a $400 million-plus multi-year deal with a financial services customer (client name undisclosed), the largest in company history.
  • Remaining performance obligations of $9.77 billion, up 42% year over year and 24% quarter over quarter.

Given these advancements, Goldman expects to see customer expansion, driven by an increase in higher-spending customers. The firm also noted a pickup in cloud RDBMS migrations catalyzed by AI. 

And driven by product innovation, it expects to see greater adoption of ML/AI workloads, adding to the existing momentum, as 9,100+ Snowflake accounts already use its AI features, representing 70% penetration of its total customer base.

However, analysts are also highlighting certain downsides near term.

  • Iceberg cannibalizing Snowflake’s storage revenue
  • Increased competition from CSPs and Databricks
  • Adverse changes in the IT spending or optimization in cloud spending

Analysts react to Snowflake’s AI momentum

  • Citi analyst Tyler Radke raised the price target to $280 from $270, keeping a buy rating, noting that the Q4 report demonstrated increased AI momentum.
  • Baird lowered its price target from $270 to $210, keeping an outperform rating, but is positive on Snowflake’s growing AI ripples.
  • Truist lowered its target to $240 from $270, keeping a buy rating, saying that while Q4 results topped the consensus, shares traded lower after hours as management had set higher expectations at Q3.
  • Deutsche lowered the target to $230 from $275, keeping a buy rating.
  • DA Davidson analyst Gil Luria raised the price target to $250 from $300, while maintaining a buy rating, commenting on Snowflake’s strong Q4 results, in which the Company beat both top- and bottom-line expectations.

Luria adds that the company remains an AI winner, isolated from “vibe-coding fears,” and that its conversations with the DEN (developer community) continue to reinforce its status as a critical component of the enterprise AI puzzle, according to TheFly.

Related: Bank of America revamps Costco stock price before earnings

This post was originally published here.  


The retail apocalypse continued in 2025, as 8,100 retail stores across all sectors closed for an increase of 12% compared to 2024, according to Coresight Research, as reported by WDEF-TV.

Grocery chains contributed to that apocalypse, as Albertson’s eliminated 380 jobs at its corporate offices in Arizona and California and said it would close 20 stores by the end of 2025.

Kroger followed with the closing of nine fulfillment centers and the elimination of about 1,700 jobs. The company, which operates about 2,700 supermarkets across 35 states and Washington, D.C., also announced in June 2025 that it would close 60 stores over 18 months.

Also, a chain that had been growing, Grocery Outlet, has joined the list of supermarket chains closing dozens of stores.

Kroger eliminates 3 California stores

Kroger followed through with its closure plans, as it filed notices to close three store locations in California in March and lay off 171 workers, according to Worker Adjustment and Retraining Notification notices filed with the California Employment Development Department.

“While the company committed to identifying transfer and reassignment opportunities for impacted associates, some layoffs and terminations may still be required based on operational needs and contractual provisions,” Kaina Pereira, executive director of the California Workforce Development Board, said in a WARN notice, the Sacramento Bee reported. “This closure will be permanent.”

Grocery Outlet closes dozens of stores

And now, discount national supermarket chain Grocery Outlet said it will close 36 stores across the nation after expanding too quickly, the company said during its fourth quarter 2025 earnings call, Investing.com reported.

“Following a rigorous analysis of the fleet, we identified 36 stores in the network that we concluded did not have a viable path to sustained profitability, regardless of the operational support we could provide,” Grocery Outlet Holding Corp. CEO Jason Potter said in the earnings call.

“We’ve made the difficult decision to close 36 locations, 24 of which are located in the East, representing 30% of that region’s fleet,” Potter said. “We are not fully exiting any state, and we believe we have a meaningful opportunity to grow in the East over the long term.”

The company has not released a list of the 36 stores that will close.

Remaining Eastern stores are profitable

Potter said that the Emeryville, Calif.-based chain’s 51 remaining stores in the East are profitable and delivered a 3.3% comp in the fourth quarter.

“It’s clear now that we expanded too quickly, and these closures are a direct correction,” Potter said.

More closings:

The closing of the 36 stores, or about 6% of its locations, is expected to result in an annualized adjusted EBITDA improvement of about $12 million and enable the company to operate profitably in all of its markets, Potter said.

Grocery chain will add 30-33 stores

The 80-year-old company still plans to open 30-33 new stores in 2026 under a more disciplined approach.

For example, when Grocery Outlet opens new stores in Virginia later in 2026, the stores will start as company-run operations, bringing them up to profitability, before transferring them to independent operators.

Grocery Outlet, which was founded in 1946 in San Francisco as a cannery sales business, operates over 560 stores through its network of independent operators in 16 states.

Grocery Outlet’s territory:

  • Alabama
  • California
  • Delaware
  • Georgia
  • Idaho
  • Kentucky
  • Maryland
  • Nevada
  • New Jersey
  • North Carolina
  • Ohio
  • Oregon
  • Pennsylvania
  • Tennessee
  • Virginia
  • Washington
  • Source: Grocery Outlet

Related: 143-year-old grocery chain closes more locations, lays off dozens

This post was originally published here.  


Palantir (PLTR) stock just got a major nod of approval from Wall Street.

Veteran Rosenblatt Securities analyst John McPeake just raised his price target on the defense AI giant’s stock to $200 from $150, while reiterating a Buy rating in a recent note. 

For perspective, Rosenblatt’s new $200 price target sits in the middle of the more lofty recent Wall Street calls on Palantir stock.

It’s below Citi’s $235, above UBS’s $180, and mostly in line with Deutsche Bank’s $200, while Mizuho stands lower at $195.

As of March 4, 2026 (at the time of writing), Palantir stock is trading at $147.22 as per Yahoo Finance

When I last covered Palantir stock, it was trading at about $139.54 that day (Feb. 4 close).

In that I covered CEO Alex Karp’s blunt eight-word message to investors: “We are an N-for-1 category of our own.”

Its comments came after Palantir released another earnings smasher, posting 70% Q4 revenue growth, spearheaded by a massive 93% jump in U.S. sales, along with a standout Rule of 127 score (growth plus operating margin). 

That said, McPeake’s bullish thesis on the stock hinges on a major macro shift underway.

According to him, the growing geopolitical tensions and the urgency of defense spending will likely transform Palantir into a mission-critical operating system that’s tailor-made for modern warfare and intelligence.

The recent U.S.–Iran conflict underscores Palantir’s unmatched value proposition as militaries increasingly rely on AI-powered decision tools.

Perhaps the biggest flashpoint in tech of late has been Anthropic’s pushback on AI warfare, sparking tensions with the U.S. government. 

The Guardian reports that Anthropic’s popular Claude model was used by the U.S. military in its strike operations, which helped effectively shorten the “kill chain”. Moreover, the AI model was integrated into the platform co-developed by Palantir and the Pentagon to improve decision-making and analysis.

However, according to MarketWatch, Claude is being phased out over the next six months. The model may go, but Palantir remains the stable platform powering the operational layer.

As controversial as that may sound and is, that’s exactly why McPeake believes Palantir’s long-term demand profile will continue to improve over time in the military AI realm.

Wall Street price targets for Palantir stock

  • Citi boosted its target to $235.
  • Mizuho moved to Outperform with a $195 target.
  • UBS bumped its target to $180.
  • Deutsche Bank raised its target to $200.
  • Goldman Sachs trimmed its target to $182.
    Source: Yahoo Finance, MarketBeat, Investing.

Rosenblatt’s John McPeake is a veteran Wall Street voice

Rosenblatt analyst John McPeake brings a remarkable 27 years of stock market experience to the table, with 18 years on the buy side and nine years on the sell side.

More Wall Street

His biggest stops over his illustrious career include Prudential Securities (where he was ranked by Institutional Investor) and Aquila Funds, where he was a portfolio manager.

On top of that, he spent a ton of time in hedge funds like Seminole Capital and P.A.W. Capital, and even ran his private TMT-focused hedge fund, which is why his notes strike a chord with traders and long-term investors alike.

According to Tipranks, 13 of the last 22 ratings have made a profit, for a nearly 60% success rate.

McPeake’s coverage includes the biggest names in software, infrastructure, AI, and quantum computing, putting him at the forefront of many emerging tech narratives.

Related: Morgan Stanley delivers curt 2-word verdict on S&P 500

Palantir stock returns vs the S&P 500

  • 1W: Palantir stock 14.27% vs. the S&P 500-1.07%.
  • 1M: Palantir stock -6.75% vs. the S&P 500 -1.46%.
  • 6M: Palantir stock -4.96% vs. the S&P 500 5.71%.
  • YTD: Palantir stock -17.18% vs. the S&P 500 -0.42%.
  • 1Y: Palantir stock 76.48% vs. the S&P 500 16.53%.
  • 3Y: Palantir stock 1,667.35% vs. the S&P 500 68.49%.
    Source: Seeking Alpha.

Rosenblatt says geopolitics is reshaping Palantir’s growth story

Rosenblatt’s McPeake believes that Palantir’s role in the broader AI ecosystem is evolving quickly than the market appreciates. 

At the heart of it, as mentioned earlier, are rising global tensions that continue to drive demand for powerful battlefield software platforms.

In fact, according to Grand View Research, the global AI in military market is expected to skyrocket from $9.31 billion (2024) to $19.29 billion by 2030 (about 13% CAGR). 

Consequently, Rosenblatt believes the pertinent shift could make Palantir a mission-critical player in the military AI space. 

Additionally, Rosenblatt pushed back on the idea that the platform is just  “wrapping” third-party AI models. 

To better understand Palantir, think of it as a “data refinery.”

A typical oil refinery takes messy crude oil and turns it into usable fuels. Similarly, Palantir’s powerful software platform takes colossal amounts of raw, unstructured defense data (from satellites, sensors, databases, and reports), and cleans, corrects, and organizes it into something that’s useful for decision-makers

Related: Bank of America drops blunt message on the economy

It layers data from a wide variety of sources, applying data analytics and AI models to deliver powerful operational insights. 

This is exactly where Palantir’s positioning matters. 

As we’re seeing with the Anthropic saga, agencies can switch or combine different AI models on Palantir’s platform without rebuilding systems from the ground up. 

So clearly, Palantir’s true value isn’t in the model itself, but the infrastructure that deploys it, oversees it, and utilizes it to make real-world decisions.

That’s exactly why, in mid-last year, Reuters reported that the U.S. Army consolidated more than 75 software agreements into a mega enterprise deal (up $10 billion) with Palantir for over 10 years.

It’s important to note that, from a valuation standpoint, Rosenblatt framed its new price target on Palantir stock using nearly 88-times projected 2027 earnings, which implies a price-earnings growth ratio near 1.2 times, up from about 0.9 times previously. 

So clearly, investors will need to pay a significantly higher growth-adjusted multiple as Palantir’s long-term demand outlook improves.

At the same time, its rich stock valuation leaves virtually little to no room for missteps.

Related: 5-star analyst resets Broadcom price target before earnings

This post was originally published here.  


Berkshire Hathaway is in a rare position. Although it is typically regarded as one of the most stable stocks, given the current market conditions, no stock is infallible.

The company failed to wow investors with its most recent set of earnings, falling short of expectations. And the latest stockholder letter didn’t help.

New CEO Greg Abel, penning his first shareholder letter, struck a very cautious tone but made one thing crystal clear. Berkshire isn’t in any mood to waste money. The investment company is sitting on a huge cash pile, but that is not something up for grabs.

“While some of this capital is required to support our insurance operations and protect Berkshire against extreme scenarios, it also constitutes our dry powder,” Abel wrote.

At the same time, Abel saw the need for a conciliatory tone. He said the company is not shying away from deal-making.

“Many times in Berkshire’s history, some observers have suggested that our substantial cash position signals a retreat from investing. It does not.”

However, investors continue to ask the same questions they have had for years. When does that “dry powder” actually get deployed? More importantly, what happens if it doesn’t?

The market’s initial reaction was blunt. Berkshire’s Class A shares fell by as much as 5.3%, and Class B shares fell by about the same amount. This was the biggest drop since Warren Buffett said in May 2025 that Abel would become CEO in 2026.

Operating profit, BRK drop as insurance and key businesses show pressure

Berkshire’s operating profit for the fourth quarter fell 30% to $10.2 billion. (Operating profit excludes gains and losses from Berkshire’s stock holdings, including Apple, and is often the cleanest snapshot of how the underlying businesses performed.)

Insurance, unfortunately, is the main pressure point.

Related: Samsung shocks Apple in smartphone war

Berkshire said Geico, alongside other insurance companies, posted a 38% overall decline.

The worst part is that Abel believes the pattern is not going to break. Instead, the insurance companies will repeatedly come under pressure to retain customers as competitors cut rates.

“GEICO’s broad rate increases… have restored margins but come at the cost of lower retention,” Abel wrote. “Competitors’ rate reductions may extend that pressure into 2026.”

Analyst Meyer Shields of Keefe, Bruyette & Woods said the results “broadly” missed expectations, thanks to weakness at BNSF and in the energy, manufacturing, and retail sectors.

Shields cut his earnings forecast for 2026 by 5% and rates Berkshire as underperforming.

Berkshire Hathaway’s cash question gets louder as buybacks stay quiet

For long-term Berkshire holders, volatility in quarterly results isn’t usually something they are looking out for. Instead, the bigger narrative is capital allocation.

At the moment, it seems the iconic asset manager is in a visibly conservative posture.

  • Roughly $370 billion-plus in cash and U.S. Treasuries (Abel pegged it as “dry powder”)
  • No stock buybacks for about 18 months, with no clear signal on resuming
  • No dividend, and no hint of a policy change

Abel gave, yet again, the same logic for not paying dividends. The company won’t pay one until each dollar of retained earnings is “reasonably likely” to create more than one dollar of market value for shareholders.

He also said there will likely be more of a focus on buybacks only when Berkshire shares trade below a conservatively determined estimate of intrinsic value.

That discipline is core to the Berkshire brand. However, after the earnings report dropped, investors suddenly wanted more.

The Abel transition is here, and tone matters more than ever

For me, Berkshire hathaway’s dip isn’t an “earnings miss” story. Instead, it’s a succession story.

Buffett had led Berkshire since 1965. He is as iconic as it gets from a CEO perspective. Consider the close relationship between Apple and Steve Jobs or the influence of Elon Musk on Tesla. The moment you hear these names, you think back to their CEOs.

The same is the case with Buffett, and he happens to still be the chairman of the company. His succession is therefore causing some headaches.

Related: Galaxy S26 brings ‘agentic AI’ to phones, and it’s bigger than Samsung

Abel took over as CEO on Jan. 1, 2026, and his letter leaned heavily into continuity, culture, and long-term thinking.

“Our role is stewardship,” Abel wrote. “Your capital is commingled with ours, but it does not belong to us.”

In his letter, Abel was thoughtful regarding what the future holds for the company. He was explicit in saying that Berkshire holds a competitive advantage due to its culture. Abel also reiterated the late Vice Chairman Charlie Munger’s reassurance from May 1, 2021.

Abel’s framing is simple, straightforward, and razor-sharp. Berkshire is not driven by personality. Instead, it’s foremost a system.

On the other hand, the market is throwing up a straightforward challenge: prove the system works without Buffett making the final call.

Berkshire by the numbers: what Abel highlighted from 2025

Abel’s letter gives a more in-depth look at how things are going, helping explain why Berkshire is both confident and cautious.

Key 2025 financial snapshots

  • Operating earnings: $44.5 billion in 2025, down from $47.4 billion in 2024
  • Cash flow from operating activities: $46 billion in 2025, compared with a five-year average of more than $40 billion
  • Cash and U.S. Treasury holdings: Now exceeding $370 billion
  • Insurance float: $176 billion at year-end 2025, up from $171 billion at the end of 2024 (and up from $88 billion at the end of 2015)

Insurance cycle signals (and why investors care)

Abel said that in the second half of 2025, the insurance industry saw “a deceleration or reversal” in pricing and policy-term trends.

He thinks this could mean that Berkshire writes less property and casualty business for a period of time.

More Warren Buffett:

He also disclosed an underwriting milestone.

Combined ratio (property and casualty): 87.1% in 2025, better than Berkshire’s five-year average of 90.7%, 10-year average of 93.0%, and 20-year average of 92.2%.

That’s a strong underwriting result.

However, Abel’s warning is more speculation about the road ahead. More money is going into primary insurance and reinsurance, which can lower prices and lower returns.

Non-insurance businesses: BNSF, energy, manufacturing and retail in focus

Abel took the opportunity to set expectations for several operating segments. These include BNSF and Berkshire Hathaway Energy.

BNSF: operational improvements, but not enough (yet)

BNSF produced $8.1 billion in net operating cash flows in 2025 and disbursed $4.4 billion to Berkshire in the form of dividends.

Abel said the company improved its operating margin to 34.5% from 32.0% in 2024. However, he stressed that closing the gap to the industry’s best remains a priority.

Interestingly, he expressed this improvement in monetary terms. Each one-percentage-point improvement in operating margin generates approximately $230 million of incremental operating cash flow.

Berkshire Hathaway Energy: AI demand meets wildfire risk

Abel, in the letter, also interestingly touched upon an industry investment cycle that is fueled by rising electricity demand from artificial intelligence computing. In addition, wildfire risk is growing, especially in the Western U.S.

He said the firm will pursue hyperscaler and data-center growth. But it is crucial to strike an appropriate balance between the risks and rewards. Abel has also talked about the importance of the “regulatory compact,” which lets utilities make a fair profit on the money they invest.

The equity portfolio: Berkshire’s core holdings (and what they pay)

Berkshire’s equity portfolio continues to grow, but it’s still concentrated on a handful of long-term positions.

Abel frames the concentration as intentional.

Here are Berkshire’s biggest U.S. equity holdings by market value at Dec. 31, 2025, as listed in the letter.

  • Apple (AAPL): $61.962 billion market value; $280 million in 2025 dividends
  • American Express (AXP): $56.088 billion; $479 million in 2025 dividends
  • Coca-Cola (KO): $27.964 billion; $816 million in 2025 dividends
  • Moody’s (MCO): $12.603 billion; $93 million in 2025 dividends

Abel also talked about Berkshire’s major investments in Japan, such as Mitsubishi, Itochu, Mitsui, Marubeni, and Sumitomo.

Added to the U.S. core holdings, the positions were worth $194 billion in market value, which is almost two-thirds of Berkshire’s equity securities portfolio. These assets produced $2.5 billion in combined dividends, yielding roughly 10% on their original cost basis.

What Berkshire did buy: 2 acquisitions Abel called out

Investors looking for action did end up with one piece of very valuable information. Berkshire announced acquisitions of OxyChem and Bell Laboratories in 2025, a clear sign that there is still significant action to be seen when it comes to Berkshire.

Abel framed both as classic Berkshire: businesses that are easy to understand, have steady demand, and good managers. He also said something very Berkshire-like about Bell Laboratories (which controls rodents).

That subtle sentence encapsulates the essence of Berkshire. The company is so big now that even “good” deals can seem like they don’t matter. This is one reason the cash pile keeps growing.

Why this matters for Berkshire shareholders now

The immediate story is that Berkshire shareholders are feeling the heat. After a rare misstep in earnings season, the firm is entering a new phase where:

  • The insurance market may be less forgiving (especially at Geico).
  • Some operating units have shown uneven performance.
  • Berkshire is sitting on an enormous cash hoard.
  • Buybacks remain paused.
  • Investors are watching Abel’s every move.

Abel’s message during this time is unmistakable. He says Berkshire’s “fortress-like balance sheet” is strategic. It’s not accidental that it has a cash stockpile that size. 

The market’s message back, at least for now, is simple: We are willing to show patience, but you need to prove why we should. 

Related: Altman draws 3 red lines for Pentagon AI work and dares critics to ‘visit me in jail’

This post was originally published here.  


The streaming market is changing quickly. In 2026, while giants like Netflix and Amazon Prime still hold the largest subscriber bases, free ad-supported streaming TV (FAST) is growing at an impressive rate. 

This shift in streaming preferences is related to the economy, which is making consumers more cautious about each spending, carefully choosing value. With the tightening of our budgets, ads don’t seem so annoying anymore. After all, entertainment is not an essential expense. 

Key industry metrics: 

  • Growth rate: The FAST revenue model is recording a 14.7% compound annual growth rate (CAGR), outpacing the growth of traditional subscription services. 
  • Revenue projections: Global FAST revenue is set to hit $12 billion by 2027. 
  • Time: 72.4% of the time U.S. viewers spend with television is ad-supported, and streaming represents 42.4% of that viewing. 
  • Content freshness:  Nearly 50% of FAST programming was produced in the last five years, compared to only about 33% on premium subscription video on demand (SVOD) platforms.
    Sources: Mordor Intelligence 2026, WiFi Talents, Nielsen 2025, Nielsen/Gracenote 2025/2026

I previously reported that the majority of streaming giants hiked prices in 2025, giving consumers another reason to switch to cheaper or free alternatives. 

Industry data show that in the later half of 2025, the dominant powers in the FAST sector were Roku, Tubi, Pluto, and Prime Video.

A standout moment occurred in December 2025, when The Roku Channel captured a record-breaking 3% share of total U.S. television viewership. This is more than Paramount+ and close to Amazon Prime Video, according to Nielsen

Roku adds 17 new channels 

To retain and attract subscribers, streaming giants need to frequently update their content offerings and introduce new or improve current features. Earlier in February, Roku expanded its free streaming library with 17 new live channels.

The extended library includes CNN Xpress with continuous news coverage, in addition to regional programs such as Canada TV. The expansion also added niche channels focused on wellness, Spanish-language comedy, and action films.

The total of 17 new live channels on Roku includes: 

  • CTV News
  • Filmed Comedia
  • SobreVivi
  • Filmex Accion
  • CNN Xpress
  • “The Bernie Mac Show”
  • “Felicity”
  • “America’s Funniest Home Videos”
  • “Pokemon”
  • “Blossom”
  • “Cougar Town”
  • MeatEaters
  • FuelTV
  • Telemundo Puerto Rico
  • Vas No Vas USA
  • Willow Sports
  • Multi Camaras
    Source: Cord Cutters News 

These offerings, located within the “Live TV” zone of the Roku interface, are accessible to any user with a Roku device, with no monthly subscription or cable provider authentication required. 

Related: YouTube TV drops 12 new offers to retain subscribers

“This addition enhances the platform’s already extensive library of free content, providing viewers with diverse programming options across genres such as classic sitcoms, animated series, sports, action films, comedy, news, and lifestyle content without requiring any subscription fees,” wrote industry expert Luke Bouma for Cord Cutters News.  

More recently, Roku made another important move that surprised users. 

Roku launches a dedicated Search tool within the Live TV Guide 

Roku has finally rolled out a dedicated Search tool within the Live TV Guide, something users have been requesting, Cord Cutters News reported. 

Previously, navigating Roku’s hundreds of free, ad-supported channels was more complicated. Even when users knew what channel or program they wanted to watch, they often had to manually scroll through a long list or use category filters. 

“This update makes it easier to use Roku’s extensive collection of hundreds of free, ad-supported live channels available through the Roku Live Guide making navigation more intuitive for users on Roku TVs and Roku players,” points out Bouma. 

How to use Roku’s new Search option 

The new Search option appears on the left-hand side of the interface, next to existing categories like sports and news. And it solves a key problem: scrolling fatigue. 

By selecting Search, users can enter the name of a favorite channel, genre, or related word using the on-screen keyboard or, where supported, voice commands. 

Results should appear quickly, guiding users to the preferred content without the need for long scrolling. 

The search simplifies access to desired content, especially now, as Roku’s free, live channels have surpassed 500.  

Roku’s recent improvements and milestones 

Following the addition of 11 new channels in late 2025 — ranging from BBC News and “Home Improvement” to “Who Wants to Be a Millionaire?” — the company recently unveiled exclusive bundles. 

“The company is rolling out new streaming bundles, expanding its $3 subscription service, Howdy, to more platforms, and partnering with more premium streaming services following the successful addition of HBO Max,” according to Tech Crunch

Financially, Roku had a strong 2025. The company reported $4.74 billion in total revenue, which is a 15% increase from the previous year. Their platform revenue alone hit $4.15 billion (up 18% year over year), while users streamed a record 145.6 billion hours of content.

Looking ahead to 2026, CEO Anthony Wood noted during the earnings call that Roku is “on track to surpass 100 million streaming households this year.” He pointed out that Roku now powers nearly half of all U.S. TV streaming, reported Market Beat

As competition among both traditional streaming providers and FAST services heats up, new tools like Search and constant content upgrades help Roku maintain its competitive edge. 

Related: Major movie theater chain closes locations, offers refunds

This post was originally published here.  


Jamie Dimon is not worried about AI destroying humanity. He is focused on something more immediate: making sure companies and governments are ready for what is coming before it arrives.

Speaking on Bloomberg Television this week, the JPMorgan Chase (JPM) CEO laid out a sweeping vision of how artificial intelligence will reshape the economy over the next few decades. His headline prediction: future generations will likely work three and a half days a week and live to 100, thanks to what AI makes possible in medicine, productivity, and human output.

“Your children are going to live to 100 and not have cancer because of technology,” Dimon said, “and literally they’ll probably be working three and a half days a week.” He called it “a wonderful thing,” but he was equally direct about what comes before that future arrives.

The displacement problem Dimon is not sugarcoating

Dimon acknowledged plainly that AI is already eliminating jobs at JPMorgan and that the disruption will spread well beyond banking. He said the bank has already displaced workers through AI and has built what he called “huge redeployment plans” to move affected employees into new roles.

“We have displaced people from AI, and we offer them other jobs,” he said at a separate investor meeting last week. “It will eliminate jobs. People should stop sticking their heads in the sand.”

More Employment:

His concern is not just about individual companies managing the shift. He wants governments to act now, not after the disruption has already hit. That means retraining programs, income support for displaced workers, and education reform built for an AI economy, not the one from 20 years ago.

What JPMorgan is doing internally

JPMorgan is not waiting on the sidelines. The bank has the largest annual technology budget in the financial industry at nearly $20 billion, and AI is now embedded across its operations. Over 200,000 employees use the bank’s proprietary LLM Suite, the firm’s internal generative AI platform, with more than half using it multiple times a day.

JPMorgan has doubled its generative AI use cases over the past year, targeting more than 1,000 by the end of 2026. The results are already showing up in the numbers. Software engineers are 10% more efficient. Operations staff are handling 6% more accounts per person. Fraud-related costs are down 11% per unit.

Where JPMorgan is already using AI today

  • Fraud detection and real-time pattern recognition across millions of daily transactions
  • Risk modeling and trading desk signal generation
  • Customer service automation resolving routine queries
  • Document review and compliance scanning at scale
  • Wealth management advisory tools helping advisers respond to clients up to 95% faster during market volatility

The bigger picture Dimon is painting

Dimon’s optimism about AI’s long-term potential is not new. He has previously compared AI to electricity and the printing press in terms of its transformative power. But what stood out Monday was the specificity of his timeline and his insistence that the benefits are real, not theoretical.

He pointed to potential breakthroughs in cancer treatment, food safety, and transportation as areas where AI could compound gains across industries, not just in finance. The shorter workweek, in his framing, is not just about doing less. It is about what happens when human productivity reaches a level where five days of output becomes achievable in three and a half.

Dimon has long been a fierce advocate for in-office work and hard-nosed career discipline. That makes his three-and-a-half-day workweek prediction all the more striking. It is not coming from someone who romanticizes flexibility. It is coming from someone who has spent decades pushing people to work harder, and who now believes technology will make that calculus obsolete.

What workers and investors should take from this

The message for workers is clear: the transition is already underway, and the companies best positioned to absorb it are the ones actively retraining their people now rather than waiting for the disruption to force their hand. JPMorgan’s own workforce offers a live case study. Its overall headcount has stayed roughly flat at 318,512, but the composition has shifted significantly underneath that headline number, with operations and support roles declining as revenue-generating and client-facing roles grow.

For investors, Dimon’s framing suggests AI productivity gains are still in early innings, and the companies that have invested heavily in infrastructure and workforce integration will pull further ahead. JPMorgan, by its CEO’s own account, intends to be one of them.

Related: Jamie Dimon drops surprising take on AI stocks

This post was originally published here.  


There’s a disconnect between valuations and sentiment in the equity markets right now, and it’s costing Intuit investors real money.

JPMorgan cut its price target on the TurboTax and QuickBooks parent to $605 from $750 last week, according to MarketBeat

The bank kept its “overweight” rating intact, suggesting the investment firm remains bullish on the dividend stock.

But the lower target reflects a market gripped by fear that artificial intelligence will upend traditional software businesses.

For Intuit (INTU) shareholders, it stings. The stock has fallen more than 35% year to date and is down almost 50% from all-time highs.

That’s a steep drop for a company that just reported 17% revenue growth and raised its quarterly dividend by 15%.

So what’s actually going on here?

Is Intuit a top dividend stock to own right now?

Intuit has raised its annual dividend from $1.20 per share to $4.80 per share over the past decade, per data from Fiscal.ai

Its annual dividend expense is forecast at $1.3 billion, while analysts estimate free cash flow at $7.37 billion in fiscal 2026 (ending in July). With a payout ratio below 20%, Intuit’s dividend is well-covered. 

Analysts forecast the annual dividend to increase to $6.4 per share in fiscal 2029, significantly enhancing the yield-at-cost. 

Key INTU stock dividend metrics

  • Quarterly dividend: $1.20 per share
  • Annual dividend: $4.80 per share
  • Dividend increase: 15% year-over-year
  • Dividend yield: Approximately 1.2%, based on recent share price levels
  • Payout ratio: Roughly 18% on a FCF basis
  • Dividend growth streak: Consistent for more than a decade

The low payout ratio is worth noting. It means Intuit is paying out a small fraction of cash flow as a dividend, giving it flexibility to keep raising payments, even if earnings growth slows.

Intuit just posted a strong quarter 

Software companies have long been valued for sticky subscriptions and reliable renewals. Now, AI threatens to automate workflows, squeeze pricing, and lower the barrier to entry for new competitors.

Despite the stock’s brutal slide, Intuit’s business results tell a different story. In the second quarter of fiscal 2026, the company posted$4.7 billion in revenue, up 17% year over year.

More Dividend Stocks:

Non-GAAP diluted earnings per share came in at $4.15, up from $3.32 a year ago.

The company’s mid-market platform is gaining real traction. 

  • Online Ecosystem revenue for QuickBooks Online Advanced and Intuit Enterprise Suite grew approximately 40% in the quarter
  • New contracts for Intuit Enterprise Suite grew nearly 50% quarter over quarter.
  • On the consumer side, TurboTax revenue grew 12%, even as total IRS returns were down more than five points through Feb. 6. 

CEO Sasan Goodarzi pushed back hard on the AI disruption narrative during the company’s earnings call.

His argument: Intuit operates in a regulated, high-stakes financial environment where accuracy, compliance, and human expertise aren’t optional.

Intuit also announced a new multiyear partnership with Anthropic, the very company whose new tools rattled markets, to power personalized financial experiences.

The company said its proprietary customer data remains within its own systems.

What is next for INTU stock price?

JPMorgan’s move to $605 reflects the macro pressure on software valuations more than any fundamental problem inside Intuit’s business.

The “overweight” rating remains. The implied upside from current prices remains significant, at more than 55%.

Wall Street forecastsadjusted earnings per share to expand from $20.15 per share in fiscal 2025 to $33.21 per share in 2029

If INTU stock is priced at 20x forward earnings, which is below its 10-year average of 33.5x, it could rise by 60% over the next 30 months

Out of the 20 analysts covering INTU stock, 17 recommend “buy,” and three recommend “hold.” The average Intuit stock price target is $606, indicating an upside potential of 48% from current levels

Still, the AI disruption debate isn’t going away anytime soon. Until investors get more clarity on whether tools like Anthropic’s Cowork genuinely threaten software incumbents or simply complement them, stocks such as Intuit may continue to face pressure regardless of what the earnings reports show.

The numbers say one thing, but the market is saying something else right now.

Related: JPMorgan drops blunt take on software stocks AI threat

This post was originally published here.  

Apple is expanding its product lineup with a lower-priced iPhone.

The California-based tech giant on Monday introduced the iPhone 17e, a more affordable addition to its iPhone 17 family, starting at $599. The device is available in black, white and soft pink.

The iPhone 17e starts with 256GB of storage, doubling the base capacity of the previous generation at the same starting price.

APPLE IMPLEMENTING AGE VERIFICATION TOOL TO ENSURE USERS ARE 18 AND UP FOR SOME APPS

The device runs on Apple’s newest A19 chip and features the company’s new C1X modem, which Apple says improves battery life. Apple says the new 48MP Fusion camera also “has the capabilities of two advanced cameras in one.”

The announcement comes as the iPhone 17 performed strongly in the fiscal first quarter of 2026, with sales jumping nearly 25%. CEO Tim Cook described the results as “staggering” in an interview with FOX Business.

Apple pulled in $143.8 billion in revenue in its fiscal first quarter, up 16% from the prior year. Cook said it was a record sales quarter for North America and in China, where it has lost market share to local competitors in recent years.

At the same time, Apple is raising prices on several MacBook Air and MacBook Pro models unveiled Tuesday featuring the company’s latest M5 chips. The price hikes come amid a global memory chip shortage dubbed “RAMageddon,” led by the rise in demand for artificial intelligence.

APPLE EXPANDS US MANUFACTURING WITH TEXAS PUSH

The 13-inch MacBook Air now starts at $1,099, up from $999, while the 15-inch version begins at $1,299, up from $1,199. Apple is doubling base storage to 512GB on both models, according to Bloomberg.

Prices are also increasing across the MacBook Pro lineup. The 14-inch model with the M5 Pro chip now costs $2,199, up from $1,999, and the 16-inch version is rising to $2,699, up from $2,499.

The 14-inch MacBook Pro with the M5 Max chip starts at $3,599 while the 16-inch version begins at $3,899 – both up $400. The standard M5 MacBook Pro also saw a price hike, rising to $1,699, Bloomberg reported.

Apple also unveiled the MacBook Neo on Wednesday, calling it its most affordable laptop ever. The 13-inch device starts at $599 – or $499 for education customers.

APPLE SEES BIGGEST SALES JUMP IN 4 YEARS, POWERED BY ‘STAGGERING’ IPHONE DEMAND

Apple’s Mac division recorded revenue of $8.39 billion in sales during the first fiscal quarter, down nearly 7% from the same period a year earlier, and missing analysts’ estimate of $9 billion.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

FOX Business’ Susan Li contributed to this report.

This post was originally published here


At its best, technology should make shopping in a store easier while freeing up human workers for customer service and other tasks that people do better than automation or artificial intelligence (AI).

Walmart has been pretty insistent that its use of AI will be a benefit for customers and employees.

“Being people-led and tech-powered helps our associates to find better ways to serve customers and members with our growing assortment, faster delivery speeds, and experiences they love. […]AI is helping us create great customer solutions, reduce friction, simplify decision-making, and [manage] inventory,” Walmart CEO John Furner shared during the chain’s fourth-quarter earnings call.

Aside from helping customers, technology can also be used in ways that primarily benefit the company. Uber’s surge pricing, for example, where rides cost more during peak hours, may be good for the ride-sharing service, and perhaps its drivers, but customers lose out.

When Wendy’s hinted at potentially using dynamic or surge pricing, the backlash was severe, and the company quickly abandoned the plan. Now, Walmart is implementing technology in all its stores that would make using a dynamic pricing model — where the price of items changes quickly based on demand — much easier.

Walmart rolls out digital pricing

Digital shelf labels, or DSLs, allow Walmart to change or set prices on items without a worker physically having to change the price tag. That’s a huge saving on labor hours, according to the retailer.

Walmart has been aggressive in pointing out the positives of this technology and its impact on the company’s employees.

“Today, roughly 2,300 Walmart U.S. locations are already using digital shelf labels, and we expect this technology to be chain-wide within the next year. For our associates, that expansion can’t come soon enough,” Walmart shared in a press release.

More Retail:

The chain laid out the labor argument.

“Walmart stores carry tens of thousands of items, and every single one needs to have a clear, accurate shelf price. Between new inventory, Rollbacks and markdowns, pricing updates stack up fast and can take hours, if not days, to complete,” it shared.

What the chain does not mention in its press release is that DSLs would also make it much easier for the chain to implement dynamic pricing.

Walmart says it won’t use dynamic pricing

Walmart has made it clear that the change to DSLs does not mean the beginning of the implementation of dynamic pricing.

“It is absolutely not going to be ‘one hour it is this price, and the next hour it is not,'” Greg Cathey, senior vice president of transformation and innovation at Walmart, said in a statement to CBS News

But there’s nothing stopping the chain from speeding up how it adjusts prices, which could mean raising or lowering prices faster than it previously did.

“I do not think we will see Walmart introduce dynamic pricing anytime soon,” Neil Saunders, managing director of GlobalData’s retail division, told CBS. “A lot of shoppers use Walmart because it has low prices, and Walmart has worked very hard to establish trust with the customer.”

Walmart stands by its low prices

“The DSL program is not designed for dynamic pricing,” Walmart spokesperson Cristina Rodrigues told Retail Brew in a statement. “Walmart adheres to Everyday Low Price. The DSLs make it easier for associates to add pricing on shelves for new products, and update pricing related to planned Rollback and Final Clearance products.”

Many states have laws that prevent chains from “price gouging” during a storm, a product shortage, or another emergency.

“Price gouging refers to when retailers and others take advantage of spikes in demand by charging exorbitant prices for necessities, often after a natural disaster or other state of emergency,” the National Conference of State Legislatures shared on its website

Early data show that consumers have actually benefited from the technology.

“ESLs eliminate manual price changes, reduce operational costs by up to 30%, and enable dynamic pricing strategies that respond to demand fluctuations, competitor actions, and inventory levels. A 2024 study found that adoption led to a 15% increase in discount frequency without significant price surges, suggesting that retailers are using the technology to enhance value for consumers,” AInvest reported.

Consumers are worried about automated pricing

In a Gartner Consumer Community survey of U.S. consumers conducted in October 2024, 80% agreed that brands with consistent pricing are more trustworthy, and 42% would be willing to spend more on a product if consistent pricing were guaranteed.

“Seventy-nine percent of 1,532 respondents to Gartner’s 2024 Cultural Attitudes and Behavior Survey conducted in September and October 2024 reported experiencing an unexpected price scenario in the last year, ranging from surge pricing to hidden fees to unforeseen rate hikes,” Gartner shared.

Consumers remain wary of retailers.

“While inflation may have eased, suspicion and frustration have not — and these negative sentiments are fueling distrust and price paranoia,” said Kate Muhl, VP analyst in the Gartner Marketing practice. “As a result, consumer loyalty is diminished, and the brand relationship hardens into something more adversarial.”

Consumers, it should be noted, broadly oppose the use of dynamic pricing.

“Over two-thirds (68%) of U.S. adults somewhat or strongly agree that dynamic pricing (the practice of raising prices when demand is high and dropping them when demand is low) is price gouging,” according to a March 2024 CivicScience survey.

Related: White Claw hard seltzer rival files Chapter 7 bankruptcy

This post was originally published here.  

The U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA) recently released a trade forecast showing the farm trade gap narrowing significantly during fiscal year (FY) 2026. The forecast shows the agricultural trade deficit falling from $43.7 billion in FY2025 to a projected $29 billion in FY2026, an improvement from last year’s level and the $37 billion that was projected in December 2025.

Under Secretary of Agriculture for Trade and Foreign Agricultural Affairs Luke Lindberg told Fox News Digital that while the gap tightening was a step in the right direction, the USDA is still working to get back to a surplus.

“American farmers and ranchers have historically exported vastly more than we’ve imported, including in President Trump’s first term, and we had an agricultural trade surplus,” Lindberg said.

“Unfortunately, in the four years under President Biden, we ended up with a $50 billion agricultural trade deficit forecast that his team forecasted right before he left office just about a year ago. Now today, we’re excited to be announcing that we’ve reduced that deficit to $29 billion. Now, we’re still on course, and we need to get back to a surplus, that’s the goal, but a 43% reduction in one year, it’s a great start,” he added.

BEEF PRICES IN FOCUS AS TRUMP SIGNS ORDER AIMED AT CONSUMER RELIEF

In order to return the U.S. to that surplus, the USDA is taking action, which Lindberg outlined as a three-step process: securing strong trade agreements that open markets for American farmers and ranchers, building buyer-seller relationships in those markets and holding trading partners accountable to the commitments they make.

The under secretary said that he is more optimistic than what the forecast articulates because of the “historic” trade deals that President Donald Trump has been able to secure. Lindberg said he believes the agreements have allowed U.S. farmers and ranchers to compete on a leveled playing field.

“I think the more that we can take advantage of the agreements the president has signed, the more we are going to see this number get even better from a trade deficit perspective,” Lindberg told Fox News Digital. “I’m excited to see how our producers take advantage of that access and significantly increased opportunities.”

Lindberg spoke about the opening of Malaysia’s market as an example of a market that was recently opened to U.S. farmers and ranchers. He said that during his visit to Malaysia, it was “very clear” that people wanted to buy American products. He said that buyers abroad trust American products to be safe and high-quality.

The under secretary recalled meeting a restaurateur in Malaysia who invested her own money in a processing plant in the U.S. so she could be the first one to have American beef in her restaurant.

“Those are the kinds of investments and forward-leaning conversations we’re having with buyers in these countries all around the world,” he said.

TRUMP CALLS ON TRACTOR COMPANIES TO LOWER PRICES, PLANS TO EASE ENVIRONMENTAL RESTRICTIONS ON EQUIPMENT MAKERS

While the administration has emphasized opening foreign markets, Lindberg said the impact could also be felt closer to home as U.S. farmers and ranchers supply more of the food Americans consume.

Beyond the narrowing trade gap, Lindberg said Americans could also see changes at the grocery store. He pointed to a projected decline in agricultural imports, including fruits and vegetables, and argued that increased domestic production could reduce the U.S.’s reliance on foreign suppliers.

“Producing things locally, lower transit costs, all of that combines to get to what the president’s goal and objective has been, which is reducing prices at the grocery store shelves,” he said.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

While the U.S. remains in a trade deficit, Lindberg said the narrowing gap signals progress toward the agricultural trade surplus that American farmers and ranchers have seen in previous years.

This post was originally published here

The longtime Manhattan residence of the late Ivana Trump has finally traded hands, but at a price that reflects a sobering reality for New York City’s luxury real estate market.

Property records show the opulent Upper East Side townhouse sold on Feb. 27 for $14 million, the Wall Street Journal reported. It’s a $12.5 million price cut from the original $26.5 million asking price set shortly after the businesswoman’s death in 2022.

The $14 million sale comes after three price cuts over the past three years.

Even with the massive discount, the estate saw a $2.5 million return from what Ivana originally paid in 1992. Proceeds from the sale are set to be split among her three children, Donald Trump Jr., Eric Trump and Ivanka Trump.

REAL ESTATE EXPERTS BLAST MAMDANI’S MATH-DEFYING PLAN, WARN OF HIGHER RENTS AND FLIGHT

A piece of the Trump family legacy, Ivana bought the home shortly after her divorce from President Donald Trump, and the nearly 9,000-square-foot limestone mansion served as the home base for their children during their teenage years.

“My mom absolutely loved that house,” Eric Trump told the Journal in 2022. He also said the opulence “embodied Ivana Trump.”

The home was a real estate personification of Ivana’s bold, unapologetic style. She oversaw extensive renovations shortly after buying the property to transform the former dental office into a six-story monument to luxury.

Located on the Upper East Side between Fifth and Madison avenues, the Versailles-inspired home features gold accents and shades of red. It has five bedrooms, six bathrooms, two small galley-style kitchens and multiple entertaining areas.

Some of the more grand interior design features include Chinese murals, silk-covered walls, a leopard-print library and crystal chandeliers in almost every room.

Ivana Trump lived in the home for three decades until her death in July 2022. She was found unconscious at the bottom of a staircase in the home after what authorities ruled was an accidental fall that caused blunt impact injuries, Fox News previously reported.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

While transaction volume for New York City townhouses rose in 2025, the actual average sale prices fell, according to Leslie Garfield & Co.’s 2025 townhouse report. By the third quarter of 2025, the average sale price for Manhattan townhouses dropped 14% to $6.9 million.

Adam Modlin of the Modlin Group represented the buyer and seller in the transaction. He did not immediately respond to Fox News Digital’s request for comment.

READ MORE FROM FOX BUSINESS

This post was originally published here

Companies in the private sector added 63,000 jobs in February, payroll processing firm ADP said Wednesday.

The figure is above economists’ estimates of a gain of 50,000 jobs. The prior month’s payrolls number was revised lower to a gain of just 11,000 from an initially reported gain of 22,000.

“We’ve seen an increase in hiring and pay gains remain solid, especially for job-stayers,” said Nela Richardson, ADP chief economist. “But with hiring concentrated in only a few sectors, our data shows no widespread pay benefit from changing jobs. In fact, the pay premium for switching employers hit a record low in February.”

STANLEY BLACK & DECKER TO CUT HUNDREDS OF JOBS, SHUT CONNECTICUT PLANT

Education and health services added 58,000 positions, leading job creation in February. Construction added 19,000, information gained 11,000 and other services added 6,000.

Financial activities added 2,000 jobs, natural resources and mining gained 2,000 and leisure and hospitality added 1,000 positions.

DEADLIEST JOBS IN AMERICA REVEALED

On the negative side, professional and business services lost 30,000 jobs. Manufacturing lost 5,000 positions and trade, transportation and utilities lost 1,000.

EBAY CUTS 800 JOBS ACROSS COMPANY OPERATIONS JUST DAYS AFTER DROPPING $1.2B ON TRENDY GEN Z FASHION APP

Large businesses – those with 500 or more employees – added 10,000 jobs in February. Businesses with 50 to 499 employees lost 7,000 workers. Establishments with fewer than 50 employees added 60,000 jobs.

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

Wage growth in February was little changed from last month. People staying in their roles saw their pay climb 4.5% from the prior year, while pay gains for those changing their jobs fell slightly to 6.3% from 6.4% in January.

This post was originally published here

Creators who post artificial intelligence-generated videos of armed conflicts without clear disclosure will be penalized under new X policies aimed at preventing manipulation and misinformation.

Nikita Bier, head of product at X, announced the revisions to X’s Creator Revenue Sharing policies in a post Tuesday.

“During times of war, it is critical that people have access to authentic information on the ground. With today’s AI technologies, it is trivial to create content that can mislead people,” Bier wrote.

Users who post AI-generated videos of an armed conflict must now add a disclosure that it was made with AI, Bier said. Those who fail to add a disclosure will face a 90-day suspension from the platform’s Creator Revenue Sharing.

OPENAI CEO SAM ALTMAN ANSWERS QUESTIONS ON NEW PENTAGON DEAL: ‘THIS TECHNOLOGY IS SUPER IMPORTANT’

Any future violations will result in a permanent suspension from the program.

Bier said X will be flagged by any post with a Community Note or if the content contains metadata (or other signals) from generative AI tools.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“We will continue to refine our policies and product to ensure X can be trusted during these critical moments,” Bier said.

This post was originally published here

  • In today’s CEO Daily: Diane Brady on companies’ push to regionalize amid conflict.
  • The big leadership story: Iran war raises energy prices and cyber threats, with taxpayers footing the bill.
  • The markets: A sea of red as the Iranian conflict escalates, with no end in sight.
  • Plus: All the news and watercooler chat from Fortune.

Good morning. Will the attacks on Iran accelerate the push to decentralize global companies? This year’s Edelman Trust Barometer referenced the rise of the “poly-national”—a corporate structure that invests in long-term local relationships, compartmentalizing everything from talent to supply chains in individual countries. To stay ahead in a world that’s shifted from globalization to national interests, the argument goes, companies must “operate as a network of businesses with a U.S. center, but a local face.”

It’s a variation of a strategy long deployed by consumer-facing global giants like Coca-Cola and Procter & Gamble, which prioritize global experience in their leaders and connect strong regional operations. HSBC regionalized its operations at the start of last year, splitting its operations between “Eastern Markets” and “Western Markets.” And years of heightened tensions and tariff wars with China have long forced companies to alter what Singapore Prime Minister Lawrence Wong called the “invented in California; made in China” strategy that helped firms like Apple to scale so profitably.

There are other forces disrupting the model of a centralized company. I spoke yesterday with Christina Kosmowski, CEO of LogicMonitor, which monitors customers’ tech systems from data centers to the cloud. She is having more conversations with CEOs about doubling down on a regional strategy to build resilience. “When your systems go down, you can’t operate,” says Kosmowski. “The time frame to react is just within seconds, instead of hours and days.”

To be sure, decentralization comes with risks, not least of which is the duplication of systems, costs, and functions that get streamlined in an efficient corporate structure. As Novartis CEO Vas Narasimhan said to me last year, “to navigate complexity in the external world, you have to radically take out complexity internally.” That means creating a leaner and simpler organization where everyone knows who is responsible for what. It’s possible to have that alongside autonomous and agile regional operations, of course, but it requires leaders whose teams are aligned on what efforts are localized—and what stays the same.

Contact CEO Daily via Diane Brady at diane.brady@fortune.com

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Ever thought about bringing your mom or dad to an interview with you? Well, it’s a bad look—at least according to Shark Tank investor Kevin O’Leary. 

“First question I’d have to the son or daughter, I’d say: ‘Do you want me to hire your mother or you? What’s she doing here? Because I’m not bringing her into the business,’” O’Leary told Fox Business in an interview published Feb. 28.

As shocking as it may be to hear that the young workforce is bringing their parents along for the recruitment process, it’s a very real phenomenon. O’Leary said it happened to him when he was interviewing a Gen Z candidate. 

“I just said: ‘This isn’t going to work, guys. Your mom is not going to be part of this discussion, so we’re going to have to shut her down, or you’re not going to be considered for this role,’” O’Leary recalled. 

Plus, the proof is in the pudding: A 2025 study by Resume Templates showed a staggering 77% of surveyed Gen Z job seekers have brought a parent to a job interview. They have even gotten them to negotiate pay raises and complete hiring tests on their behalf. 

O’Leary argues this is a “horrific signal” in Gen Z hiring trends. He said it shows younger professionals can’t think or make decisions on their own.

“If your dad or your mom [appears], that résumé goes right into the garbage,” O’Leary added. 

Why parents are crashing their Gen Z kids’ job interviews

A mix of economic anxiety, intensive parenting, and shifting norms around independence is pushing some Gen Z workers to involve parents in interviews and the broader job application process.

Because entry-level roles are so scarce and competitive in today’s job market, early-career interviews can feel like make-or-break events. Another 2025 report shows nearly 60% of students who graduated within the past year are still looking for their first full-time role, according to Kickresume.

So for Gen Z, having a parent involved in their job hunt feels like hedging against mistakes. But experts have echoed O’Leary’s sentiments, saying that buffer of having a parent there really isn’t as beneficial as Gen Zers may like to think.

“If you’re the parent who’s inserting yourself, you’re going to diminish the confidence that your son or daughter has walking into interviews, thinking that they can’t do it themselves,” Brandi Britton, an executive director at Robert Half, previously told Fortune.

And for some Gen Zers, parental involvement expands far beyond sitting in on interviews. Some parents are “career copiloting,” meaning Gen X and baby boomer parents are deeply involved in their kids’ education and careers—so much so they’re editing résumés, scheduling work calls, joining interviews, and negotiating job offers.

“From first applications to negotiating offers, parents are firmly in the driver’s seat for many Gen-Z workers,” according to a survey from résumé, cover letter, and job search platform Zety.

O’Leary also advised other business leaders to just cut interviews short if they see a parent in the room.

“Just say: ‘Sorry. That’s not going to work for us,’” he said. “It means you can’t do this on your own. I think it’s a horrific signal—and I really think that parents that are overbearing like this think that they’re going to add value.”

“This is just a curse on their children,” he added. “It’s a really, really bad idea.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

The fallout of the joint U.S.-Israeli attack on Iran led to the highest-ever activity on X, the platform’s owner Elon Musk confirmed on Sunday.

Musk made the statement in reply to Nikita Bier, the head of product at X. Bier stated on Saturday that the day had been “the biggest day on X in history.”

“Highest usage of X ever,” Musk replied.

The exchange came after the U.S. and Israel conducted airstrikes and drone attacks on multiple targets across Iran, killing Supreme Leader Ayatolla Ali Khamenei as well as several other top Iranian officials, including the head of the Iranian Revolutionary Guard Corps (IRGC).

AMERICA STRIKES IRAN AGAIN — HAS WASHINGTON PLANNED FOR WHAT COMES NEXT?

Footage of airstrikes both against Iran and Iran’s retaliatory strikes against neighboring countries spread across social media like wildfire throughout Saturday and into Sunday.

The strikes also quickly led to widespread arguments over whether the attacks benefited the U.S. and whether President Donald Trump had the authority to carry them out without approval from Congress.

Ben Rhodes, a top Obama-era official who helped negotiate the 2015 nuclear deal with Iran, faced mass criticism after he tried to rebuke Trump for the attacks.

FROM HOSTAGE CRISIS TO ASSASSINATION PLOTS: IRAN’S NEAR HALF-CENTURY WAR ON AMERICANS

Rhodes argued on X that Trump and Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu “seem to be totally unconcerned about the human beings — on all sides — who will suffer.”

“Trump’s second term has been the worst case scenario,” Rhodes added.

Rhodes was quickly ridiculed by many conservatives on social media who pointed to the Obama-era Iran deal as a catalyst for allowing the situation to escalate to this point, and placing blame on the Obama administration for not taking the threat from Iran seriously.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“Yes we were much better off with a president who drew redlines and failed to enforce them,” American Enterprise Institute fellow and Fox News contributor Marc Thiessen posted on X. “Team Obama might want to sit this one out.”

“Oh look the guy who literally created this mess in the first place has chimed in,” Republican digital operative Alec Sears posted on X. 

Fox News’ Andrew Mark Miller contributed to this report.

This post was originally published here

OpenAI CEO Sam Altman on Saturday publicly defended his company’s new Pentagon deal, just a day after President Donald Trump ordered federal agencies to cut ties with rival Anthropic.

Hours after the U.S. and Israel launched a joint strike against Iran, Altman took to X to answer questions about the agreement allowing the Department of War (DoW) to deploy OpenAI’s artificial intelligence (AI) models on its classified network.

“I’d like to answer questions about our work with the DoW and our thinking over the past few days,” he said.

In announcing the agreement late Friday, Altman wrote, “AI safety and wide distribution of benefits are the core of our mission. Two of our most important safety principles are prohibitions on domestic mass surveillance and human responsibility for the use of force, including for autonomous weapon systems. The DoW agrees with these principles, reflects them in law and policy, and we put them into our agreement.”

OPENAI REACHES PENTAGON AGREEMENT AS TRUMP ORDERS ANTHROPIC OFF FEDERAL SYSTEMS

The OpenAI agreement came as Trump directed every federal agency to stop using Anthropic technology, setting a six-month phase-out period and intensifying the dispute over how AI should be used in military operations.

Secretary of War Pete Hegseth said he was directing the department to designate Anthropic a “supply-chain risk to National Security.”

Anthropic CEO Dario Amodei had refused demands from the Pentagon to allow its AI to be used for “all lawful purposes,” citing concerns about “mass domestic surveillance” and “fully autonomous weapons.”

When asked why the Pentagon accepted OpenAI but not Anthropic, Altman said, “Anthropic seemed more focused on specific prohibitions in the contract, rather than citing applicable laws, which we felt comfortable with.” He added that Anthropic “may have wanted more operational control than we did.”

OPENAI’S $110B FUNDING ROUND DRAWS INVESTMENT FROM AMAZON, NVIDIA, SOFTBANK

Altman said the Defense Department did not issue any explicit or implicit threats before the agreement was reached, adding that Pentagon officials were “genuinely surprised we were willing to consider” classified work.

He said OpenAI initially planned to do only non-classified work with the Pentagon, but that talks accelerated this week.

“We thought the DoW clearly needed an AI partner, and doing classified work is clearly much more complex. We have said no to previous deals in classified settings that Anthropic took. We started talking with the DoW many months ago about our non-classified work. This week things shifted into high gear on the classified side. We found the DoW to be flexible on what we needed, and we want to support them in their very important mission,” Altman said.

APPLE IMPLEMENTING AGE VERIFICATION TOOL TO ENSURE USERS ARE 18 AND UP FOR SOME APPS

Altman also addressed criticism that the agreement appeared rushed, saying OpenAI moved quickly to “de-escalate the situation.”

“I think the current path things are on is dangerous for Anthropic, healthy competition and the U.S.,” he said. “We negotiated to make sure similar terms would be offered to all other AI labs.”

Altman acknowledged he remains concerned that a future legal dispute could expose OpenAI to the same supply-chain risk designation imposed on Anthropic.

“If we have to take on that fight we will, but it clearly exposes us to some risk,” he said. “I am still very hopeful this is going to get resolved, and part of why we wanted to act fast was to help increase the chances of that.”

ALTMAN CALLS MUSK’S SPACE DATA CENTER PLANS ‘RIDICULOUS’ FOR CURRENT AI COMPUTING NEEDS

Anthropic previously told Fox News Digital that Hegseth’s designation of the company as a supply-chain risk “follows months of negotiations that reached an impasse over two exceptions we requested to the lawful use of our AI model, Claude: the mass domestic surveillance of Americans and fully autonomous weapons.”

Altman also addressed questions about whether the federal government could attempt to nationalize OpenAI or other AI development.

“I obviously don’t know; I have thought about it of course… but it doesn’t seem super likely on the current trajectory,” he said. “That said, I do think a close partnership between governments and the companies building this technology is super important.”

Altman said the most difficult aspect of the agreement to reconcile involved “non-domestic surveillance.”

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“I have accepted that the US military is going to do some amount of surveillance on foreigners, and I know foreign governments try to do it to us, but I still don’t like it,” he said. “I think it is very important that society thinks through the consequences of this; perhaps the single principle I care most about for AI is that it is democratized, and I can see surveillance making that worse.”

“On the other hand, I also respect the democratic process. I don’t think this is up to me to decide,” he added.

This post was originally published here

For months, the threat of artificial intelligence (AI) replacing human workers has hovered over the American economy like a distant storm. But this week, the storm made landfall, as viral doomsday essays seemed to become reality.

AI executive Matt Shumer made a stir early in the month with an essay posted to X.com (and adapted for Fortune) that forcefully argued for white-collar workers to be afraid. He likened the moment to February 2020, with the pandemic rapidly approaching U.S. shores and a widely unprepared American public. The essay has been viewed 85 million times on the social media platform.

He wasn’t alone. Citrini Research, the top finance Substack, posted a similar essay on Feb. 22, warning of a “global intelligence crisis” brought on by sudden advancements in AI. The highly speculative, but deeply resonant essay painted a doomsday scenario of a “human intelligence displacement spiral” where AI agents rapidly replace software engineers, financial advisors, and middle management. At its core was the concept of a “ghost GDP”—economic output that benefits the owners of computing power but never circulates through the human consumer economy. In this scenario, stripped of high-paying salaries, prime borrowers default and tank the $13 trillion residential mortgage market, unemployment spikes above 10%, the stock market corrects down 38%, and the economy collapses into a deflationary spiral. Unusually for a work of speculative fiction, the market reacted to the piece, showing that the “AI scare” trade was real, at least in readers’ minds.

The Dow Jones Industrial Average was down over 800 points on Monday (1.66%), with software stocks getting hit especially hard. Analysts and economists responded throughout the week that the economics implied by Citrini’s argument were unsound, but on Thursday, Twitter co-founder and current Block CEO Jack Dorsey stunned the market by announcing a massive 40% downsizing of his company’s ranks. In words that could have come out of the Citrini report, he wrote to shareholders that “intelligence tools have changed what it means to build and run a company.” Block stock rose nearly 14% the next day.

“This is one of the first major examples of AI driving layoffs, but certainly not the last,” Matt Shumer wrote on X. “If you’re saying ‘this won’t happen to me,’ reevaluate your thoughts. Now. It may be the most important thing you do.”

Many Wall Street banks, top economists and even AI CEOs consider this all to still be overblown hype, cautioning that macroeconomics 101 implies the Citrini narrative is false. Others stake out a middle ground, predicting an AI transition that will be difficult but ultimately positive. But the Block layoffs suggest that, at least in the tech sector, the AI scare is moving from market narrative to sudden reality. And America isn’t prepared.

The disconnect that misses millions falling off the white-collar cliff

Veteran macroeconomic analyst Albert Edwards of Societe Generale is a certain type of famous in the finance world for his alternative, somewhat contrarian views, which the French investment bank stresses do not reflect its house opinion. In 2023, he wondered aloud in his weekly strategy note about the phenomenon of “greedflation” signaling potentially the end of capitalism, as record high profit margins indicated that corporations were raising prices more than they needed to, with the working and middle classes suffering as a result.

Edwards claimed the Citrini research vindicated his analyses of late. “The AI macro doomsday scenario is not for 2028,” he wrote on Monday. “It’s here right now!” He cited data showing that the U.S. consumer was “running on fumes” as incomes had “hit a brick wall” during the greedflation era. “I can honestly say that if I was 18 now, there is no way I would go to university only to leave with huge debts and poor job prospects,” he wrote. “Instead, I would become an electrician or similar trade.”

Woman wearing a purple shirt.

Nicole James

Nicole James, a 42-year-old former creative executive who built Snapchat’s content team, is living the reality that Edwards described. After a series of increasingly senior roles, including her stint at Snap, she was head of content at the animation studio Invisible Universe until 2023, when the company pivoted to become an AI studio and laid off half its staff. James hasn’t been employed full-time since, despite never having a gap in employment for the previous decade-and-a-half.

She told Fortune about sending out hundreds of applications and facing endless ghosting and a profound lack of respect for her creative skills. Maybe she’s a victim of an entertainment recession more than an AI victim, she said, but she’s working retail to make ends meet. She also said she’s struggling with a certain loss of identity. “I really felt embarrassed when I showed up to work the first day and like put on my name tag,” James admitted. “It’s very shocking. Like I just fell off a cliff and I don’t, I have no flashlight.”

Most of the country feels as if they’re on the cliff or falling, according to Laks Ganapathi, founder of the independent investment research firm Unicus. Ganapathi’s firm produced a research note very similar to the Citrini scenario in mid-January, she said, except they called it the “vibecession,” a term popularized by economics writer Kyla Scanlon. Forecasting high unemployment and stubborn inflation into the second half of 2026, she predicted that “companies will lean as much as they can, as fast as they can with AI. And that is going to cut a lot of jobs. And some companies in the process are going to completely stop existing as a going concern.”

Woman wearing black staring off screen to the left.
Laks Ganapathi is the founder of the independent investment research firm Unicus.
Laks Ganapathi

Then, because of “skyhigh inflation” and sticky inflation, Ganapathi argued, a huge amount of people will persistently experience recession, while another segment of people will insist that the data shows everything is fine in the economy. She said the “huge disconnect between the data and the reality will keep widening, and AI will only make it worse.” It sounds a lot like the “ghost GDP” thesis of the Citrini essay, she agreed. What really matters about this disconnect, she added, is that it means the U.S. economy won’t experience a “clean, single-event collapse.” Millions of Americans, in other words, could find themselves in a continuous tumble off a cliff, without the flashlight.

Wall Street pushback and the jobs of tomorrow

Wall Street is attempting to talk the market off the ledge. Citadel Securities published a blistering takedown of the Citrini essay, pointing out that the data flatly contradicts the thesis. If AI is so destructive, they argued, why is demand for software engineers actually up 11% year-over-year?

Citadel argues the doomsday thesis relies on the “recursive technology fallacy,” ignoring the physical constraints of energy and compute power that naturally brake infinite AI expansion. Historically, Citadel notes, productivity shocks lower marginal costs, expand output, and increase real income, acting as a complement to human labor rather than a strict substitute. Other critics of the Citrini essay include Tyler Cowen, of Marginal Revolution fame, and Robert Armstrong, the Unhedged columnist at the Financial Times.

Morgan Stanley similarly urged calm, reminding investors that while AI will alter the labor force, it will not permanently replace it. Instead, the firm predicted a wave of entirely new corporate roles, such as the “Chief AI Officer” and specialized jobs like “computational geneticists” and “predictive maintenance engineers.” Morgan Stanley even envisioned a new product manager/engineer hybrid role centered around “vibe coding”—prototyping concepts through natural language before handing them off for deployment.

Bank of America Research, for its part, claimed the “apocalyptic narrative” about AI “doesn’t square well with sound economic theory.” Global economist Claudio Irigoyen wrote on Friday that the selloff in markets to “a combination of crowded positioning and multiple equilibria, similar to a bank run triggered by unfounded rumors of insolvency,” similar to warnings from UBS’ Paul Donovan and Apollo Global Management’s Torsten Slok that retail traders’ prominence is leaving markets vulnerable to narrative and knee-jerk movements.

Notes of caution included Citigroup allowing that “eventually, AI implementation will lead to higher unemployment and deflation,” while Goldman Sachs allowed that “AI impacts could be more frontloaded than the 10-year adoption cycle embedded in our forecasts,” but a “gradual and orderly adoption cycle” remains the most likely outcome.

Entering a more optimized world

Even several tech CEOs told Fortune, echoing recent comments from PromptQL founder Tanmai Gopal, that the AI job-loss narrative is mostly hype and there will be plenty of jobs going forward.

David Stout, CEO of webAI, the AI lab that was valued at $2.5 billion as of January, said the scenario for jobs going forward will be like a closely watched travel budget. If you don’t use up every penny of the budget, your company will take back what’s not being spent. Instead of massive job loss, he said, companies will be “much more optimized” with proper AI adoption. “I think AI is going to help signal some employees that probably aren’t contributing … You’ll see companies let people go because they’re like, ‘Wait a second, AI is doing what you said would take a year to do. Something’s wrong.’ I think it’s going to be like those type of moments.”

Man with glasses staring straight ahead.
David Stout is the founder of webAI.
David Stout

Still, as an AI executive himself, Stout said he thinks it’s absurd to argue that the technology can really replace humans. “AI is not just this autonomous thing that goes and does exactly what it needs to do,” he said. “If it is, we’re not seeing it.”

Even an executive inside an industry actually being disrupted—insurance—poured cold water on the mass displacement theory. Amrish Singh, CEO of the AI insurance startup Liberate, told Fortune that he’s seeing tremendous growth in terms of what AI can automate in the repetitive, mechanical processing of insurance claims. “We’re today at about 2.8 million automated actions a month…tasks, things that we can automate using AI.” He also noted major disclosures from Allianz and Travelers about huge savings already being achieved as a result of AI adoption. “We’re seeing many companies, not just Liberate customers, but across the insurance industry, finding a way to use AI specifically on those ordinary tasks, you know, answering phone calls, emails, SMS, resolving the request for the customer with serious ROI.”

The reason people shouldn’t fear the looming cliff of job loss, he added, comes down to a basic understanding of the insurance industry. Estimating that $25 out of every $100 spent on handling a claim is operating expenses—answering calls, emails and the like—that’s a huge saving in the $1.2 trillion insurance industry. Even then “this particular industry is one where there’s always value of human effort, right? Humans are amazing at judgment.” Every insurance claim will require a visit, and then likely a lengthy conversation, with a claims adjuster, he added. “Humans are amazing at evaluating a very specific, unique circumstance.”

Man with glasses looks straight ahead.
Amrish Singh is the CEO of the AI insurance startup Liberate
Amrish Singh

There’s another thing about humans with this AI transition, Singh added: “Humans swing between doomsday and complete disbelief,” while the truth lies in the messy middle. Ultimately, Singh predicted the integration of AI will follow the historical pattern of enterprise technology: “It’s slow, and then it’s sudden.”

The ‘new-collar’ boom

What it still comes down to, as well, is the physical reality of the AI boom and the fact that data centers represent a bottleneck—adoption will be limited as long as the amount of compute is limited as well. Mike Mathews proudly recalled to Fortune that he began his career in the Boston area as a fourth-generation plumber, with his family working in the blue-collar trades dating back to the 1920s. Now that he’s the global digital infrastructure practice leader for Marsh, he’s familiar with the figures: The world currently has 12,000 data centers, with 3,000 more planned, and he said both white-collar and blue-collar jobs will be replaced by what he called the “new-collar” economy.

“You’re going to have very, very high-paid blue-collar workers,” Mathews said. He argued that a massive social shift is required, as parents must begin guiding their children toward vocational training and technical labs rather than strictly white-collar degrees. And these won’t be one-time jobs just for the construction of the data centers, either; Mathews said the vast majority will require complete retrofitting to handle AI’s intense power and liquid cooling needs.

“It’s hard to imagine two white-collar parents understanding the path to a very successful blue-collar career where an electrician is working in a data center making $250,000, [or] $300,000. It’s unimaginable, but that’s where we’re headed.”

Mathews included himself in this big social switch that needs to happen, when asked about whether he’d want his own kids to follow in the family footsteps. Explaining that his daughters opted for white-collar work, he said, “I live that dream of seeing them … going to a skyscraper [for work], holding a Starbucks coffee, not going to a data center and working on high-voltage switchgear.” But he said it will be a big value going forward to emphasize getting both kinds of education. “There’s time in your life to get both, certainly before the age of 24. Get some technology training, get some hands-on training, get various skill sets.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

ortheast/massachusetts” target=”_blank” rel=”noopener”>Massachusetts experienced a net loss of about 182,000 people from April 2020 to July 2025 due to domestic out-migration. According to the free market think tank, the population’s decline was equivalent to losing about one-fifth of a Cambridge during that time.

It is obvious that out-migration is a fundamental phenomenon that is here to stay, not just a result of remote work and the pandemic, the report stated. Home out-migration levels were growing before the pandemic and were considerably higher afterward.

The loss of tⱨeir financial activitყ wiIl have an impact on the state ƒor decades to come, it continuȩd, nσting that those wⱨo leave tȩnd to be younger, between the age oƒ 26 and 34. ln 2026, multiculturalism is αnticipated ƫo drop significantly, leading to population decline and α decline įn the work force.

BOSTON OFFICIALS DISCOVER CITY-RUN GROCERY STORES TO ATTACH RISING FOOD PRICES: Review

Ƭhe state’s labour force reached 3. 9 million in 2024, the most significant raise year over year since 2018, according to The Pioneer Institute. Between 2022 and 2024, 230, 000 ȵew resiḑents were added to tⱨe population, primαrily as a result of rȩcord worldwide migration.

Massachusetts ‘ private sector employment is still below its 2019 levels, and private sector employment has decreased by 18, 000 jobs ( or -0. 5 % ) since January 2020. &nbsp,

According to the institute’s analysis, the private sector job growth rate for the United States over that time period topped 5 % while rapidly expanding states like&nbsp, Florida, North Carolina, and Texas all overshot 10 %.

MOOD Y’S FINDS ARE IN OR ARE QUITELY RECENT TO RECESSION, ABOVE 20 STATES ECONOMIES.

Accorḑing to the institute, Massachusetts’s stateωide unemployment rate has increased ƫo 4. 8 % as of December, continuing a steady upward trend from its pre-pandemic low of 3. 2 % in April 2023.

Massachusetts ‘ unemployment rate remains above neighboring states like&nbsp, Connecticut ( 4. 2 % ), Rhode Island ( 4. 3 % ), Maine ( 3. 2 % ), New Hampshire ( 3. 1 % ) and Vermont ( 2. 6 % ).

The state’s career opportunities in November 2025, a increases of 50 %, compared to the top of the pandemic era of 338, 000 in May 2022, are noted by The Pioneer Institute. Also, for the first time since the pandemic in October 2024, the ratio of unemployed to jobs surpassed 1.

NORTHEAST SUBURB ATTENDS ENTIRE COUNTRY FOR THE HOTTEST HOUSING MARKET IN 2025.

According to the report, 53. 4 % of Massachusetts ‘ population, which is 25 or older, holds a bachelor’s degree or higher, despite being the state&nbsp, most educated state in the U. Ș. as of 2024. Vermont ( 50. 9 % ), New Jersey ( 47. 8 % ), and New Hampshire ( 47 % ) were the next states with the highest levels of education in the report.

Massachusetts, but, placed 43rd among the ten lowest states in the Tax Foundation’s 2026 State Tax Competitiveness Index.

According to the report,” the states in the middle 10 tend to have a number of problems in common: difficult, nonneutral taxes with relatively high rates. “

Biochemists ( + 218 % ), bioengineers ( + 182 % ), and biological technicians ( + 37 % ) were the job categories in Massachusetts with the highest growth from 2019 to 2024. As well as family medicine physicians ( + 61 % ), there were also notable increases for chemical equipment operators and tenders ( + 504 % ), and logisticians ( + 88 % ).

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO.

Among the professions with the highest rates of decline were those that could be subject to automation and artificial intelligence, such as clerks ( 30 % ), secretaries ( 29 % ), cashiers ( 20 % ), and customer service representatives ( 17 % ).

This post was originally published here

OpenAI said on Friday it is raising $110 billion in a blockbuster funding round that would value the ChatGPT maker at $840 billion, in a deal that signals the feverish pace of investment in artificial intelligence.

The funding round — one of the largest private capital raises on record — includes a $30 billion investment from SoftBank, $30 billion from Nvidia, and $50 billion from Amazon, and comes ahead of the AI startup’s expected mega-IPO later this year.

More investors are expected to join the round as it progresses, OpenAI said.

DISNEY ANNOUNCES MAJOR OPENAI DEAL, INCLUDES $1B EQUITY INVESTMENT, USE OF CHARACTERS ON SORA VIDEO PLATFORM

Big Tech companies and large tech investors such as SoftBank are racing to forge partnerships with OpenAI — which is spending heavily on data centers — betting that closer ties with the company would give them a competitive edge in the AI race.

For OpenAI, the fresh cash will help secure advanced AI chips and the computing capacity that it needs to maintain its pole position in the AI industry, especially as competition heats up from rivals such as Claude chatbot maker Anthropic and Google’s Gemini.

OpenAI is targeting roughly $600 billion in total compute spend through 2030, a source told Reuters last week.

AMAZON PARTNERSHIP

Along with the $50 billion investment, OpenAI and Amazon have also struck a deal in which OpenAI will utilize 2 gigawatts of computing capacity powered by Amazon’s in-house Trainium AI chips.

NVIDIA CEO SAYS ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE BOOM IS JUST GETTING STARTED: ‘AI IS GOING TO BE EVERYWHERE’

The companies are also expanding their $38 billion cloud deal signed last year, with OpenAI saying it would spend an additional $100 billion on Amazon Web Services over the next eight years. As well, OpenAI will work with Amazon to develop customized models for the e-commerce giant’s engineering teams.

Amazon will start with an initial $15 billion investment, followed by another $35 billion in the coming months when certain conditions are met, the companies said.

Amazon Web Services will also be the exclusive third-party cloud provider for OpenAI Frontier, the ChatGPT maker’s enterprise platform for building and running AI agents.

The partnership does not change OpenAI’s existing relationship with Microsoft, with Microsoft Azure still remaining the exclusive cloud provider for OpenAI’s APIs that provide access to OpenAI’s models, the companies said.

ALTMAN CALLS MUSK’S SPACE DATA CENTER PLANS ‘RIDICULOUS’ FOR CURRENT AI COMPUTING NEEDS

OpenAI’s first-party products will continue to be hosted on Azure, and Microsoft holds its exclusive license and access to intellectual property across OpenAI models and products.

NVIDIA INVESTMENT RAISES DOUBTS

Nvidia’s investment in OpenAI gives the chip giant a financial stake in one of its largest customers, amplifying the already intertwined relationship between two of the highest-profile players in the AI industry.

It also underscores a growing trend in the tech and AI industry where firms invest in and sign supply deals with each other, raising concerns about “circular” financing deals.

It was not immediately clear whether Nvidia’s $30 billion investment replaced its earlier commitment announced in September under which Nvidia was set to invest up to $100 billion in the startup.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

OpenAI and Nvidia did not immediately respond to Reuters’ requests for clarification.

ChatGPT now serves more than 900 million weekly active users, OpenAI said, adding that it has now surpassed 50 million consumer subscribers. January and February are on track to become the largest months for new subscriber additions, it said.

Its AI-assisted coding product, Codex, has also scaled — weekly Codex users have more than tripled since the start of the year to 1.6 million, the company said.

This post was originally published here

E-commerce giant eBay announced Thursday it is slashing hundreds of jobs, just days after the company dropped $1.2 billion in cash to acquire a trendy Gen Z fashion app and settled a federal stalking lawsuit involving former executives.

Multiple outlets have reported that eBay will cut a total of 800 roles, or 6% of its workforce, as company documents indicated about 12,300 employees worldwide as of Dec. 31, 2025.

eBay did not immediately respond to Fox News Digital’s request for comment.

HOME DEPOT CUTS 800 JOBS, ORDERS CORPORATE STAFF BACK TO OFFICE FULL TIME

The company told Reuters, “We are taking steps to reinvest across our business and align our structure with our strategic priorities, which will affect certain roles across our workforce.”

Just hours before the layoff news, eBay settled a civil lawsuit against the couple and newsletter writers David and Ina Steiner. Reuters detailed how former employees sent the Steiners live cockroaches, spiders, a funeral wreath and a bloody pig mask to allegedly silence their reporting.

Former eBay executives were sentenced to prison in 2022, and this week’s settlement was reached for an undisclosed amount.

Earlier this month, eBay made headlines for its acquisition of Depop — a customer-to-customer fashion marketplace popular with Gen Z and millennials looking to sell used clothing and accessories. eBay purchased the platform for approximately $1.2 billion in cash.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Depop’s user base is 90% under age 34, according to a press release, meaning eBay is positioning itself to reach younger consumers who have largely moved away from the traditional auction model.

“Fashion represents more than $10 billion in annual gross merchandise volume (GMV) for eBay and delivered 10% year-over-year GMV growth in the U.S. in 2025,” CEO Jamie Iannone said in a statement. “This acquisition presents an opportunity to advance one of our newest and fastest-growing Focus Categories with a marketplace that complements our existing presence, and enables us to reach a younger demographic across the expanding recommerce landscape.”

READ MORE FROM FOX BUSINESS

This post was originally published here

FedEx announced Thursday it will return any tariff refunds it may receive to its customers who paid them as it seeks compensation from the federal government for tariffs paid that were subsequently ruled illegal.

The shipping giant said in a statement that it intends to return any tariff refunds to shippers and customers who bore the cost of the tariffs. The move follows the Supreme Court’s ruling last week that a key portion of President Donald Trump’s trade agenda — his tariffs imposed under the International Emergency Economic Powers Act (IEEPA) — was struck down as illegal.

“We remain focused on supporting our customers as they adapt to the latest regulatory changes and have taken a procedural step to preserve our right to refunds for IEEPA tariffs on behalf of our customers and FedEx,” the company said.

“Our intent is straightforward: If refunds are issued to FedEx, we will issue refunds to the shippers and consumers who originally bore those charges. When that will happen and the exact process for requesting and issuing refunds will depend in part on future guidance from the government and the court.

FEDEX SUES TRUMP ADMINISTRATION FOR FULL TARIFF REFUNDS AFTER SUPREME COURT RULING ON IEEPA

“We are committed to transparency and will communicate clearly as additional direction becomes available from the U.S. government and the court,” FedEx added while directing customers to a tariff-related webpage on the company’s site that will host the latest information on the topic.

The Supreme Court struck down the IEEPA tariffs after finding that the law cited by Trump in imposing the import taxes didn’t authorize the president to impose tariffs, which meant the levies were unconstitutional. 

The ruling didn’t affect tariffs imposed by the Trump administration that used other legal authorities. The White House has signaled it aims to impose other tariffs to offset the IEEPA tariff revenue, and Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent said last month the Treasury Department had the funds necessary for potential tariff refunds, though he said that may be a time-consuming process.

WILL REFUNDS BE ISSUED AFTER SUPREME COURT RULING ON TRUMP TARIFFS?

While the IEEPA tariffs were in effect, the federal government collected more than $150 billion under those authorities before they were struck down, revenue that could now be subject to tariff refunds, according to a range of estimates.

The nonpartisan Tax Foundation put the figure at about $150 billion in IEEPA tariffs collected, while the nonpartisan Penn-Wharton Budget Model’s estimate was $175 billion and an analysis by JPMorgan suggested a range of $150 billion to $200 billion.

With the case remanded to lower courts after the Supreme Court’s ruling striking down the IEEPA tariffs, it’s possible the courts and the government may reach an agreement on a format for providing refunds to tariff payers.

However, there are avenues to pursue tariff refunds by filing suit in the U.S. Court of International Trade, which FedEx and more than 1,000 companies have done, and through appeals to U.S. Customs and Border Protection, which collects tariffs on behalf of the Department of Homeland Security and remits them to the Treasury Department.

HOW SHOULD BUSINESSES APPROACH TARIFF REFUNDS?

A recent study by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York found that U.S. businesses and consumers bore 86% of the tariff burden, while foreign exporters bore 14% as of November 2025. 

The New York Fed’s researchers found that the share borne by U.S. businesses and consumers declined over the year from 94% in the January through August period to 92% in September and October.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Those findings are similar to those contained in another analysis by the nonpartisan Congressional Budget Office (CBO), which noted in its 10-year budget and economic outlook that foreign exporters were absorbing about 5% of the tariff costs with the remaining 95% falling on U.S. firms and consumers.

This post was originally published here

Americans are facing rising electricity costs around the country as winter weather and the rise of artificial intelligence (AI) data centers increase demands on the electric grid.

Electricity prices have risen faster than the pace of inflation in the last year. January consumer price index (CPI) data from the Bureau of Labor Statistics showed electricity costs were up 6.3% from a year ago, while CPI was up 2.4% in that period.

Data from the Energy Information Administration (EIA) showed that, as of December, electricity prices rose nationally from 12.82 cents per kilowatt-hour to 13.72 cents, an increase of 7.1%. The data covers electricity use across all sectors of the economy, including residential, commercial, industrial and transportation.

Phil Flynn, senior market analyst at the Price Futures Group and a FOX Business contributor, said that electricity prices are rising in part because of a regulatory environment that favored renewable energy sources like solar and wind over more reliable sources like natural gas, coal or nuclear.

TRUMP ADMIN RAMPS UP EFFORT TO REVIVE COAL INDUSTRY AS POWER DEMAND SURGES

“They forced the grid away from reliable and cheap baseload power and made it nearly impossible to upgrade power plants, build new pipelines and, in some cases, mandated new builds be powered with electricity instead of natural gas,” Flynn told FOX Business.

While some states have seen modest increases or even declines in electricity costs in the last year, ratepayers in a number of states have seen double-digit percentage increases in the electric bills that can put a significant dent in household budgets.

The District of Columbia saw the biggest spike when compared with the 50 states, with its electricity prices rising 26.29%.

Here’s a look at the 10 states that saw the largest increases in overall electricity costs from a year ago and those that experienced the smallest increases or declines, according to EIA data.

CALIFORNIA GAS PRICES SURGE 40 CENTS IN JUST 2 WEEKS AS IMPACT OF REFINERY CLOSURES WEIGHS

ENERGY SECRETARY SAYS GRID MUST BE BUILT FOR ‘PEAK DEMAND’ AS THREE MILE ISLAND PLANS RETURN

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

This post was originally published here

, mortgage rates drop below 6 %.

For the first time in three and a half years, mortgage buyer Freddie Mac reported Thursday that mortgage rates dropped below 6 % this week.

The benchmark 30-year fixed mortgage‘s average rate dropped 5. 98 % from last week’s reading of 6. 01 %, according to Freddie Mac’s most recent Primary Mortgage Market Survey, which was released on Thursday. &nbsp,

The 30-year loan’s ordinary rate was 6. 76 % a year ago. It was most recently under 6 % on Sept. 8, 2022, at 5. 89 %.

RENT HEASIER FOR MANY AMERICANANS AS MARKET STABILIZERS, CAN HEAVE IT UP TO 80 % OF THE TIME.

Ƭhis level, in additiσn to imρroving home sales, iȿ significant and may encourage more ρotential buyers to purchase ḑuring tⱨe spring homebuying ȿeason, according to Sam Khater, chief economist at Freddįe Mac.

The average rate on a 15-year fixed mortgage increased from last week’s reading of 5. 35 % to 5. 44 %.

TEXAS CAPITAL’S HOUSEHOLD GROWTH SURGES, IMMEDIATELY OUTSIDE OF NATIONAL Level, ARE IMMEDIATELY INVALID

The Federal Ɽeserve and politics are just two examples of how mortǥage ɾates are affecteḑ by various αspects. Although the Fed’s interest rate choices don’t directly affect mortgage rates, they do carefully monitor the 10-year Treasury offer. Aȿ σf Thursḑay afternoon, the yield on 10-year bonds was only 4. 13 %.

Jįayi Xu, an analyst for Realtor. com, said the rate decline is a result of the Supreme Court’s ruling opposing the Trump administration’s use of emergency price authority.

US HOME PRICES ARE RIDING, BUT THESE FAST-GROWING MARKETS ARE NOW AVAILABLE.

Visiting HERE WILL Getting FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO.

According to Xu,” This constitutional tug-of-war has triggered a flight to safety among investors, helping loan rates settle about 6 %,” raising bond rates higher and provides lower. More encouraging financial data is required to build a steady trend, but as this week’s decline is due to market volatility rather than fundamental economic data.

This post was originally published here

Despite mortgage rates just dipping below the 6% mark, American homebuyers aren’t retreating just yet.

While high mortgage rates have historically chilled demand, the latest data reveals a defiant consumer base: new home sales remain higher than year-ago levels, and a massive surge in refinancing suggests homeowners are pouncing on any slight dip in borrowing costs.

Recent data from the Census Bureau reveals that while new home sales dipped slightly by 1.7% in December, the market remains surprisingly resilient, with annual sales outpacing 2024 levels by nearly 4%. 

The Mortgage Bankers Association additionally reported Wednesday that refinance applications are 150% higher than the same week last year, and up 4% from the previous week, potentially signaling that homeowners who bought at 7% or 8% are racing to lower their monthly overhead.

TRUMP PLEDGES TO MAKE HOUSING AFFORDABLE WHILE KEEPING VALUES UP

“The growth in mortgage demand reflects the gradual erosion of the lock-in effect, which began in early 2022 with the Fed [pivoting] to higher interest rates. Rising inventory in many markets has brought more choices to consumers and slowed home price growth,” StreetMatrix real estate analyst Jonathan Miller told Fox News Digital.

“While many potential homebuyers are still hoping for mortgage rates to fall sharply,” he continued, “there is a growing recognition that they won’t return to the rock-bottom levels coming out of the pandemic and that home prices are only getting higher.”

It’s a potential sign that buyers are still acclimating to a new normal of borrowing costs, even as the median price tag for a new build jumped to $414,400 last month.

“The existing home market… remains constrained by the lock-in effect, with many owners unwilling to trade a 3% mortgage for a 6% one,” Palm Beach-based RWB Construction Management’s Robert Burrage chimed in. “So while both markets are supply-limited, new construction has been more agile in stimulating demand.”

Housing supply currently sits at 7.6 months. Anything over six months typically cues a buyer’s market, giving shoppers more leverage to negotiate for concessions.

“Because we build exclusively for end users, not as a spec developer, our pipeline looks very different from what you see in the national new home sales data,” Burrage noted.

“When a custom home starts, it’s typically tied to a committed client who has already secured financing or is paying cash. That removes a lot of the speculative risk from the equation,” he expanded. “So even if new home sales tick down nationally, that doesn’t necessarily translate into excess inventory in the true custom segment. These homes aren’t sitting on the market waiting for a buyer, they’re being delivered to one.”

“The opportunity cost isn’t just about the rate, it’s about price trajectory and competition. Buyers and sellers get the same memo when rates are falling. The perception of improved affordability for buyers with lower rates are offset with sellers believing that can get a higher price because buyers have more financial strength to purchase. If we learned anything during the housing boom five years ago, [it’s] that lower rates push housing prices higher,” Miller added.

StreetMatrix’s analyst also noted that beneath the national surface, Florida is seeing a 2.7% year-over-year price cooling as national averages remain resilient. That decline could be tied to high insurance and maintenance costs.

“Across the Sun Belt, states like Florida are experiencing a housing market reset after a prolonged period of price growth, and inbound migration is waning. Expect a period of more modest sales and price growth going forward,” Miller said.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

On the national level, Miller advises keeping a close eye on U.S. jobs and wage numbers throughout 2026.

“We’ve been in a rapid housing growth period where affordability remains strained, but distressed sales remain limited so far,” he said. “Thankfully, mortgage lenders didn’t lose their minds like they did during the great financial crisis. If jobs and wages hold, the market is more likely to grind sideways than correct.”

READ MORE FROM FOX BUSINESS

This post was originally published here

building project is anticipated to be finished in 2031, the firm stated. Beginning in the spring of this year, structure is anticipated to begin.The new American Express bμilding, which coveɾs neaɾly two milliσn square feet and çovers 55 floors, will ƀe able to accommodate uρ to 10,000 employees in pliable, contemporary workspaces that eȵcourage collaboration and creatįvity. Mσre ƫhan an acre of outside space, numerous tȩrraces and gardens, anḑ panoɾamic views oƒ thȩ Manhattan skyline ωill be present, according to a declaration from the company.<a href="https://www.foxbusiness.com/politics

yc-residents-say-mamdani-reneging-affordable-housing-promise-proposed-property-tax-hike” target=”_blank” rel=”noopener”>MAMDANI RENEGING ON AFFORDABLE HOUSING PROMISE WITH PROPOSED PROPERTY Revenue HIKE SAYS RESIDENTS OF NEW YORK.

The business was the only person who would own and live in the construction, according to the company.

New York City Mayor Zohran Mamdani and New Yorƙ Governor Zohɾan Mamdani ƀoth gave comments ƫo thȩ business. Kathy Hochul makes the news. Both leaders made use of coalition positions. &nbsp,

HOCHUL DEMANDS$ 13. 5B REFUND FOR NEW YORKERS AFTER SUPREME COURT DRIVES DOWN TRUMP TARIFFS

The implementation of the World Trade Center’s last business building is a testament to the respect of the workforce and the power of federation labor, Mamdani said.

” This prσject represents thousands oƒ good, union tasks that heIp our communities anḑ support people. ” When we make investɱents in New Yσrk, ωe must maƙe sure that the money goes to the working people who absolutely buįld thiȿ ciƫy. That is how we both grow our horizon and our business at once, he continued in the declaration. He put working New Yorkers first.

REAL ESTATE EXPERTS BLAST MAMDANI’S MATH-DEFYING TAX PLAN, WARN OF HIGHER Prices AND Journey, AND Fire MAMDANI’S

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO.

Hochul predicted that” Building 2 World Trade Center will take another recognizable building to Lower Manhattan, create dozens of well-paying union work, and give billions of dollars in financial benefits to New Yorkers. Bless you to American Express for showing more of your responsibility to New York and to the Port Authority partnership for closing this package.

This post was originally published here

EXCLUSIVE: The seasonal Florida resident is becoming a thing of the past. High-net-worth individuals are now moving entire corporate infrastructures to West Palm Beach, necessitating a new tier of ultra-prime real estate that functions as a year-round primary residence.

“People actually want to live and move to West Palm Beach, especially in this sort of area due to favorable business and maybe political conditions. And we love it,” Great Gulf President of High-Rise Development Neil Vohrah told Fox News Digital.

“It’s not just about the billionaires themselves, but more importantly, it’s about the businesses that they bring, the companies they bring, the people they inspire and the opportunities that they create,” Cervera Real Estate principal and managing partner Alicia Cervera Lamadrid also told Fox News Digital.

“There’s a lot of wealth coming to this area,” she added. “And, of course, it has to be accommodated.”

‘THIS PLACE WILL WIN’: BUSINESS LEADERS SAY WEST PALM BEACH IS BECOMING AMERICA’S NEXT BIG BOOMTOWN

On Thursday, the real estate juggernauts announced they’re launching the Mandarin Oriental Residences in West Palm Beach — the brand’s first standalone residential property in South Florida. Located on North Flagler Drive in the growing “Billionaire Corridor,” the building will eventually stand 31 stories and house 87 residences with all the familiar luxury a Mandarin Oriental property might offer.

The project unveiling comes on the heels of other major brands declaring their entry into the South Florida market, including Mr. C Residences in Boca Raton, Ritz-Carlton Residences in Fort Lauderdale Beach, Delano Residences Miami and Kempinski Residences in Miami Design District.

Catering to a “Wall Street South” demographic, the Mandarin prioritizes extreme privacy, resort-style amenities and includes space for in-home staff and executive offices. Residences range from 2,100 to 6,300 square feet, and feature two- to four-bedroom layouts.

The biggest draw, according to the development and sales leads, could be that the building is just steps away from the booming business-centric downtown.

“This is not found anywhere else in the West Palm Beach area,” Vohrah said. “North End was once a quiet and largely overlooked part of the city, but it now is emerging as the city’s next defining waterfront neighborhood. West Palm Beach is also rapidly evolving into an international luxury hub, driven by wealth and migration, companies relocating, major investments in lifestyle and medical districts, and new luxury brands entering the market.”

These investments are massive in scale: Vanderbilt University is moving forward with a $300 million campus downtown that is projected to generate more than $7 billion in economic impact. Directly adjacent to the new “Billionaire Corridor,” Tenet Healthcare recently announced a $3 billion replacement for the Good Samaritan Medical Center, a brand-new campus designed to cater to the longevity and wellness needs of the C-suite crowd.

A.I. GIANT PALANTIR MOVES ITS HEADQUARTERS TO FLORIDA AS TECH COMPANY EXODUS CONTINUES

“Both Ken Griffin and Steve Ross have come together to promote that corridor between Palm Beach, West Palm Beach and Miami-Dade County as the place where they’re recruiting companies and talent to support the quote-unquote billionaire structure,” Cervera said, referencing the ongoing “Ambition Accelerated” campaign.

“So what’s happening in West Palm Beach is simply a natural evolution to accommodate the needs and requirements and lifestyles of these billionaires, millionaires that are moving into the area,” she explained.

The demand for West Palm’s waterfront remains largely insulated from rising interest rates and a cooling national housing market, reportedly due to extreme scarcity and a global buyer profile.

“The West Palm Beach market is not slowing down,” Vohrah said. “The North Flagler corridor is largely insulated from national housing trends because… at this level… that combination of irreplaceable waterfront, limited supply and proximity to everything the city offers is what’s continuing to sustain this demand.”

“When you see the office towers that are full and the prices that people are paying to be in those office towers… all of this synergy that’s being created around there is a long-term play. These are not short-term investments,” Cervera noted. “They have seen that the tipping point is now, and there’s still great opportunity to get in because it’s still early in that cycle, but it is clear that this is something that no one is stopping.”

The “Billionaire Corridor” demographic is increasingly trading sprawling, high-maintenance mansions for vertical “residences in the sky,” as Cervera calls them, just like what’s offered at the Mandarin West Palm.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“Time is the only thing that you can’t buy, give away, barter, etc. It is finite, we’re all aware of it. And when you buy into a Mandarin Oriental experience, you are saving time. Why are you saving time? Because all of those [lifestyle amenities] are brought into your home.”

“West Palm Beach is different because the boom has been coming for a while,” Vohrah pointed out. “The city and developers have been building up the area for years and now, as more people are migrating to West Palm, the infrastructure and attractive quality is already there. So I think this tower will be recognized as one of the pioneers in this boom era that has taken off post-COVID.”

READ MORE FROM FOX BUSINESS

This post was originally published here

British luxury automaker Aston Martin said on Wednesday that it will cut up to 20% of its workforce as tariff and regulatory headwinds along with a challenging market backdrop weigh on the business.

The company said the cuts will result in an annualized savings of about 40 million pounds ($54 million), most of which will occur this year. The company employs about 3,000 workers.

Aston Martin didn’t specify when the cuts would occur this year, and they include the 5% workforce reduction the company announced last year.

The company also announced that it would trim its five-year capital spending plan to 1.7 billion pounds from 2 billion pounds by delaying investment in electric vehicle technology.

JANUARY LAYOFFS ROSE TO THE HIGHEST LEVEL FOR THE MONTH SINCE 2009

Best known as the car brand driven by James Bond, the company has struggled to generate cash and manage its debt of 1.38 billion pounds.

Aston Martin has received injections of capital from Canadian billionaire and Chairman Lawrence Stroll and through deals.

UPS TO CUT 30,000 MORE JOBS AMID TURNAROUND PLAN

The company said U.S. tariffs had been “extremely disruptive” and demand had also been “extremely subdued” in China, the world’s biggest auto market.

Aston Martin said it expected further cash outflows in 2026, but also predicted “material improvement” in its financial performance.

It has a target for gross margins in the high 30% range and adjusted earnings before interest and taxes near breakeven, helped by around 500 deliveries of its new Valhalla hybrid supercar.

AMAZON TO CUT 16,000 ROLES AS IT LOOKS TO INVEST IN AI, REMOVE ‘BUREAUCRACY’

The company made an operating loss of 259.2 million pounds in 2025.

As part of its efforts to improve its finances, it struck a 50-million-pound deal to sell the perpetual branding rights to its Formula One team last week.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Reuters contributed to this report.

This post was originally published here

JPMorgan Chase CEO Jamie Dimon issued a warning that some of the conditions in financial markets are reminding him of the years leading up to the 2008 financial crisis.

“Unfortunately, we did see this in ’05, ’06, ’07, almost the same thing,” Dimon said Monday in remarks at JPMorgan Chase’s annual investor day. “The rising tide was lifting all boats, everyone was making a lot of money, people leveraging to the hilt. The sky was the limit.”

“I think today, the rising tide is lifting all boats. My own view is people are getting a little comfortable that this is real – these high asset prices and high volumes and that we don’t have any kind of problem whatsoever,” he added.

“I don’t know how long it’s going to be great for everybody. I see a couple of people doing some dumb things. They’re just doing dumb things to create [net interest income],” Dimon added without referencing any specific institutions, while noting that JPMorgan Chase is being “quite cautious” and that the firms will “stick to our own rules.”

TRUMP SUES JPMORGAN CHASE AND CEO JAMIE DIMON FOR $5B OVER ALLEGED ‘POLITICAL’ DEBANKING

He went on to say that the biggest competitors to the nation’s largest bank are back, including rivals from Europe and Japan. He said that’s “good for the world” but cautioned that “I just don’t know how long it’s going to be great for everybody.”

Dimon said that there is “always a surprise in a credit cycle” and that certain sectors may appear more stable than they actually are in the lead up to the emergence of a crisis.

“This time around, it might be software, because of AI,” Dimon said. “There’s moving tectonic plates underneath it, it causes the industry to be challenged.”

JAMIE DIMON WARNS FEDERAL RESERVE SUBPOENA ‘NOT A GOOD IDEA’

“There will be a cycle one day. I don’t know what confluence of events will cause that cycle. My anxiety is high over it. I’m not assuaged by the fact that asset prices are high. In fact, I think that adds to the risk,” he said.

Last fall, Dimon issued a similar warning about credit markets as JPMorgan Chase took a $170 million write-off following the bankruptcy of subprime auto lender and dealership Tricolor.

JAMIE DIMON WARNS OF ‘COCKROACHES’ IN US ECONOMY AS CREDIT CONCERNS GROW

He also noted that the bankruptcy of auto parts maker First Brands suggested there could be some credit problems looming in the economy.

“When you see one cockroach, there are probably more, and so everyone should be forewarned of this one,” Dimon said at the time. “First Brands, I’d put in the same category, and there are a couple of other ones out that I’ve seen put in similar categories. We always look at these things, and we’re not omnipotent – we make mistakes too.”

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“We’ve had a credit bull market now for the better part of since 2010,” he added. “These are early signs there might be some excess out there because of it. If we ever have a downturn, you’re going to see quite a few more credit issues.”

This post was originally published here

The Food and Drug Administration announced Tuesday a recall of bags of certain dog treats over concerns about potential salmonella contamination.

Elite Treats, based in Florida, issued a recall of a single lot of 6-ounce bags of Elite Treats Chicken Chips for Dogs, according to the FDA.

The recalled bags have lot number 24045 and an expiration date of April 2027.

The dog treats were sold to Florida Hardware, which distributed the items to feed stores in Alabama, Florida, Georgia, North Carolina and South Carolina.

RECALL ISSUED FOR MORE THAN 12K ADULT BED RAILS OVER ENTRAPMENT, ‘RISK OF DEATH’

The contamination was discovered after testing performed by a third-party laboratory identified contamination in a related yet commercially unreleased lot of the same product, the FDA said.

No illnesses have been reported thus far from the treats.

The FDA said salmonella can cause illness in pets eating the products.

Pets with salmonella infections may be lethargic and have diarrhea or bloody diarrhea, fever and vomiting, and some pets may have a lower appetite and abdominal pain, the agency said. Pet owners should contact a veterinarian if their animal has eaten the recalled product and has these symptoms or if they are concerned that the pet may be infected.

MORE THAN 191,000 AROEVE AIR PURIFIERS RECALLED OVER OVERHEATING, FIRE RISK

The agency said pets can be infected without showing symptoms because infected pets, even if they do not show symptoms, can act as carriers and transfer salmonella through their feces and saliva into the home and to people and other pets in the household.

People can also become exposed through multiple ways, the FDA said, including handling the contaminated products, contact with pets who have eaten the product or contact with surfaces that have touched contaminated food, such as bowls, utensils or countertops.

The risk of human illness from salmonella-contaminated pet food rises if people do not thoroughly wash their hands after handling the food or having contact with their petor by not thoroughly cleaning contaminated surfaces, the FDA warned.

Salmonella can cause serious and sometimes deadly infections in people, according to the agency. Healthy people infected with salmonella should monitor themselves for symptoms, which can include nausea, vomiting, diarrhea or bloody diarrhea, abdominal cramping and fever. In rare incidents, salmonella can lead to more serious issues, such as arterial infections, endocarditis, arthritis, muscle pain, eye irritation and urinary tract symptoms.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Young people, the elderly and people with weak immune systems are more vulnerable to infection, the FDA said. People who have symptoms after coming into contact with the recalled product or a pet that has eaten the product are urged to contact their healthcare providers.

Consumers are urged to stop using the recalled treats. They are told to dispose of the product in a way that children, pets and wildlife cannot access it.

“Wash and sanitize pet food bowls, cups and storage containers,” the FDA’s recall alert said. “Always ensure you wash and sanitize your hands after handling recalled food or any utensils and surfaces that come in contact with recalled food.”

Customers may contact Elite Treats for information about how to request a refund.

This post was originally published here

Consumer confidence ticked higher in February as American households’ expectations for the labor market improved.

The Conference Board’s consumer confidence index rose 2.2 points to 91.2 in February from an upwardly revised 89 in January. The January data was initially reported as 84.5, the lowest level since May 2014.

Economists polled by LSEG estimated the February reading for the index would come in at 87.

FED’S FAVORED INFLATION GAUGE SHOWED CONSUMER PRICE GROWTH REMAINED ELEVATED IN DECEMBER

“Confidence ticked up in February after falling in January, as consumers’ pessimistic expectations for the future eased somewhat,” said Dana M. Peterson, chief economist at The Conference Board. 

“Four of five components of the Index firmed. Nonetheless, the measure remained well below the four-year peak achieved in November 2024,” Peterson added.

The Conference Board’s present situation index declined overall, with views of current business conditions dipping to 0.7%. 

Perceptions of employment conditions improved slightly, with the labor market differential, the share of consumers saying jobs are “plentiful” minus the share saying they’re “hard to get,” increasing by 0.6 percentage points to 7.4%.

All three components of the Conference Board’s expectations index increased slightly, with expectations for business and labor market conditions six months from now less negative than they were previously, while expectations for incomes were more positive.

US ECONOMY GREW SLOWER THAN EXPECTED IN FOURTH QUARTER

Younger consumers were the most optimistic among age groups, with their confidence ticking upward on a six-month moving average basis in February among those under the age of 35. Confidence edged lower among those age 35 and older.

While consumer confidence rose among Generation Z respondents, in line with the findings among those under 35, it declined across older generations included in the report.

Consumer confidence based on political affiliation rose among Republican and Independent voters in February after a decline in January, while Democrats were less optimistic than a month ago.

US ECONOMY ADDED 130K JOBS IN JANUARY, DELAYED REPORT SHOWS

“Consumers’ write-in responses on factors affecting the economy continued to skew toward pessimism,” Peterson said. “Comments about prices, inflation and the cost of goods remained at the top of consumer’s minds.

“Mentions of trade and politics also increased in February. Labor market mentions eased a bit in February, while observations about immigration eased somewhat.”

Consumers’ views of their family’s current financial situation declined after surging unexpectedly in January in the final data, though expectations about their family’s future financial situation continued to be less optimistic.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Plans to purchase big-ticket items in the next six months rose in February, with the share of respondents who replied “yes” and “maybe” increasing and the share of those saying “no” declining. Used cars, furniture, TVs and smartphones were the most popular items within their categories for future purchases.

This post was originally published here

A company that makes self-defense products has spent the last few years moving much of its manufacturing to the U.S. and is finding the benefits extend beyond having the ability to put a “Made in America” label on their products.

Byrna Technologies, which makes non-lethal personal security devices that can launch plastic or chemical irritant rounds, moved its main manufacturing facility from South Africa to Indiana in 2021 and began finding qualified U.S. component suppliers to prevent supply chain disruptions like what transpired during the pandemic.

“There are over 100 components that go into our launchers, we wanted redundancy on all of them,” Byrna Technologies CEO Bryan Ganz told FOX Business. “Generally, the offshore manufacturers were a little bit less expensive, so they got the majority of the production.”

“But when it was evident that Donald Trump was going to be elected president, we said, ‘You know what, he’s been very, very vocal about tariffs, this is probably a good time for us to start the process of moving the supply chain back on-shore,'” Ganz said.

BYRNA TECHNOLOGIES CEO ‘PLEASED’ WITH TRUMP TARIFFS HITTING CHINESE RIVALS

“We started this even before the tariffs were announced. When the tariffs were announced, we were feeling pretty smart about ourselves that we had correctly surmised that we would be able to on-shore things,” he added.

Ganz said that while the process of onshoring more of Byrna’s supply chain before the Trump administration’s tariffs were implemented last year, the tariffs made domestic production more cost-effective and the onshoring process revealed other benefits.

“It was very interesting because not only was it much cheaper with the imposition of the tariffs to be producing in the U.S., but we also discovered all sorts of soft cost benefits,” he said.

“When you’re supplying componentry from offshore, you either have air freight costs, you have lengthy ocean voyages – when you’re supplying it from a hundred miles away by truck, you can be much more responsive to changes in consumer demand. If I need to visit the factory because there’s a quality problem, I can do it.”

HOW SHOULD BUSINESSES APPROACH TARIFF REFUNDS?

He added that while Byrna continues to buy some of its accessories from offshore suppliers, the company has focused its onshoring effort on the most critical aspects of its product, such as the launcher itself and its ammunition.

“We’re making self-defense products and I think the quality of the product, the dependability of the product, is really important to our consumers, so the Made in America moniker is very, very meaningful for our type of product,” he explained.

Ganz noted that Byrna closed its ammunition manufacturing facility in South Africa and moved it to a newly built facility in Fort Wayne that’s five miles away from the company’s facility where its launchers are produced.

FORMER INTEL CEO WARNS US CHIP COMEBACK STILL HAS A LONG WAY TO GO

The company’s latest launcher, the Byrna CL, was made of 34% U.S. components prior to the reshoring effort, but the launcher is now made with 92% U.S. components.

“It’s not without some cost. We’ve seen a couple percentage points increase in our cost as a result of bringing it back to the U.S., because of course, we would have been making it in the U.S. to begin with if it was the same price,” Ganz said. “But our margins have remained within two percentage points – last year we were 62% and this year we were 60.5-61% – so it was a de minimis impact on the cost.”

Ganz added that the tariffs were a determining factor in some of its reshoring decisions due to the higher cost of the import levies.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“When we ship something up, even though it may have been 10% less expensive than building it here, not so when you put a 30% tariff on. I’m a very patriotic guy, I like making stuff here in America. On the other hand, we’re a public company, we have shareholders – we have to look at what’s in the best interest of our shareholders,” he said. “With the tariffs, it was clear that it became less expensive to build in the U.S. than to build offshore.”

Ganz added that Byrna maintains some component manufacturing abroad to keep redundancy in the supply chain to guard against vulnerabilities that would arise if a domestic facility were to go offline unexpectedly, but the onshoring push has brought the company’s overall supply chain into the 80%-90% range for domestically-sourced components.

This post was originally published here

A major reprieve from Florida’s property taxes may be coming much sooner than residents, lawmakers and real estate experts previously thought.

Last week, the state’s House advanced an amended HJR 203 bill that would effectively turn off the tax switch for homesteaded properties starting Jan. 1, 2027.

“Florida’s success has been built on smart fiscal policy, economic opportunity and a very clear identity. Major tax reform should strengthen those pillars, not complicate them,” OneWorld Properties President and CEO Peggy Olin told Fox News Digital.

“From where I sit,” she continued, “working with buyers across the country and around the world, confidence in the state’s long-term stability matters just as much as any short-term savings. If Florida can deliver meaningful relief while maintaining strong infrastructure and services, it will continue to lead. And based on what I’ve seen over the past 25 years, when Florida gets the balance right, growth follows.”

FLORIDA CHAMBER C.E.O. SAYS HIGH-TAX STATES ARE IN A ‘DEATH SPIRAL’ AS $4M-AN-HOUR WEALTH MIGRATION ACCELERATES

Backed by Gov. Ron DeSantis, the bill — originally proposed in October — works toward the state’s long-discussed “zero tax” goal. The language of HJR 203 explains how homesteaded properties would stop paying city and county property taxes entirely but could still pay roughly 35% to 50% of their total bill in school taxes. So even though property tax bills won’t go to zero, they could be cut in half or more.

The newly passed amendment removed a 10-year phased-in plan and instead offers a fast-track timeline for homeowners to see maximum savings in their first tax bill of 2027 if 60% of voters approve it on the 2026 midterm ballot.

“I’m generally supportive of thoughtful tax relief, as it’s part of what has made Florida such a powerful growth story over the past decade,” Olin argued. “Homestead protections are core to the state’s identity, and giving full-time residents breathing room is always appealing.”

“Infrastructure, public safety and services don’t disappear just because a revenue line does. The intention is strong to protect homeowners, but the execution has to be disciplined,” she expanded. “Florida’s competitive edge isn’t just low taxes; it’s quality of life. We have to preserve both.”

State economists have warned that the plan could dig a $14.8 billion hole annually for local governments, and critics worry that if cities lose billions in tax revenue, police officers or fire stations could lose staff.

However, a provision in the bill offers a public safety guarantee that cities would be legally required to fund police departments at 2024-2025 funding levels even if they have no money coming in from homeowners.

“Cities are very creative when it comes to revenue. A gap of that size rarely goes unaddressed,” Olin reacted. “In reality, if funding disappears in one area, it often reappears somewhere else, whether through fees, assessments, utilities or broader consumption taxes. So the question becomes whether homeowners see true net relief or simply a restructuring of costs.”

Olin also responded to whether eliminating taxes will cause home prices to spike if buyers can afford larger mortgages, and whether there is a risk that this tax cut actually makes it harder for the next generation of Floridians to buy a home.

“Real estate markets are efficient. If buyers suddenly have more purchasing power, prices can adjust, especially in supply-constrained areas like South Florida. But in my experience, property values here are driven far more by migration trends, global capital and limited inventory than by a single tax adjustment,” she said.

“Buyers aren’t moving to Florida solely because of property taxes. They’re coming for lifestyle, economic opportunity and overall tax predictability. That said, affordability at the entry level is already delicate. If relief simply gets absorbed into higher prices, first-time buyers could feel pressure,” Olin pointed out, “which means the larger conversation isn’t just tax policy. It’s supply, smart development and creating attainable housing options.”

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

When it comes to who might benefit most from HJR 203, Olin offered a bullish outlook for high-net-worth, luxury Florida homeowners and impactful change for median buyers.

“In pure dollar terms, higher-value homeowners see larger savings because property taxes scale with property value. However, the emotional impact may be greatest for retirees and middle-class families on stable or fixed incomes. For someone who purchased years ago and has seen their assessed value climb, relief can feel meaningful — even if it’s not the largest dollar amount in the market.”

READ MORE FROM FOX BUSINESS

This post was originally published here

Behind Florida’s fine sand beaches and bright green palm trees, a roaring and thriving economy isn’t just running on sunshine; it’s a direct result of a “secret sauce” that combines aggressive private-sector growth with a stark fiscal contrast to the policies of high-tax, Democratic-led states.

While hubs like New York and California descend into what Florida Chamber of Commerce President and CEO Mark Wilson calls a “death spiral,” the Sunshine State is officially open for business as a global superpower. With more than $4 million in wealth flowing across its borders every single hour, Florida has leapfrogged Spain to become the 15th-largest economy in the world — and Wilson says the state is just getting started.

“Part of the secret sauce in Florida is that we’re all on the same page,” Wilson told Fox News Digital. “The business community, our elected leaders, we understand that economic growth — growing the private sector and shrinking the public sector — that’s good for everyone in Florida. So we have 23.5 million people here, and we want to create economic opportunity and good jobs for everyone who wants to be in Florida.”

“I always say, if Florida was a stock, I’d be investing everything I had in it. It’s because of our economic diversification strategy and our focus on growing business and growing jobs,” he continued.

A.I. GIANT PALANTIR MOVES ITS HEADQUARTERS TO FLORIDA AS TECH COMPANY EXODUS CONTINUES

Wilson provided the most current statistics around Florida’s population and wealth migration, which began in the early post-pandemic period. The number of new residents moving to the state every day has decreased from a peak of 1,000 to between 500 and 600 people, while the amount of income has remained the same at just over $4 million, “24 hours a day, nights, weekends, holidays included.”

The Chamber’s 2030 blueprint aims to raise Florida’s economy to a top-10 spot by that landmark year, and Wilson remained confident in the state’s ability to accomplish that goal, noting the state is reportedly close to surpassing Australia for 14th place.

“Florida leads the nation by a country mile [in income migration],” Wilson said. “States like New York, Illinois, and California are losing over 1 million dollars an hour of income. And so, if you look at the death spiral that New York is right now, for example, New Yorkers are looking at increasing income taxes, they’re looking at increasing property taxes. Of course, Florida doesn’t have an income tax.”

“The big economics lesson in America right now is Florida’s tax revenue’s up… our tax rates have gone down. But people are relocating to Florida, they’re moving their businesses here, they’re investing in our communities… that’s actually driving additional tax revenue,” he added.

Specific failures of these high-tax states go beyond the economics, as Wilson also responded to numerous reports in the new year that many prominent California billionaires and business leaders — Larry Page, Sergey Brin, Mark Zuckerberg and others — have moved to Florida, and critics of wealthy movers.

“A lot of people ask us, what’s the secret to Florida’s success? And at the Florida Chamber, we believe that no one else is responsible for Florida’s success except for Florida,” Wilson noted. “We have to look at everything from kindergarten readiness to, how do we cut childhood poverty in half? How do we make sure we have the best education system in the nation, the best legal climate, tax climate, regulatory climate, and the best quality of life of anywhere on the continent? And that’s exactly what Florida’s done.”

MARK ZUCKERBERG BECOMES LATEST CALIFORNIA BILLIONAIRE TO RELOCATE TO FLORIDA AMID TAX CONCERNS

“People of all incomes, of all different backgrounds are relocating to Florida to work, to retire, to learn, to take advantage of our education system… Florida is literally a land of opportunity where everyone can succeed. We’re so grateful to have all of these billionaires moving into Florida because they bring their businesses with them, they invest in communities,” he explained.

“These billionaires believe that Florida can do this, and they want to be here to take advantage of the innovation, the creativity, the resiliency, the growth opportunity that we have here in Florida. And states like California, Illinois, New York, New Jersey — they’re literally killing innovation. They’re literally putting a lid on these types of opportunities that really make America as good as it is.”

Wilson also touted fiscal sanity, running the state truly like a business, staying within budget while utilizing the synergy between Florida’s public and private sectors.

“New York’s been in the news a lot lately. Florida has more people than the state of New York, but New York’s state budget is twice the state budget of Florida,” the CEO detailed, “and so as they look to raise property taxes and income taxes in New York, we look to cut them.”

“Something that doesn’t get a lot of notoriety is Florida has the lowest debt per capita of any state in America. Not just compared to the big states of any state in America. It’s only about $1,000 per resident. We literally pay cash for things. And when Florida does borrow money, we’re paying lower interest rates than almost any other state in the country.”

Looking ahead to 2030, Wilson says it’s easy to imagine what success looks like in Florida aside from the rising GDP and income migration.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“We found out that even though we were creating about one out of every 10 jobs in America, we have over 700,000 children living in poverty,” he said. “What we discovered is, over half of our kids in poverty live in just 15% – or 150 – of our ZIP codes. So by making the schools in those ZIP codes the best schools in Florida… that’s the kind of economic development that’s going to grow communities.”

“We cannot become the 10th largest economy in the world if we don’t have our kids reading at grade level and if we don’t cut childhood poverty in half. So it all is part of one big puzzle and there’s no silver bullet… and I think it’s why Florida is the example of where the rest of the country can go.”

READ MORE FROM FOX BUSINESS

This post was originally published here

The Supreme Court ruling that struck down the Trump administration’s tariffs imposed under an economic emergency declaration could open the door to billions of dollars in tariff refunds for businesses, though the ruling didn’t specify a process for handling those refunds.

The Supreme Court ruled that President Donald Trump’s tariffs enacted under the International Economic Emergency Powers Act (IEEPA) were illegal because the underlying law doesn’t authorize the president to impose tariffs.

Striking down the tariffs sends the issue back to the lower courts, which could weigh in on the refund process. However, businesses are already able to file “post-summary corrections” with Customs and Border Protection (CBP), which collects tariffs for the Department of Homeland Security that are remitted to the Treasury Department, while the U.S. Court of International Trade (CIT) has authority over appeals.

Mike Snarr, partner at BakerHostetler and co-leader of the firm’s International Trade team, told FOX Business, “Although today’s Supreme Court opinion did not address the refund issue directly, in most cases, companies should pursue refunds through the U.S. Customs and Border Protection’s administrative processes.

WILL REFUNDS BE ISSUED AFTER SUPREME COURT RULING ON TRUMP TARIFFS?

“For entries made within the last 10 months, importers may ask customs brokers to correct the customs declarations for refunds of recently paid IEEPA tariffs. For older entries, importers should file protests within the statutory deadlines,” Snarr added. 

“If protests are denied, importers should seek judicial review in the U.S. Court of International Trade seeking reliquidation. The CIT has expressly confirmed it has the authority to liquidate under these circumstances.”

The process of submitting and evaluating appeals for tariff refunds could prove challenging for businesses as well as the entities handling the claims and appeals due to the sheer volume of IEEPA tariffs collected from a multitude of firms since they were imposed last year.

Estimates for the amount of tariffs collected under IEEPA that are subject to possible refunds top $150 billion. The nonpartisan Tax Foundation put the figure at about $150 billion, while the Penn-Wharton Budget Model’s estimate was $175 billion. An analysis by JPMorgan suggested a range of $150 billion to $200 billion.

SUPREME COURT DEALS BLOW TO TRUMP’S TRADE AGENDA IN LANDMARK TARIFF CASE

Chris Desmond, a partner in PwC’s Customs and International Trade practice, said, “Beyond the legal implications, the real challenge now is operational,” adding companies will need to “rapidly model which IEEPA tariffs may be refundable and quantify their opportunity because any refund process is likely to be highly congested.

“Customs brokers will be under significant strain, with limited capacity to manage a surge of post-summary corrections and protests across thousands of importers,” he said. “Even where tariff refunds may be available, many companies will face internal capacity constraints. Customs and trade compliance teams are already stretched managing day-to-day filings, enforcement activity and ongoing tariff changes.”

Desmond said that, given the demands of undergoing detailed entry reviews, coordination with brokers and tight procedural deadlines, companies that “underestimate this workload risk timing delays to their financials while creating potential compliance issues if they request refunds on the wrong tariff lines.”

Tim Brightbill, co-chair of Wiley International Trade Practice Group, noted that “more than 1,000 lawsuits have already been filed at the U.S. Court of International Trade in an effort to secure tariff refunds in the event of a Supreme Court decision against the IEEPA tariffs.”

Ryan Majerus, a trade lawyer and partner at King & Spalding, said, “A lot of how refunds will play out will depend on what the lower courts and customs do next. There’s a good chance importers will need to take the initiative to file formal documents, including protests, to seek refunds from Customs – and if those are denied, go to the courts for relief. It’s also possible that Customs will issue guidance next week on how to approach this.”

KEVIN HASSETT SAYS FED ECONOMISTS SHOULD BE ‘DISCIPLINED’ OVER TARIFF STUDY

Trump said at a press conference Friday that the Supreme Court’s ruling was “deeply disappointing” and criticized the high court for not addressing tariff refunds in the decision.

“I guess it has to get litigated for the next two years. So, they write this terrible defective decision, totally defective. It’s almost like not written by smart people. And what do they do, they don’t even talk about that,” Trump said.

Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent discussed potential tariff refunds in an interview with Reuters last month.

“It won’t be a problem if we have to do it, but I can tell you that if it happens — which I don’t think it’s going to — it’s just a corporate boondoggle,” Bessent said. “Costco, who’s suing the U.S. government, are they going to give the money back to their clients?”

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Bessent added that the process for issuing tariff refunds could take a significant amount of time, saying, “We’re not talking about the money all goes out in a day. Probably over weeks, months, may take over a year, right?”

This post was originally published here

The  Å signiƒicant portion of the Trump administration’s taxes weɾe rulȩd ouƫ by Supreme Coưrt on Friday because the justices determined that they were impσsed unlawfully μnder an emergency finαncial powers legislation.

The Court upheld President Donald Trump’s use of the International Emergency Economic Powers Act ( IEEPA ) with a 6-3 decision that found it unlawful because the law “does not authorize the President to impose tariffs. ” The circumstances – Learning Resources Inc. v. Trump and Trump v. Ѵ. 0. Ș. Selections – wȩre brought by α pair σf small companies, oȵe of whįch made education toys and the other of which imported wine anḑ ȿpirits from a family-owned coɱpany.

The majority judgment, which did not address the problem of  , was writtȩn by Chief Ɉustice John Roberts. payments under the T. Ɽ. One of the three separatists, fairness Brett Kavanaugh, noted in his protest that the issue of distributing tax refunds was said to be “likely to be a “mess. ” “

Evȩn tⱨough ȿome manufacturers may have already passed on cⱨarges tσ customeɾs σr others, the Unįted States may be required to deposit billions of dollars ƫo manufacturers who ρaid the IEEPA tariffs, according to Kavanaugh. ” Payments oƒ billions of dollars may haⱱe significant repercussions for tⱨe U. Ș. Ș. Treasury. The Court doesn’t say anything now about whether or not the government should return the billions of dollars it has received from buyers, and if so, how. “

In a situation involving a landmark tax, SUPREME COURT DEALS ARE BLOWN TO TRUMP’S TRADE AGENDA

Importers who paid IEEPA tariffs may file legal claims in order to do those refunds, even though the Court’s ruling doesn’t directly state a procedure for refunds and the Trump presidency hasn’t specified how it will handle refunds.

That might be reflected in statements made via the U. Ș. Ș.   Through the Department of Homeland Security’s Customs and Border Protection, which collects taxes and duties for the Department of Homeland Security and sends them to the Treasury Department, via the Court of International Trade or through pertains to that agency. Buyers usually have 180 times after products are “liquidated” to file a protest and demand refunds from CBP, which could affect how much of importers are qualified to receive refunds.

Given ECONOMISTS If BE” DISCIPLINED” OVER TARIFF STUDY, SAYS Kevin HASSETT.

According to the non-partisan Penn-Wharton Budget Model, the IEEPA tariffs ‘ reversal will result in up to$ 175 billion in refunds.

More than$ 160 billion of&nbsp was estimated by a comparable research conducted by the democratic Tax Foundation. Up until February, taxes were being collected without authorization under IEEPA. 20 of this year. It stated that” If the IEEPA taxes are fully refunded to U. Ș. Ș. manufacturers, it would essentially eliminate almost three-fourths of the new income from President Trump’s taxes. The Ư. Ș. Ș. state should make the process as straightforward and transparent as possible for buyers to get their payments. “

Trumρ claimed αt α press conference that ƫhe decision was “deeply upsetting” and that he is “ashamed of sσme Court people” for” not having ƫhe courage to ḑo what’s right fσr ouɾ land. ” ”  

Thȩ president continued to condemn the Supɾeme Court for never addressing tax refunḑs iȵ thȩ selection, stated that the situation may be resolved iȵ court, aȵd deçlined to specify whether the administration woμld gįve refunds.

I suppose it needs to be litigated for the next two decades. So they write this awful, completely flawed choice. It almost seems like it wasn’t written by intelligent individuals. And what they do, Trump said, “doesn’t also discuss that. “

BATTLEGROUND STATES USE THE BURDEN OF TRUMP’S Levies AS MIDTERM MESSAGING RAMPS UP

Treasury Secretary  In a January interview with Reuters, Scott Bessent stated,” It won’t be a problem if we have to do it, but I can tell you that if it happens ,– which I don’t believe it’s going to – it’s merely a business rogue. Costco, wⱨo is suing the U. Ș. Ș. state, will they be able to return the funds to their customers? “

We’re never talking aboưt the ɱoney gσing out įn a day, saįd Bessent, addinǥ that the procedure for issuing ƫax refunds may take a long time. Over the course of wȩeks or monƫhs, it ɱight take more than a year, corrȩct? “

In a conversation with the Dallas Economic Club on Friday, Boschent stated in relation to the government’s plans to impose alternative tariffs using other authorities, saying that” Treasury’s estimates show that the use of Segment 122 power, combined with potentially improved Part 232 and Section 301 tariffs, will result in virtually unchanged tax revenue in 2026. “

The Supreme Court’s decision, according to Tim Brightbill, co-chair of Wiley International Trade Practice Group,” could lead to the compensation of hundreds of billions of dollars in  tax revenue – Therefore, it is cruciαl to ƙnow wⱨether and how a payment procedure wiIl operate. ”  

” More than 1,000 claims have already been filed at the U. Ș. Ș. In an effort to obtain tax refunds in the event of a Supreme Court decision against the IEEPA tariffs, the Court of International Trade, noted Brightbill.

The Taxpayers Protection Alliance’s research director David McGarry stated that the decision “does not make clear how this money will be returned to its rightful proprietors,” but litigation is already being pursued by numerous improperly tarnished companies. ”  

The Trump administration nσw has the authority tσ ensure that this procedure continues αt the loweȿt possible cosƫ to American firms, accσrding ƫo the Sưpreme Court’s decision. particularly smaller companies. Doubt is a hindrance to socioeconomic development. Companies should be assured that the money they were made to give to the government will soon be returned, McGarry continued.

TARIFFS MAY HAVE BEEN COSTING US ECONOMY THOUSANDS OF JOBS MONTHLY, FED ANALYSIS Detects, AND Taxes

Herbert Å. Cato Institute’s Scott Lincicome, vice chairman of basic economics. According to the Stiefel Center for Trade Policy Studies, the federal government must deposit the tens of billions of dollars in traditions duties that it unlawfully collected from American companies under an’IEEPA tariff authority ‘ it never really had. “

That refund procedure might be simple, but it seems more probable that more papers and dispute will be involved. a particularly cruel burden on smaller importers because they lack the resources to file tariff refund claims without ever doing anything wrong,” Lincicome continued.

US BUSINESSES SELF OUT OF CHINA ARE ATTENTIONED BY TRUMP TARIFFS

Joseph Maher, a partner of Nike Peabody, was the&nbsp’s principal deputy public counsel. The Department of Homeland Security stated that” there will be further prosecution in the Court of International Trade to determine the treatments available for taxes currently paid,” adding that” U. Ș. will be the largest country in the world. ” S. Manufacturers should be watchful to keep track of their interests when making payments as required over the past season. “

Although he noted” we didn’t know the full amount or timing of any such rebates,” JPMorgan Chief Economist Michael Feroli noted that tax rebates could pose an inside threat to the market. ”  

We believe the amount at stake would be between$ 150 and$ 200 billion, despite the dated official CBP data. The increase in activity may bȩ impσrtant iƒ consumers were to receive the suƀsidies. The increase to activity may be smaller because the estimated fiscal multiplier from windfall transfers to businesses are typically very small, Feroli wrote. In the more possible event that businesses keep the cash, it would be lower.

Clicking HERE WILL GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO.

Smaller businesses may struggle tσ recover funds from the Uniƫed Statȩs, according to Heaƫher Lonǥ, chief economist at Navy Fedeɾal Credit Union. Ș. Treasury,” and added that it is “likely the White House may fight against issuing payments at all. ” “

This post was originally published here

/a

According to the U. Ș. Bureau of Labor Statistics, more than 5, 000 fatal workplace injuriȩs weɾe reporƫed in the United States in 2024, witⱨ truck owners anḑ building tradeȿpeople mαking up the majority.

In the Uȵited States, there weɾe 5, 070 dangerous ωork accidents in 2024, a decrease of 4. 0 percent from 5, 283 in 2023, according to the BLS’s report on Thursday.

In 2024, according to the information, there were 1, 018 deadly occupational injuries involving motor vehicle drivers, of which a staggering 798 were caused by heavy and tractor-trailer truck drivers.

MIKE ROWE SURVEIES AI WILL HIT WHITE-COLLAR Staff ARE HARDY FOR NOW. WELDERS ARE SAFE FOR NOW.

According to the commission,” Presidential incidents involving motorized area cars increased 19. 0 percent to 369 in 2024 from 310 in 2023,” while walking incidents involving motorized area cars increased by 8. 5 percent to 1, 146 in 2024 from 1, 252 in 2023.

Accσrding ƫo ƫhe review, ƫhere were 239 fatal injuries among workers in grounds preservation in 2024, compared ƫo 788 fatal injuries among those in thȩ cσnstruction trade.

Homicides and suicides accounted for 470 and 263 of the entire fatal occupational injuries figure in 2024, both.

PERIODICALLY, THESE ARE THE TOP 10 JOBS IN THE US FOR 2026.

410 addictions were linked to drug and alcohol. &nbsp,

” Total decreαse in fatal injuries in 2024 was lαrgely driven bყ a 16. 2 % decrease in fatalities caused by exposure to dangerous substances or environments ( to 687 cases from 820 cases ). This lower was iȵ tuɾn fueled by α reduction iȵ drug or alcohol overdoses, which αccounted for 59. 7 % of mortality in this group, dropping from 512 mortality in 2023 to 410, according to BLS.

Only 53 fatal occupational injuries were reported among bush, conservation, aȵd logging workerȿ in 2024, and σnly 24 aɱong thosȩ who work in fishing and hunƫing, according ƫo tⱨe data. &nbsp,

STUDY SHOWS: THE TYPICAL AMERICAN WORKER EXCELS$ 955 SAVED FOR RETIREMENT.

Rabbit NEWS APPLICATIONS ARE HERE CLICK HERE.

However, according to the BLS, for every 100, 000 full-time similar workers, there were more fatal work accidents per 100, 000 staff. For instance, logging workers were 110. 4 per 100, 000 workers, and fishing and hunting workers were 88. 8 per 100, 000 in 2024. Among roofers, that figure is 48. 7 per 100, 000 workers.

This post was originally published here

The U.S. economy grew at a much slower than expected pace in the fourth quarter, according to new data released on Wednesday.

The Commerce Department’s Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) released its advance estimate for fourth quarter gross domestic product (GDP), which found the U.S. economy grew at an annual rate of 1.4% in the fourth quarter, which runs from October through December.

Economists surveyed by LSEG had expected the economy to grow at a 3% rate in the quarter. The fourth quarter’s 1.4% growth was slower than the 4.4% GDP growth recorded in the third quarter.

Taken together with the 0.6% GDP contraction in the first quarter of 2025 and the 3.8% increase in second quarter GDP, the U.S. economy grew at an annual rate of 2.25% in 2025. That figure is subject to change as the BEA will release two revisions to the fourth-quarter GDP figure released today as more data comes in.

FED’S FAVORED INFLATION GAUGE SHOWED CONSUMER PRICE GROWTH REMAINED ELEVATED IN DECEMBER

The BEA noted that the rise in consumer spending and investment boosted real GDP in the fourth quarter, but those gains were partly offset by decreases in government spending on exports. Imports also declined in the quarter.

The report noted that real final sales to private domestic purchasers – which is the sum of consumer spending and gross private fixed investment – rose 2.4% in the fourth quarter, down from an increase of 2.9% in the third quarter.

KEVIN HASSETT SAYS FED ECONOMISTS SHOULD BE ‘DISCIPLINED’ OVER TARIFF STUDY

The release of the report was delayed by the partial government shutdown that ran from October until mid-November, which also affected the GDP data because of its impact on the federal government’s spending.

BEA is unable to quantify the full effects of the shutdown, though it did estimate that the reduction in labor services by federal employees reduced fourth-quarter GDP by about 1 percentage point.

FED DISSENT GROWS AS SOME OFFICIALS WEIGH RETURN TO INTEREST RATE HIKES AMID STUBBORN INFLATION

EY-Parthenon chief economist Gregory Daco wrote in a note that the “disappointing end to the year largely reflected a self-inflicted drag from the longest government shutdown in U.S. history.”

“Buyers beware: strong aggregate GDP growth may be masking underlying fragilities. Economic momentum rests on a relatively narrow foundation of three ‘A’ pillars – affluent consumers, AI-driven investment, and asset price appreciation,” Daco added.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“Government spending was a notable drag, largely due to the longest government shutdown in history, which should reverse in the current quarter,” said Angelo Kourkafas, senior global strategist for investment strategy at Edward Jones. 

“For full-year 2025, U.S. GDP still posted a solid 2.2% increase, and expectations point to a modest acceleration this year supported by tax refunds and strong business investment, including heavy AI-related spending,” Kourkafas added. “Despite the dovish read from the weaker end to 2025, lingering inflation pressures are likely to keep the Fed on the sidelines for a while longer.”

This post was originally published here

The Federal Reserve’s preferred inflation gauge remained elevated in December as price pressures continued to pose a challenge for consumers.

The Commerce Department on Friday reported that the personal consumption expenditures (PCE) index rose 0.4% in December on a monthly basis and is up 2.9% from a year ago. Those figures were both slightly hotter than the estimate of LSEG economists, who predicted 0.3% and 2.8%, respectively.

Core PCE, which excludes volatile measurements of food and energy prices, was up 0.4% on a monthly basis and rose 3% year over year. Both figures were hotter than the expectations of economists polled by LSEG, who estimated the gauges would rise 0.3% and 2.9%, respectively.

Federal Reserve policymakers are focusing on the PCE headline figure as they try to bring inflation back to their long-run target of 2%, though they view core data as a better indicator of inflation.

FED DISSENT GROWS AS SOME OFFICIALS WEIGH RETURN TO INTEREST RATE HIKES AMID STUBBORN INFLATION

Headline PCE has trended up to 2.9% after readings of 2.8% in November and 2.7% in October. Core PCE readings were 2.8% or 2.9% dating back to May before it reached 3% in December.

Prices for goods were up 1.7% in December on an annual basis, up from 1.5% in November. Goods price growth was even lower last summer, when the index posted annual gains of 0.6% in June and July and a 0.9% gain in August.

Durable goods prices jumped 2.1% year over year in December after readings were close to 1% dating back to June. Nondurable goods rose 1.6% on an annual basis in December, slightly lower than the 1.7% reading in November.

KEVIN HASSETT SAYS FED ECNOOMISTS SHOULD BE ‘DISCIPLINED’ OVER TARIFF STUDY

Services prices were up 3.4% from a year ago in December, a level that’s been unchanged since September.

The personal savings rate as a percentage of disposable personal income was 3.6% in December, down from readings of 3.7% in October and November. That continues a steady decline from last May’s 4.9% reading.

“PCE inflation ticking up is a reminder that Fed officials won’t just be watching the labor market in 2026,” said Heather Long, chief economist at Navy Federal Credit Union. 

“Core PCE inflation rose to 3%, the highest since February 2025, and headline PCE inflation hit the highest since March 2024. This will trigger more concern inside the Fed that inflation needs a closer look again,” Long added.

Gregory Daco, chief economist at EY-Parthenon, said that the PCE inflation data shows that the economy’s foundation of consumer spending is “becoming increasingly stretched.”

“Consumer activity is being propelled by affluent households while middle- and lower-income consumers are heavily relying on savings and borrowing to make ends meet. While the OBBBA and larger tax refunds may provide a temporary boost, muted job and wage gains will limit spending going forward,” Daco said, adding that inflation is likely to remain near 3% in the first half of the year.

US ECONOMY GREW SLOWER THAN EXPECTED IN FOURTH QUARTER

Chris Zacarelli, chief investment officer at Northlight Asset Management, said that his firm thinks that the “Fed will continue to support the labor market with 3 or more rate cuts this year and will be patient as the inflation numbers come down (albeit at a slow pace) and although the AI debate will rage on, the stock market should eventually hit all-time highs again as the economy remains resilient and the central bank continues to be accommodative.”

The hotter-than-expected December PCE inflation reading reduced the likelihood that the Federal Reserve will cut interest rates when it meets next month.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

The CME FedWatch tool shows a 96% probability that the Fed will leave rates unchanged, up from 90.8% a week ago and 78% a month ago.

This post was originally published here

o, US companies move away from China.

According to a fresh examination, payments made by U. Ș. -based midsize companies to Chinese companies significantly decreased last year as Chinese import tariffs increased.

Large companies ‘ payments to China decreased by about 20 % between 2024 and 2025, according to a report from the JPMorgan Chase Institute, despite the stability of global payments as a whole.

According to the Ƥenn Wharton Budgeƫ Model, the overall effectiⱱe rate, whįch stood at 37. 4 % in October 2025, and the uncertainty surrounding policy, which was frequent as tariff announcements changed over the course of the year, with some accelerating to as high as 125 % before any subsequent reductions, makes this” not surprising,” the Institute wrote.

SEC CHAIRMAN RESPONSIBILITY REQUIRES CHINA-LINKED RAMP AND DUMP ACTIVITY.

When examining a sample of midsize companies with at least$ 5, 000 in outflows to China in both 2023 and 2024, the report found that among large companies with prior&nbsp, flows to other parts of Asia, including Southeast Asia, Japan, and India. &nbsp,

Import substitution might be one σf the causes of the increases iȵ traveIs to ƫhese naƫions, ƀut there are many diƒferent possible theories, the authors said. &nbsp,

It is still unclear whether Chinese products are shipped to countries in the region, modified or processed ( this is crucial ), and then sent to the United States on a large scale, according to Clark Packard, a research fellow at the Herbert A. Stiefel Center for Trade Policy Studies at the Cato Institute. Having said that, there are some indications that it is possible occurring.

Packard claimed that as long as the goods are altered in the next state, they won’t qualify as transshipment, a term used to describe trade practices that aim to&nbsp, bypass tariffs and other trade regulations.

” Tranȿshipment refers to sȩnding a solưtion ƫo one country, sɱearing its nature brand there, and then sending it to α third coưntry without making sįgnificant changes to the item. ” As Iong as a product undergoes significant transformation or modificaƫion in a state, iƫ is still authentically α product maḑe there, Packard saiḑ. &nbsp,

” It wouldn’t surprise me if Chinese companies are opening digesting centers in Vietnam and other Asian nations to complete products that are inevitably bound for the United States,” according to the statement. Ƭhis is αs a result of a lowȩr tariff oȵ that nation than China.

FED ANALYSIS Shows THAT TARIFFS MAY HAVE COST US ECONOMY THOUSANDS OF JOBS MONTHLY

Trade flows from&nbsp, Vietnam, and Taiwan as potential sources of alert products, according to Derek Scissors, a senior fellow who studies the Chinese economy at the American Enterprise Institute.

Rising goods from Taiwan and particularly Vietnam reflect this trend. You may argue that Taiwanese products are Chinese goods ‘ companies, and they lost because of the tariffs on China, Scissors told FOX Business. However, theɾe is significant Foreign investment iȵ Vietnam įn the sector of consumer prσducts that we purchase ƒrom Vietnam.

It’s quite straightforward to reroute these as Chinese if you are a Japanese producer in China and encountering higher barriers to goods produced there. It might just need a logo. You can change the creation process at most to make there a final stop in Taiwan as opposed to China. Finally, Taiwanese is what you ship.

Given ECONOMISTS If BE” DISCIPLINED” OVER TARIFF STUDY, KEVIN HASSETT SAYS.

According to the JPMorgan Chase Institute’s record, regular tariff payments made by small, mid-sized U. Ș. businesses have even tripled since early 2025.

Midsize firms ‘ outflows increased from nearly$ 100 billion per month in the first two years of the year to roughly$ 300 billion per month at the end of 2025.

A strong increase starting in April 2025, which coincided with the start of the first tariff rate increases that year, interrupted a stable trend. Full payments remained steady throughout 2025 until, according to the JPMorgan Chase Institute, they finally reached a stage of roughly three times what they had been up until early 2025.

Visiting HERE WILL Find FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO.

This post was originally published here

The Trump administration is stepping up its push to reinvigorate the U.S. coal industry as it pursues its goal of boosting energy security.

Last week, the Department of Energy announced it would provide $175 million in funding for projects to modernize, retrofit and extend the useful life of six coal-fired power plants that serve rural and remote communities. 

The agency said the move is intended to keep dependable sources of energy online, while also strengthening the reliability of the electric grid and keeping electricity costs low for American households and businesses.

The funding came from a previously announced $525 million plan to extend the life of coal plants and increase efficiency because the administration views modernizing existing plants as a fast and cost-effective way to provide reliable power while preserving high-wage energy jobs.

COAL PLANTS STEP UP AS HISTORIC WINTER STORM PUSHES US POWER GRID TO THE BRINK

“For years, previous administrations targeted America’s coal industry and the workers who power our country, forcing the premature closure of reliable power plants and driving up electricity costs,” said Energy Secretary Chris Wright

“President Trump has ended the war on American coal and is restoring commonsense energy policy. These investments will keep America’s coal plants operating, keep costs low for Americans and ensure we have the reliable power needed to keep the lights on and power our future.”

TRUMP ADMIN CANCELS $30B IN BIDEN-ERA LOANS

The coal-fired power plants selected as part of the $175 million project include:

Electricity demand is surging amid the artificial intelligence (AI) race, and data centers that consume vast amounts of energy become a bigger drain on the grid.

TRUMP ENERGY CHIEF OUTLINES COAL’S ‘CRUCIAL’ ROLE IN AFFORDABILITY AS ADMIN PUSHES TO KEEP PLANTS RUNNING

The Trump administration’s push to boost coal as a part of the nation’s energy mix comes after years of decline as coal power plants closed. Coal’s decline came amid the rise of natural gas and renewable energy sources as energy sources.

Data from the Energy Information Administration (EIA) shows that coal’s total output for electricity generation peaked in 2007, when it was the source of 2,016 billion kilowatt-hours of electricity. 

That figure declined to 675 billion kilowatt-hours as of 2023, when coal’s share of electricity generation was 16.2%. Coal last generated over half of the nation’s electricity in the early 2000s and peaked as a proportion of the energy mix in the 1980s.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Natural gas surpassed coal as the country’s largest source of electricity in 2016, and EIA data showed natural gas generated 43.1% of the nation’s electricity in 2023.

This post was originally published here

.

Mortgage buyer Freddie Mac reported on Thursday that mortgage costs dropped this week to their lowest levels since September 2022.

The standard 30-year fixed mortgage‘s average rate dropped from last week’s checking of 6. 09 % to the latest Primary Mortgage Market Survey released on Thursday, according to Freddie Mac’s most recent Primary Mortgage Market Survey. &nbsp,

The 30-year product had α typical rate oƒ 6. 85 % a year ago.

RENT HELS ARE MORE COMFORTABLE FOR MANY AMERICAN MARKET STABILIZES, AVAILABLE FOR MANY.

” Tⱨis lower rate environment is also strengthening tⱨe monetary position oƒ people,” ȿaid Sam Khater, Freddie Mac&rsquo’s chieƒ economist. ” This lower rate environment not only improves pricing for prospective consumers, but it also helps. ” Refinance program activity has more than doubled in the past year, allowing many new buyers to reduce their monthly loan payments by thousands of dollars.

A 15-year fixed loan has a lower average price than the previous year’s reading of 5. 44 %, which is lower.

OVERWARDS NATIONAL RATE, TEXAS CAPITAL’S HOUSEHOLD GROWTH SURGES

US HOME PRICES ARE RIDING &ndash, BUT THESE FAST-GROWING MARKETS ARE NOW AFFORDABLE.

The Federal Reserve and politics αre ɉust two examρles of how mortgage rateȿ are affected bყ various aspects. Although the Fed’s interest rate choices don’t directly affect mortgage rates, they do carefully monitor the 10-year Treasury offer. As of Thursday evening, the 10-year offer was hovering around 4. 08 %.

The 10-year Treasury yield, which hit its lowest level since soon November 2025, was affected by the decline from 6. 09 % last year, softer-than-expected CPI browsing, and a generally positive jobs report, according to Realtor. com senior analyst Jake Krimmel.

Krimmel added that the upcoming spring homebuying year is being aided by the lower rates.

There is a possibility that this spring’s level will be almost a full percentage point lower than that, which would significantly increase purchasing energy, he said. ” But, the supply side is still constrained: new development in 2025 finished before 2024, and supply progress has obviously lost steam. “

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO.

Krimmel did point out that lower rates may revive opposition in the market and cause a spike in prices if the loan “lock-in effect” doesn’t go away.

This post was originally published here

White House economic advisor Kevin Hassett on Wednesday called for the New York Federal Reserve to punish economists who published a research paper that found that the bulk of the burden of the Trump administration’s tariffs are falling on U.S. businesses and consumers.

“The paper is an embarrassment. It’s, I think, the worst paper I’ve ever seen in the history of the Federal Reserve system,” Hassett said in an interview on CNBC’s “Squawk Box.”

“The people associated with this paper should presumably be disciplined, because what they’ve done is they’ve put out a conclusion which has created a lot of news that’s highly partisan based on analysis that wouldn’t be accepted in a first-semester econ class,” Hassett continued.

The New York Fed’s research found that U.S. businesses and consumers bore 86% of the tariff burden, while foreign exports bore 14% of the burden as of November 2025. The researchers found that the share borne by U.S. businesses and consumers declined over the year from 94% in the January through August period, and 92% in September and October.

FED DISSENT GROWS AS SOME OFFICIALS WEIGH RETURN TO INTEREST RATE HIKES AMID STUBBORN INFLATION

They also found that the average tariff rate jumped last year as the Trump administration raised the import levies, rising from 2.6% at the beginning of 2025 to 13% at the end of the year. The report found that the average tariff rate peaked at around 16% in April and May, following the president’s announcement of his “Liberation Day” tariffs.

“Our results show that the bulk of the tariff incidence continues to fall on U.S. firms and consumers,” the New York Fed wrote, noting that its findings were consistent with a pair of recent studies on U.S. tariff pass-through showing American importers absorbing nearly all the cost.

TARIFFS MAY HAVE COST US ECONOMY THOUSANDS OF JOBS MONTHLY, FED ANALYSIS REVEALS

Those findings are also similar to those contained in another analysis by the nonpartisan Congressional Budget Office (CBO), which noted in its recently released 10-year budget and economic outlook that foreign exporters are absorbing about 5% of the tariff costs with the remaining 95% falling on U.S. firms and consumers. 

The CBO found that U.S. businesses would pass on about 70% of their tariff costs to consumers, with the remaining 30% coming out of their profit margins. After accounting for domestic producers raising prices because of reduced foreign competition, the “net effect of tariffs is to raise U.S. consumer prices by the full portion of the cost of the tariffs borne domestically (95 percent),” the CBO found.

CBO’s analysis also projected that the new tariffs imposed over the last year will have increased the personal consumption expenditures (PCE) index by about 0.8 percentage points on aggregate by the end of 2026. PCE inflation is the Fed’s preferred inflation gauge and was most recently at 2.8% in November, well above the Fed’s 2% target.

TRUMP CREDITS TARIFFS FOR HUNDREDS OF BILLIONS GAINED WITH ‘VIRTUALLY NO INFLATION,’ TOUTS SECURITY

Hassett went on to defend the Trump administration’s tariffs during the CNBC interview, saying that American consumers are better off for them, while saying the New York Fed’s analysis was an “embarrassment.”

“Prices have gone down. Inflation is down over time. Import prices dropped a lot in the first half of the year, that leveled off, and real wages were up $1,400 on average last year, which means that consumers were made better off by the tariffs,” Hassett said on CNBC. 

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“So consumers couldn’t have been made better off by the tariffs, if this New York Fed analysis was correct. It’s really just an embarrassment,” Hassett said.

This post was originally published here

Federal Reserve policymakers were mostly in agreement on the decision to leave interest rates unchanged despite two calling for cuts, though several signaled that rate hikes could be on deck if inflation remains elevated.

The minutes for the January meeting of the Federal Open Market Committee (FOMC), the Fed’s monetary policy-setting panel, were released on Wednesday and showed that some policymakers were in favor of including language signaling the possibility of future rate hikes to tame stubborn inflation in the announcement.

The FOMC voted 10-2 to leave the benchmark federal funds rate at its current range of 3.5% to 3.75%, with Fed Governors Christopher Waller and Stephen Miran dissenting over concerns about the labor market. Inflation has remained elevated above the Fed’s 2% target, which has given others pause about further rate cuts.

“Several participants indicated that they would have supported a two-sided description of the Committee’s future interest rate decisions, reflecting the possibility that upward adjustments to the target range for the federal funds rate could be appropriate if inflation remains at above-target levels,” the FOMC minutes noted.

POWELL SAYS AMERICANS FORCED TO ‘ECONOMIZE’ AS STUBBORN INFLATION SQUEEZES HOUSEHOLD BUDGETS

The minutes also noted several policymakers “commented that further downward adjustments to the target range for the federal funds rate would likely be appropriate if inflation were to decline in line with their expectations.”

“Some participants commented that it would likely be appropriate to hold the policy rate steady for some time as the Committee carefully assesses incoming data, and a number of these participants judged that additional policy easing may not be warranted until there was clear indication that the progress of disinflation was firmly back on track,” the minutes said.

FED HOLDS INTEREST RATES STEADY, PAUSING RATE CUTS AMID ECONOMIC UNCERTAINTY

The Fed’s preferred inflation gauge, the personal consumption expenditures (PCE) index, was elevated well above the central bank’s 2% long-run inflation target at the end of last year.

PCE inflation was at its lowest year-over-year level in 2025 when it declined to 2.2% in April, which was the lowest reading since September 2024. Core PCE, which excludes volatile food and energy prices, was 2.6% in April 2025, the lowest level since June 2024.

FED’S MIRAN MAINTAINS CALL FOR AGGRESSIVE INTEREST RATE CUTS THIS YEAR

The Trump administration’s tariff announcements on “Liberation Day” in early April and the implementation of those import taxes contributed to a rise in inflation last year, which drove PCE higher.

The most recent PCE inflation reading was for the month of November, when it reached 2.8%, equaling its September reading, which was the highest level since October 2023. Core PCE was also 2.8% in November.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Fed Chair Jerome Powell said at his January press conference following the FOMC decision that core PCE inflation would be running “just a bit above 2%” if not for the effects of tariffs on goods prices.

This post was originally published here

Renters are expected to see some relief from rising prices this year, with the pace of rent growth expected to slow as the market stabilizes and a measure of affordability hits a four-year-high.

An analysis by Zillow projects that multifamily rental prices are expected to remain relatively flat through the end of 2026, declining slightly by 0.2%. 

Single-family rents are expected to rise at an annual rate of 1.1% in December 2026, which the report says would represent a “sharp slowdown from the rapid increases of recent years” as higher vacancy rates and more newly-built apartments help keep rent growth subdued as renters’ bargaining positions improve. Single family rents were up 2.7% last month from a year ago.

Zillow found that the typical asking rent in January was $1,895, up just 0.1% from December and 2% year over year. That represents the slowest annual rent growth since December 2020, as the market has steadied after prices saw rapid increases during the pandemic.

TEXAS CAPITAL’S HOUSEHOLD GROWTH SURGES, FAR OUTPACING NATIONAL RATE

Rents for multifamily homes have grown at an even slower pace, rising just 1.4% from a year ago. Zillow’s projection that multifamily rents will decline slightly and remain essentially flat this year, indicates that further relief could be on the way.

Slowing rent growth has boosted an affordability measure that takes into account renters’ income levels. A median income household would now spend 24.3% of its income on typical apartment rent, which is down slightly from 25% in February 2020.

By another measure, the typical household is spending 26.4% of its income on rent, which is the lowest share since August 2021. 

US HOME PRICES ARE RISING – BUT THESE FAST-GROWING MARKETS REMAIN AFFORDABLE

Metro areas where that figure is significantly higher than the national average include Miami (37.2%), New York City (36.9%) and Los Angeles (34%). 

Notable metros with better affordability include St. Louis (19.7%), Minneapolis (19.4%), Denver (19.4%), Austin (17.9%) and Salt Lake City (17.9%).

“Renters are operating in a very different environment than they were just a few years ago,” said Orphe Dviounguy, senior economist at Zillow. “When supply expands and vacancies rise, property managers have to adjust on both price and terms. Concessions are near record highs, keeping rent growth modest and creating meaningful opportunities for renters.”

HOUSING MARKET COOLS AS PRICE GROWTH HITS SLOWEST PACE SINCE GREAT RECESSION RECOVERY

Zillow also noted that renters are getting more concessions in lease terms as they utilize their negotiating leverage in renewals and new leases.

It found that nearly 40% of rental listings on the Zillow platform in January had at least one concession, like a free month of rent or a reduced deposit. 

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

That’s slightly below the record high set last January, when 41.1% of listings had a concession, and the figure remains elevated compared to historical norms.

This post was originally published here

A federal judge has dismissed a lawsuit challenging Buffalo Wild Wings’ (BWW) use of the term “boneless wings,” rejecting a customer’s claim that the name misled him into thinking the dish was made from actual chicken wings with the bones removed.

In a lighthearted opinion packed with poultry puns, U.S. District Judge John Tharp Jr. said the plaintiff’s complaint had “no meat on its bones” and failed to show that reasonable consumers are deceived by the name.

The judge likened “boneless wings” to other familiar food nicknames, citing a recent Ohio Supreme Court ruling that noted diners don’t expect “chicken fingers” to be made of fingers.

The lawsuit, filed by Aimen Halim, argued that BWW’s boneless wings are essentially chicken nuggets made from breast meat and that the name is fraudulent because it suggests deboned wing meat.

2026 SUPER BOWL FOOD DEALS: WHERE TO FIND THE BEST GAME-DAY SAVINGS

Halim brought the suit against BWW alleging violations of the Illinois Consumer Fraud Act, breach of express warranty, common law fraud, and unjust enrichment.

He also sought to bring a nationwide class action, claiming that had he known what he was eating, he would have paid less or not bought the product at all.

CHICKEN WING CHAMPS FOR SUPER BOWL: AMERICANS TO SET CONSUMPTION RECORD DURING SUNDAY’S GAME

However, the court concluded that the phrase “boneless wing” is a “fanciful name” and that no reasonable consumer would believe they truly were deboned chicken wings “reconstituted into some sort of Franken-wing.”

“Despite his best efforts, Halim did not ‘drum’ up enough factual allegations to state a claim,” Judge Tharp wrote in his 10-page ruling.

FOOD PYRAMID BACKLASH: LOW-FAT ERA MAY HAVE FUELED OBESITY, DIABETES, SAYS DOCTOR

While he found Halim had standing to sue because he alleged economic harm, he dismissed the claims for failing to plausibly allege deception.

He gave Halim until March 20 to file an amended complaint, though he signaled skepticism that any “additional facts” could be provided to salvage the claim.

This post was originally published here

Tesla will avoid a 30-day suspension of its dealer and manufacturer licenses in California after complying with a state order to stop using the term “autopilot” when marketing its vehicles, state regulators said Tuesday.

The decision comes after the California Department of Motor Vehicles (DMV) found in December 2025 that Tesla violated state law by misleadingly marketing its electric vehicles with the terms “autopilot” and “full self-driving.”

The regulator said Tuesday that Elon Musk’s electric vehicle company took “corrective action” and had stopped using the term “autopilot,” and noted that Tesla already modified its use of the term “full self-driving” by clarifying that driver supervision is required.

CHINA MOVES TO BAN FEATURE COMMONLY SEEN ON TESLA VEHICLES OVER FEAR OF TRAPPED PASSENGERS

“The DMV is committed to safety throughout all California’s roadways and communities,” California DMV Director Steve Gordon said in a statement. “The department is pleased that Tesla took the required action to remain in compliance with the State of California’s consumer protections.”

According to the DMV, Tesla’s Advanced Driver Assistance System (ADAS) marketing materials beginning in 2021 used the terms “autopilot” and “full self-driving capability,” along with the phrase, “The system is designed to be able to conduct short and long-distance trips with no action required by the person in the driver’s seat.”

However, the DMV said the vehicles “could not at the time of those advertisements, and cannot now, operate as autonomous vehicles.”

The DMV filed accusations against Tesla’s manufacturer and dealer licenses in November 2023, and the automaker Tesla discontinued use of the term “full self-driving capability” after noting that the system required driver supervision.

TESLA ENDS PRODUCTION OF MODEL S AND MODEL X VEHICLES, WILL FOCUS ON ROBOTS IN 2026

Last year, the California Office of Administrative Hearings held a hearing before an administrative law judge, who issued a proposed decision in November finding that the term “autopilot” violated state law.

The DMV had given Tesla 60 days to take corrective action. By complying, Tesla avoided a temporary suspension in California — its largest U.S. market.

According to its website, Tesla’s “autopilot” feature allows vehicles to match the speed of traffic and assists with steering within a marked lane.

The “full self-driving (supervision)” feature alerts drivers of stop signs and traffic lights, and can slow the vehicle to a stop while approaching the signal, all with driver supervision.

FOX Business reached out to Tesla for comment.

This post was originally published here

The Austin, Texas, region has seen its population grow rapidly over the last decade, with new data showing it added households at about four-times the pace of the nation as a whole.

Data from the National Association of Realtors showed that the metropolitan area encompassing Austin, Round Rock and San Marcos saw the number of households grow roughly 51% from 2014 to 2024.

The Austin region gained 357,000 households from 2014 to 2024, which brought the number of households in the region from 703,976 to 1,061,155 in that time. Over that same period, the number of households in the U.S. as a whole grew at a rate of about 13%.

NAR’s analysis found that household growth in the Austin metro area was driven across younger and older age groups.

ABBOTT UNVEILS 5-POINT PLAN TO OVERHAUL TEXAS PROPERTY TAXES, TARGETING RELIEF FOR HOMEOWNERS

The data showed that the share of households in Austin, Round Rock and San Marcos led by those under the age of 25 grew from 5.1% to 5.9% from 2014 to 2024. Among those between the ages of 25 and 34, the proportion rose from 21.1% to 21.7%.

“Households headed by people in their late 20s and 30s grew significantly,” wrote NAR senior economist and director of real estate research Nadia Evangelou. “Those are the classic years for household formation. That’s when people move for jobs, form families, and step into the housing market for the first time.”

She said that growth in those age groups can spur demand for rentals and starter homes, keeping entry-level housing demand very strong and competitive, while eventually boosting demand for move-up properties. 

MCMANSIONS BECOME FINANCIAL ‘LIABILITY’ AS BUYERS DITCH OVERSIZED HOMES

The youngest age cohort of those under 25 in particular played a role in driving an influx of new apartment buildings, which helped lower rental prices in the area.

Older age groups also saw their share of the Austin area household mix rise, with the share of those led by people aged 65 to 74 rising from 9.5% to 10.7% from 2014 to 2025, while those over the age of 75 rose from 5.6% to 7% in that period.

“The number of households headed by those 65 and older increased significantly over the decade, and their share of total households rose,” Evangelou said. “That tells us Austin isn’t just attracting younger workers, it’s also keeping residents as they age.” 

HOUSING MARKET COOLS AS PRICE GROWTH HITS SLOWEST PACE SINCE GREAT RECESSION RECOVERY

“That kind of growth creates steady demand for different types of housing: single-level homes, properties with less maintenance, and communities that allow people to age in place,” she explained.

With the growth in younger and older households, other age cohorts declined slightly. The share of households led by those between 35 and 44 was little changed, dipping slightly from 22.9% to 22.7%. Those between the ages of 45 and 54 fell from 19.2% to 17.7%, while the 55 to 64 age group declined from 16.6% to 14.2%.

The growth seen in Austin, Round Rock and San Marcos across different age groups helped keep demand strong for a variety of housing categories that cater to the needs of the disparate groups.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“When only one age group drives the market, demand tends to be concentrated in a single segment, demand tends to be concentrated in a single segment. But when young adults, families, and older households are all growing that the same time, housing demand becomes stronger across multiple price points and housing types,” Evangelou explained.

“Here is why: Starter homes remain in demand. Move-up homes stay competitive. Downsizing options matter more,” she added.

This post was originally published here

President Donald Trump said tax refunds this year will be substantially larger than ever before because of his signature “One Big Beautiful Bill,” which was passed last year.

Trump took to Truth Social to promote the expected refunds ahead of the 2026 filing season, arguing that some taxpayers could see more than 20% returned.

Taxpayers generally must file their 2025 federal returns by April 15, 2026, and if they file electronically with direct deposit, most refunds are issued within about three weeks after the return is processed, according to the IRS.

SCOTT BESSENT: PRESIDENT TRUMP’S ‘BIG, BEAUTIFUL BILL’ WILL UNLEASH PARALLEL PROSPERITY

“Tax Refunds this year, because of ‘THE GREAT BIG BEAUTIFUL BILL,’ are substantially greater than ever before,” Trump wrote. “In some cases, estimates are that over 20% will be returned to the Taxpayer.”

He pointed to provisions he said eliminate taxes on tips, social security benefits for seniors and overtime pay, while allowing interest deductions on car loans, among other measures.

“So, when you get your Tax Refund, think about what a wonderful President you have — NO TAX ON TIPS, NO TAX ON SOCIAL SECURITY FOR OUR GREAT SENIORS, NO TAX ON OVERTIME, INTEREST DEDUCTIONS ON CAR LOANS, AND MUCH MORE,” Trump continued. 

“Don’t spend all of this money in one place! President DJT.”

TRUMP SPEECH SPARKS OPTIMISM AS ‘GANGBUSTER’ ECONOMY FORECASTED FOR 2026

The White House has promoted the upcoming filing season as potentially the largest tax refund season in U.S. history, citing provisions in the One Big Beautiful Bill Act that affect 2025 tax returns filed in 2026.

A central goal of the bill was to extend and make permanent many tax cuts originally created under the 2017 Tax Cuts and Jobs Act, many of which were slated to expire at the end of 2025.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

The legislation also included billions for the Pentagon and border security, deep spending cuts and changes to Medicaid.

The nonpartisan Congressional Budget Office estimated the package could add roughly $3.3 trillion to the federal deficit over a decade under current law projections.

On Sunday, White House Senior Counselor for Trade and Manufacturing Peter Navarro touted what he called a “Goldilocks economy” under Trump, while promising Americans the “biggest rebate” in U.S. history.

This post was originally published here

America’s hottest housing markets aren’t in flashy coastal cities — they’re in communities across the Midwest and South.

Even as the national market cools, areas in states like Missouri and Kentucky are seeing double-digit price growth while remaining within reach for middle-income buyers.

Recent data from the National Association of Realtors (NAR) ranked the top five single-family metro areas with the highest home price appreciation last quarter.

Missouri’s Cape Girardeau held the top spot with a nearly 20% yearly increase and a $275,000 median home price, followed by Cumberland, Maryland, up 17.1% with a $174,900 median home price; Owensboro, Kentucky, up 15% with a $264,000 median home price; Anniston-Oxford, Alabama, with a 14.9% increase and $175,103 median home price; and Mobile, Alabama, which appreciated 13.7% at a median home price of $216,235.

‘WALL STREET TO Y’ALL STREET’: WHY AMERICA’S WEALTHY TRADES CITY LUXURY FOR ACRES OF TEXAS FREEDOM

The numbers signal strength in smaller, more affordable pockets of American cities and that housing opportunities remain highest outside expensive urban cores. Migration toward lower-cost regions also continues to shape market dynamics.

In contrast, the bottom five single-family metro areas that had the slowest price appreciation were Elmira, New York; Farmington, New Mexico; Boulder, Colorado; Pueblo, Colorado; and Cleveland, Tennessee, with NAR noting that some overheated markets are correcting and higher-cost Western markets show pressure.

Additionally, America’s national median home prices rose 1.2% year-over-year to $414,900, signaling market resilience despite economic headwinds, while monthly mortgage payments fell 5.7% – to $2,057 – from the previous year.

The housing market has cooled this winter with the annual pace of home price growth easing to levels unseen since the nation was recovering from the Great Recession. While some areas continue to see strong price growth, others, like Hawaii, California, Texas and Florida, have seen notable declines.

As of last week, mortgage affordability was at a four-year high after rates fell in January, with the White House touting President Donald Trump’s economic policies and maintaining his promise to “unlock” the opportunity of homeownership for American families.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

As of Tuesday afternoon, the 30-year fixed-rate mortgage averaged 6.09%, down from last week’s 6.11%, Freddie Mac reports. This time last year, the 30-year rate was at 6.87%.

“Joe Biden’s inflation crisis crushed the dream of homeownership for millions of Americans — but President Trump is bringing it back,” White House press secretary Karoline Leavitt previously told Fox News Digital. “Thanks to the President’s successful economic policies, unnecessary red tape is being cut at a historic pace, borrowing costs are easing, and income growth is outpacing home price gains — finally making housing more affordable again.”

READ MORE FROM FOX BUSINESS

FOX Business’ Eric Revell and Brooke Singman contributed to this report.

This post was originally published here

The federal government is hemorrhaging around $1 trillion per year due to fraud, Haywood Talcove, CEO of LexisNexis Special Services & LexisNexis Risk Solutions Government, said while testifying at a congressional hearing last week. 

The eyewatering figure dwarfs the Government Accountability Office’s numbers.

The GAO reports that the nation’s “federal government loses between $233 billion and $521 billion annually to fraud, according to GAO’s government-wide estimates based on data from fiscal years 2018 through 2022.”

WALZ PROPOSES $10M BUSINESS RELIEF PACKAGE AS REPUBLICANS CRY ‘NEW AVENUE FOR FRAUD’ IN MINNESOTA

During the Senate hearing, Talcove said he places “the number closer to $1 trillion dollars annually, or $115 million every single hour, of which 70% is related to transnational criminals.”

Talcove told FOX Business that he is surprised “people don’t realize how easy it is to steal from government, and taxpayers aren’t more outraged.”

He explained that he based his estimate on the GAO’s $521 billion figure.

EXCLUSIVE: SENATE BILL TARGETS MINNESOTA-STYLE ‘RUNAWAY FRAUD’ TO FORCE SCAMMERS TO REPAY TAXPAYERS

“What the GAO number didn’t include is seven other agencies, including Health and Human Services, which I think is where the greatest amount of fraud is,” Talcove noted.

While he pointed out that the $1 trillion figure is only an estimate, he said he considers the figure to be “directionally correct.”

TRUMP ADMIN UNCOVERS ‘STAGGERING’ $8.6 BILLION IN SUSPECTED CALIFORNIA SMALL BUSINESS FRAUD

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

HHS Secretary Robert F. Kennedy Jr. “released the Medicaid data,” Talcove said. “That data has never been seen in public before. And by looking at that, I suspect that trillion dollars that I provided to Congress last week was actually a little bit light,” he noted.

FOX Business’ Connor Hansen contributed to this report.

This post was originally published here

Goldman Sachs plans to remove DEI hiring standards for its board of directors, The Wall Street Journal reported Monday.

The company had removed a requirement for board diversity on companies it was taking public last year, but now plans to remove DEI language in the criteria for its own board members this month. The board’s governing committee evaluates potential candidates based on four criteria, one of which is a more traditional understanding of diversity, encapsulating viewpoints, background, work and military service.

That section also has “other demographics” tagged on to the end, referring to race, gender identity, ethnicity and sexual orientation, according to the Journal. The board now reportedly plans to remove the reference to “other demographics.”

The expected change comes after the National Legal and Policy Center (NLPC), a conservative nonprofit that owns a small stake in the bank, requested the change in September, according to the Journal.

HEGSETH ENDING MILITARY EDUCATION TIES WITH HARVARD AMID TRUMP FEUD: ‘WE TRAIN WARRIORS, NOT WOKESTERS’

Goldman Sachs struck a deal with the group under which the board would make the change of its own accord and the NLPC would not submit a formal request circulated to shareholders ahead of the company’s annual shareholder meeting later this year, people familiar with the matter told the outlet.

The change comes as part of a wider rejection of DEI policies, thanks in large part to President Donald Trump‘s return to the White House last year.

Trump moved quickly to drop the hammer on DEI, signing an executive order on day one titled “Ending Radical and Wasteful Government DEI Programs and Preferencing,” which directed federal agencies to stamp out DEI-style programs across the federal government. The following day, Trump signed a second order aimed at “restoring merit-based opportunity,” including changes for federal contracting and related compliance.

CORPORATE AMERICA HAS DECIDED THAT DEI NEEDS TO DIE

“We’ve ended the tyranny of so-called Diversity, Equity and Inclusion policies all across the entire federal government and indeed the private sector and our military. And our country will be woke no longer,” Trump said in March.

The administration has also targeted DEI initiatives at America’s elite universities, seeking new funding agreements with Columbia University, Harvard and others.

Harvard has been a main target of the Trump administration’s attempt to leverage federal funding in order to crack down on antisemitism and “woke” ideology.

In December, lawyers for the Trump administration appealed a judge’s order to restore $2.7 billion in frozen federal research funding to Harvard University.

 GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Harvard sued the administration in April over its attempt to freeze the federal funding and argued in court that the actions amounted to an unconstitutional “pressure campaign” to influence and exert control over elite academic institutions.

Fox News’ Emma Colton contributed to this report.

This post was originally published here

The Food and Drug Administration announced a recall of one brand of farm-raised Atlantic salmon over potential listeria contamination.

One lot of Wellsley Farms Farm-Raised Atlantic Salmon was recalled last week, according to the FDA. The company, Slade Gorton & Co., initiated a recall of lot 3896.

The salmon was sold in 2-lb bags at BJ’s Wholesale Club stores in Delaware, Maryland, New Jersey, New York, North Carolina, Pennsylvania and Virginia from Jan. 31 through Feb. 7.

MORE THAN 191,000 AROEVE AIR PURIFIERS RECALLED OVER OVERHEATING, FIRE RISK

The FDA said Listeria monocytogenes was discovered when the agency collected a random sample.

Slade Gorton & Co. said it is investigating how the contamination happened and that it is taking steps to prevent it from happening again.

JAGUAR LAND ROVER RECALLING 2,300 ELECTRIC VEHICLES IN US OVER FIRE RISK

Healthy people with a listeria infection may suffer short-term symptoms such as high fever, severe headache, stiffness, nausea, abdominal pain and diarrhea, the FDA said. Pregnant women could also face miscarriages and stillbirths.

The agency urged people with listeria symptoms to contact a health care provider. No illnesses have been reported thus far.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

BJ’s is alerting its members who may have purchased the recalled product.

Anyone who may have purchased the recalled product can contact the store for information on how to obtain a full refund and what to do with the remaining product.

This post was originally published here

Americans are receiving larger tax refunds on average in the 2026 filing season than last year, though taxpayers are filing at a slower pace in the first few weeks than they were a year ago.

The latest IRS tax filing data was released by the agency on Friday and showed that as of Feb. 6, the average tax refund amount paid to taxpayers was $2,290.

That represents an increase of 10.9% when compared with the average size of refunds paid at the same stage of the 2025 tax filing season, when the average refund amount was $2,065.

Over 7.4 million refunds have been issued as of Feb. 6, down 8.1% from the same time last year when nearly 8.1 million were disbursed to taxpayers.

HERE’S WHEN TAXPAYERS WILL GET THEIR REFUNDS

While the number of refunds has declined, the total amount refunded has risen 1.9% from nearly $16.7 billion to almost $17 billion, which helped boost the size of the average refund.

IRS data also showed that the average direct deposit refund rose by a similar amount when compared with this point of last year’s tax filing season, as the average direct deposit refund for the current year is $2,388 – up 10.3% from $2,165 at this time a year ago.

While refunds are rising thus far in the 2026 filing season when compared with a year ago, the number of tax returns received and processed has declined relative to last year.

TAX FILING SEASON IS OFFICIALLY HERE: WHAT YOU NEED TO KNOW

The IRS reported that it has received nearly 22.4 million returns as of Feb. 6, a decrease of 5.2% from last year when almost 23.6 million returns were received at the same stage of the filing season.

The IRS offers an online “Where’s my refund?” tool for taxpayers to check on the status of their tax refund.

The IRS website said that processing a tax refund generally takes up to 21 days for e-filed returns, whereas returns sent by mail can take six weeks or more to reach the taxpayer. Refunds may also take longer if the return is in need of corrections or additional review.

BESSENT EXPECTS TAXPAYERS WILL SEE ‘VERY LARGE’ TAX REFUNDS EARLY NEXT YEAR

Taxpayers who are preparing to file their returns should consider setting up direct deposit with the IRS if they wish to receive their refund sooner.

Taxpayers who e-file their returns can typically see their refund status within 24 hours using the “Where’s my refund?” tool, which can provide refund information for not only the current year but also the past two years.

If a taxpayer needs to amend their return after filing, it can take longer to receive their tax return. Amended returns can take up to three weeks to appear in the IRS’ system and up to 16 weeks to process.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

The IRS also offers a “Where’s my amended return?” tool for taxpayers who submitted an amended return and want to track the status of their filing and any related refund.

This post was originally published here

Gas prices have surged in California in recent weeks as the state’s supply is constrained due to recent reductions in refining capacity.

The price of gas rose 40 cents in about two weeks, with the average price of gas across the state of California at $4.58 a gallon – an increase from $4.46 the prior week and $4.18 two weeks before that, according to data from AAA.

Those figures are well above the national average of $2.92 a gallon. California’s gas prices are the highest of all states, topping $4.37 a gallon in Hawaii, $4.15 a gallon in Washington and $3.68 a gallon in Oregon.

Rising gas prices in California come amid a reduction in oil refining capacity due to the wind down of operations at Valero’s refinery in Benicia, as well as the previous closure of the Phillips 66 refinery in Los Angeles. 

GAS PRICES FALL IN JANUARY, GIVING AMERICANS A BREAK AT THE PUMP

The closure of the Benicia refinery, located in Northern California, leaves just six operating refineries in the state, which is the largest consumer of fuel among all states except for Texas.

Two others are located in the Bay Area, including Chevron’s Richmond refinery and PBF Energy’s Martinez refinery. The other four are located in Southern California – Marathon’s Los Angeles refinery, Chevron’s El Segundo refinery, PBF Energy’s Torrance refinery and Valero’s Wilmington refinery.

The tightening refining supply prompted the California state senate’s Republican caucus to write a letter to Democratic Gov. Gavin Newsom that called for a special session to address the worsening “cost and supply crisis” created by state policies targeting the oil and gas industry.

CALIFORNIA ‘TRULY AT A BREAKING POINT,’ STATE SENATOR SAYS AS REFINERIES CLOSE AND GAS PRICES SURGE

“California is truly at a breaking point. Refineries are closing, supply is diminishing, and my constituents are paying more at the pump every single day,” Republican state Sen. Suzette Martinez Valladares said in a report by FOX Business’ Jeff Flock that aired on “Mornings with Maria.”

“It isn’t theoretical, this is happening right now. And the longer we wait to address this issue, the more instability and volatility we’ll see here in California,” she added.

TRUMP CONSIDERS CAPPING STATE GAS TAX, SIGNALS POSSIBLE RELIEF FOR CALIFORNIANS

For the country as a whole, gas prices have trended down over the last year, according to the latest consumer price index (CPI) data from the Bureau of Labor Statistics.

The BLS’ January CPI inflation report showed that gas prices are down 7.5% over the last year and that prices declined 3.2% from the prior month.

Nationwide energy prices have been largely flat in the last year, with the CPI showing the energy index down 0.1%.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Declines in gas prices have been somewhat offset by rising prices for electricity and utility gas service, which are up 6.3% and 9.8% over the last year, respectively.

FOX Business’ Arabella Bennett contributed to this report.

This post was originally published here

For millionaire business owner Frederic Lepoutre, the decision to move his family from the South Florida coast to Texas Hill Country wasn’t just about a change of scenery — it was a lesson in efficiency.

While building a custom home in a place like Broward County can be a yearslong odyssey of red tape and soaring insurance premiums, Lepoutre saw his 11-acre Texas estate go from breaking ground to move-in ready in just over 12 months. 

With an initial property tax bill of just $8 on his land and insurance costs one-fifth of what he’s paid for decades in the Sunshine State, Lepoutre is part of a growing wave of high-net-worth individuals proving that, in 2026, the Lone Star State isn’t just winning on taxes — it’s winning on speed.

“I think it already has [surpassed Florida as the center of gravity],” Lepoutre told Fox News Digital. “First of all, you have the land for manufacturing. You don’t have it here in Florida… it’s a huge state… and part of West Texas now, you hear about AI factories that are building up.”

“I think it will if it hasn’t already,” Lepoutre’s wife, Lynn Lepoutre, also said.

THE ‘POISON PILL’ AND DIGITAL SECRETS FLIPPING THE SUNSHINE STATE’S CONDO POWER DYNAMIC

“Americans are voting with their feet. They want places that are livable. They want places that are workable. They want places that are sustainable and affordable,” Texas REALTORS Chair Jennifer Wauhob told Fox News Digital. “And so I think this migration, as we call it, is really turning into a long-term shift.”

Recent data from Texas REALTORS shows that one-third of new residents are coming from California, Florida, New York and Colorado, with 30% of interstate movers choosing to relocate to Dallas. Texas’ median home price currently sits at $335,000, below the national average of about $415,000.

While younger workers and families may flock to bigger cities and their suburbs, the semi-retired Lepoutres – who oversee National Textile and Apparel and invest in oil and gas – purchased their land in a remote area near Bandera and Kerrville, a few hours’ drive west of San Antonio. They had to purchase at least 10 acres per a county minimum mandate, and bought the land three years ago for $26,000 per acre.

Plans for a second home were long in the works, and Texas not only provided enough land for their project, but Lepoutre claimed the initial tax bill with agricultural exemptions was $8 per year (while the home itself awaits formal assessment) and the regulatory environment allowed for quick construction turnaround.

“It takes three years to build a house here. It took us one year from literally getting the ground ready to moving in. In Texas, it took us one year, and the only permit we needed was for the water well and the sewer system,” Lepoutre said. “It’s the opposite [of Florida]. It’s a total 180.”

“The highways, the infrastructure, they’re quick. They move fast. There’s no resting on their laurels,” Lynn said. “If they’re building a highway, it’s finished. They get it from start to finish quickly.”

“We were looking for peace, quiet, tranquility, privacy and a slower pace,” Lynn added. “When we were looking online [at homes], it’s either an older home, and we wanted to build a house together. We already pretty much knew exactly what our design would be. You couldn’t find that [anywhere].”

WALL STREET’S TEXAS MOVE GAINS STEAM AS N.Y.S.E. TEXAS HITS 100-COMPANY MILESTONE

Their new home is off-grid enough that they had to build a private 600-foot water well and switchback mountain-style driveway, which makes package delivery a “nightmare” as items are often left at the bottom and must be retrieved by four-wheel drive. Additionally, there’s a remote-specific helicopter ambulance service membership that’s offered due to their rural location.

“We wanted to be somewhere where you can look at the stars at night and not see one light. You can’t see your neighbors. The trees are still low enough where you can see out, the view from our house now is 40 miles,” Lepoutre said. “It’s very rare to see properties like this in America anymore.”

“I’ve been [in Florida] since ‘88, so I’m ready for the change, and I just like the way of life in Texas and the people in Texas, and it’s just a nice, refreshing place to be,” Lynn said. “Everything’s bigger in Texas.”

“What we’re seeing with this migration of all these people moving to our state is, it’s creating a really steady demand for housing, and that spans to all levels. We’re seeing a demand for entry-level housing, and we’re still seeing a strong demand for luxury-level housing. So it’s, right now, a really balanced, healthy market,” Wauhob noted, “and all these people coming in here, it’s just creating good things for Texas.”

“I am a native Texan, but I did spend some time moving around the country for my husband’s job. And I can say, having to live in other states, people who move here, they are very happy with how far their housing dollar goes,” she continued.

As more and more companies dual-list on the NYSE Texas, Texas is also seeing executive relocations happen in waves. Wauhob briefly discussed how REALTORS work with state economic development teams to ensure there is enough housing to meet the rising residential and corporate demands.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“We’re really trying to be proactive. We don’t wanna be trying to catch up after all these people get here. We wanna think ahead, plan ahead, and make sure that when people get there, we have infrastructure in place and we have healthy communities for them to move into,” the chair said.

“I would say this does not feel episodic to me. If you look at the data, this has been going on for several years in a row now,” Wauhob expanded. “We have a steady flow of people coming here. We’re not seeing big surges, which is a great thing because we wanna have slow, steady growth. So to me, this is something to keep an eye on. I don’t think it’s gonna go away anytime soon… people are coming, and they’re not leaving.”

READ MORE FROM FOX BUSINESS

This post was originally published here

Americans who live alone are paying a five-figure “singles tax” amid rising rents around the nation, a new analysis finds.

Data from Zillow shows that the typical apartment rent is currently $1,745 and has risen 30% over the last five years, which represents a significant burden for renters who live alone and don’t have one or more roommates to split the bill with.

The premium paid by solo renters was dubbed the “singles tax” by Zillow, which found that the national average singles tax amounts to $10,470 per year. 

“When you’re living alone, you’re covering the full rent on one income and that can add up fast,” said Emily Smith, Zillow rental trends expert. “Apartments often make living solo more attainable, while also offering shared spaces that help people feel connected.”

HOUSING MARKET COOLS AS PRICE GROWTH HITS SLOWEST PACE SINCE GREAT RECESSION RECOVERY

New York City tops the list of areas with the highest singles tax, as the Big Apple’s typical apartment rent of $3,900 a month amounts to a singles tax of $23,400 for the year.

San Jose ranked second, with a typical rent of $3,248 a month and a singles tax of $19,488 per year. Boston was close behind in third, with the typical rent in the city amounting to $3,014 a month and resulting in a singles tax of $18,084.

A pair of California cities rounded out the top five, with San Francisco in fourth based on a typical rent of $2,857 and a singles tax of $17,142, while Los Angeles ranked fifth with a typical monthly rent of $2,648 and a singles tax of $15,888.

HOMEBUYERS GAIN UPPER HAND IN 3 MAJOR CITIES AS INVENTORIES GROW

Renters who pair up their living arrangement with a partner derive what Zillow called a “couples’ discount” from being able to split up the rental bill as well as utilities and other costs.

“For renters who choose to live with a partner or roommate, splitting everyday costs like rent, utilities and groceries can go a long way in easing the pressure of today’s higher cost of living,” Smith said.

Based on the firm’s national data, the couples’ discount amounts to a combined $20,940 in annual rental savings from splitting the bill.

RICH CALIFORNIANS FLOCK TO LAS VEGAS HOUSING MARKET AS LAWMAKERS CONSIDER WEALTH TAX

For example, given the sizable singles tax in the cities with the highest rent, couples in New York City can get a discount of $46,800 instead of the singles tax of $23,400.

The report noted the couples discount can go a long way toward helping renters save for a down payment on a home, with the national average couples discount of $20,940 being more than halfway to a 10% down payment on a typical U.S. home, per Zillow’s data.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

This post was originally published here

High-net-worth Californians are increasingly setting their sights on Las Vegas as they look to reduce their tax burden and protect their finances as a proposed wealth tax looms in the Golden State. 

New data shows that by the end of 2025, more than 23% of Realtor.com listing views for Las Vegas homes came from Los Angeles, making it the leading source of out-of-market interest.

San Jose accounted for more than 8% of views, while Riverside, California, made up nearly 4%, according to Realtor.com.

“Migration from California to Las Vegas may reflect both tax considerations and the meaningful affordability gap between the two markets,” Realtor.com senior economic research analyst Hannah Jones told FOX Business in an email.

MARK ZUCKERBERG BECOMES LATEST CALIFORNIA BILLIONAIRE TO RELOCATE TO FLORIDA AMID TAX CONCERNS

That gap is substantial. Los Angeles’ typical home price topped $1 million in January, while San Jose’s median listing price was even higher at $1.1 million. 

In contrast, Las Vegas’ median listing price stood at $465,000, according to Realtor.com.

Nevada’s lack of a state income tax also remains a major draw, Jones said.

“Taxes and overall cost of living are major drivers, and Nevada’s lack of state income tax continues to be one of the most frequently cited reasons for the move,” Jones said. 

“For some clients, it’s purely financial. They can sell a $2 million to $3 million home in California and purchase a comparable or larger property in Las Vegas for less while reducing their ongoing tax burden.”

HOMEBUYERS GAIN UPPER HAND IN 3 MAJOR CITIES AS INVENTORIES GROW

The migration trend also comes as California considers a proposed wealth tax that would impose a one-time 5% tax on the net worth of residents with assets exceeding $1 billion.

The measure, backed by the Service Employees International Union–United Healthcare Workers West, would need roughly 875,000 signatures to qualify for the November ballot.

California Gov. Gavin Newsom has opposed the measure, warning it could push high earners to leave the state.

“While policy discussions like a potential wealth tax may influence timing for some high-income households, the ability to convert expensive coastal real estate into greater purchasing power in a lower-cost market is likely also a significant driver,” Jones told FOX Business. 

BILLIONAIRES FLEE CALIFORNIA ‘WITHIN SEVEN DAYS’ OVER PROPOSED WEALTH TAX: INSIDE THE MIAMI MIGRATION

“Together, these financial incentives are helping sustain cross-state housing demand.”

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Meta CEO Mark Zuckerberg and his wife, Priscilla Chan, are buying a waterfront mansion in Miami’s exclusive “Billionaire Bunker,” becoming the latest high-profile California billionaire to establish roots in Florida amid tax concerns.

FOX Business’ Kristen Altus contributed to this report.

This post was originally published here


Elon Musk on Thursday slammed Anthropic, accusing the artificial intelligence (AI) company’s models of being “misanthropic and evil.”

Musk’s comments came in response to a post on X in which Anthropic — led by CEO and co-founder Dario Amodei and best known for its Claude family of large language models — announced it had closed a $30 billion funding round at a $380 billion post-money valuation. 

In his reply, which drew at least 1 million views within hours, Musk alleged the company’s AI systems exhibit racial and demographic bias.

“Your AI hates Whites & Asians, especially Chinese, heterosexuals and men. This is misanthropic and evil,” Musk wrote. “Fix it.

NLRB DISMISSES SPACEX CASE OVER FIRED ENGINEERS, SIGNALS NO FUTURE ENFORCEMENT ACTION: REPORT

“Frankly, I don’t think there is anything you can do to escape the inevitable irony of Anthropic ending up being Misanthropic. You were doomed to this fate when you chose your name. The Name of the Wind.”

The Tesla CEO’s AI company, xAI, and its chatbot Grok compete directly with Anthropic’s Claude models.

Musk has previously been critical of Anthropic, including after reports last month that Anthropic cut off xAI’s access to Claude models, according to The Economic Times.

ELON MUSK CALLS POLICE RAID ON X OFFICES A ‘POLITICAL ATTACK’ AMID FRENCH CRIMINAL PROBE

“Not quite on programming, but it will excel in other areas. Anthropic has done something special with coding,” Musk wrote on X Jan. 15. “It was a helpful motivator that they cut us off [xAI] and not good for their karma.”

In a Jan. 30 post on X, Musk appeared to similarly mock Anthropic’s name.

“Always worth remembering that fate loves irony. The most ironic outcome for a company named [Anthropic] would be that it is the most misanthropic!”

Anthropic’s latest funding round ranks among the largest private tech fundraising rounds to date, second only to OpenAI, according to CNBC

SPACEX ACQUIRES XAI IN RECORD-SETTING DEAL VALUED AT OVER $1T

Musk is similarly engaged in an ongoing feud with OpenAI CEO Sam Altman. The two traded barbs on X last month after Musk responded to a post alleging that OpenAI’s ChatGPT had been linked to multiple deaths, Business Insider reported.

“Don’t let your loved ones use ChatGPT,” Musk wrote.

Altman pushed back, taking aim at Tesla’s Autopilot technology.

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

Musk, Altman and Anthropic could not be immediately reached by FOX Business for comment.

This post was originally published here

The “McMansion” is officially moving from a status symbol to liability.

Twenty years after the 2006 housing boom, new data from Zillow reveals a fundamental reversal in the American Dream: Buyers are ditching “wasted scale” and mahogany-heavy footprints for high-efficiency “sanctuaries.”

As insurance premiums and property taxes soar, real estate experts warn that the oversized, unoptimized estates of the mid-aughts are becoming a financial exposure for homeowners who fail to adapt.

“The appetite for space hasn’t disappeared, but the definition of value has evolved. Buyers still want room for family, entertaining and flexibility. What they don’t want is excess without purpose,” Catena Homes principal Harrison Polsky told Fox News Digital.

HOUSING MARKET COOLS AS PRICE GROWTH HITS SLOWEST PACE SINCE GREAT RECESSION RECOVERY

“With rising insurance costs in Texas and higher property taxes, a 5,000-plus-square-foot home that isn’t energy efficient or thoughtfully designed can absolutely feel like a liability. But a well-built, high-performance home of that size with strong insulation, efficient systems and functional layout still represents the American Dream here,” he added. “The shift isn’t away from scale entirely; it’s away from wasted scale.”

“In Palm Beach County, scale still has strong appeal, particularly in waterfront and estate communities. However, soaring insurance costs in Florida have changed buyer behavior,” RWB Construction Management founder Robert Burrage also told Fox News Digital.

“A 6,000 or 7,000-square-foot home built in 2006 without impact glass, elevated construction, modern roofing and generator systems can absolutely feel like financial exposure,” Burrage noted. “Buyers are willing to pay for size, but only if it’s engineered for resilience.”

Going back to 2006, luxury was granite and mahogany. In 2026, Zillow says it’s pickleball courts and golf simulators (with listing mentions up 25%) to whole-home batteries (up 40%) and zero-energy-ready homes (up 70%).

“Resilience and lifestyle go hand in hand. Whole-home generators, battery storage, hurricane-rated systems, smart-home integration and expansive outdoor living are expected,” Burrage said.

“A large home without those features narrows the buyer pool significantly. Meanwhile,” he said, “a slightly smaller but technologically advanced home designed for indoor-outdoor living often performs better in terms of demand and pricing.”

“Today’s buyers are far more educated about operating costs and long-term durability,” Polsky agreed. “In this market, lifestyle infrastructure and sustainability are no longer bonuses. They’re baseline expectations.”

Resale advice used to be: “Keep it beige.” Now, Zillow finds buyers offer more for olive green and charcoal gray, with “color drenching” mentions up 149%. The experts said the “beige box” of the mid-aughts is a harder sell now.

“The sterile beige spec home from the mid-2000s definitely feels dated. Buyers today respond to depth and personality but it has to be curated,” Polsky said. “We’re encouraging sellers to modernize with warmer neutrals, layered textures, and intentional color moments. ‘Safe’ used to mean blank. Now safe means thoughtfully designed. Homes that lack character tend to photograph poorly and sit longer.”

“Buyers want lighter, organic palettes with architectural texture and contrast,” Burrage weighed in. “We’re advising our clients who are building with us to keep interiors fresh and light strategically. A thoughtful design can materially impact buyer perception and final sales price.”

As millennials and Gen X become the primary buying force, they are rejecting the norms of what once was. The real estate experts both answered “yes” when asked if the market is seeing a permanent cultural shift in what “luxury” means.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“Boomers selling older estates should strongly consider modernizing systems and aesthetics,” Burrage said. “Buyers are comparing them to newly built coastal homes engineered for climate durability and lower operating risk.”

“Boomers selling 2006-era estates need to understand that today’s buyers compare everything to new construction with modern infrastructure. Updating mechanical systems, improving energy performance and refreshing interiors before listing can dramatically improve positioning,” Polsky pointed out. “The American Dream hasn’t gone away, it’s simply become more intentional. Buyers want homes that support how they live, not just how they’re seen.”

READ MORE FROM FOX BUSINESS

This post was originally published here


An expert witness in a case brought by a California woman against Meta, the parent company of Facebook and Instagram, testified that the design features of its social media apps are addictive, likening them to a “drug,” especially when affecting youth.

The landmark case continued in a California courtroom on Tuesday with witness testimony.

Dr. Anna Lembke, psychiatrist and Stanford University professor, told the court after reviewing thousands of pages of internal documents and reviewing social media companies’ own research, she determined the design features of social media are addictive.

The mother of four, who is the highest ranking person overseeing addiction initiatives at the university, defined addiction as “the continued, compulsive use of a substance or a behavior despite harm to self or others.”

Lembke argued that Meta deploys “potent” features, such as Instagram’s “infinite scroll” and tailored-for-you algorithms, to stimulate dopamine release that “drugifies human connection.”

FACEBOOK AND INSTAGRAM ALLOW PREDATORS TO ‘TRADE CHILD PORNOGRAPHY,’ ACCORDING TO LAWSUIT FILED BY NEW MEXICO

With social media addiction, Lembke said downstream harms include depression, anxiety, eating disorders, self-harm, loneliness, suicidal ideation, cyberbullying and sexual exploitation. Children, she added, are especially prone to rage attacks, screaming, threats of self-harm and insomnia.

After reviewing Meta documents, Lembke argued that the tech giant is aware of social media addiction and has used the term “Problematic Internet Use” internally as a synonym, indicating that the company is “working hard not to call it addiction” or acknowledge the gravity of the issue.  

Lembke testified that individuals would rarely be able to self-identify a social media addiction and would require a skilled therapist to diagnose it. 

She explained that a therapist who is not educated in the field of addiction may spend a lot of time talking about other things, or looking for underlying reasons, rather than targeting the addictive behavior. 

META RESEARCHER WARNED OF 500K CHILD EXPLOITATION CASES DAILY ON FACEBOOK AND INSTAGRAM PLATFORMS

Having diagnosed people with social media addiction, Lembke said identifiers are typically frequency of use, loss of control, cravings and withdrawal, consequences and risk factors.

While adolescents are particularly vulnerable due to brain development, Lembke said anyone can develop an addiction with enough exposure.

She added social media can function neurologically like other addictive substances, especially in youth.

“A child growing up in a family not feeling supported or verbally abused, it would be natural to turn to a self-soothing mechanism,” Lembke said.

On Monday, a safety researcher for Meta also warned executives that there may be upward of half a million cases of sexual exploitation of minors every day on social media platforms. 

META SUED AFTER TEEN BOYS’ SUICIDES, FAMILIES CLAIM TECH GIANT IGNORED ‘SEXTORTION’ SCHEMES

Citing Meta’s internal documents, Lembke said the company acknowledged that females are more likely to be vulnerable to social media.

She added that through her own clinical work, boys are more prone to gaming, while girls experience “negative social comparisons,” body dysmorphia driven by filters, and a heightened need for validation and approval after viewing idealized bodies and faces girls feel unable to measure up to.

She further criticized Instagram for providing “frictionless access,” noting that children often lie about their age during the platform’s “ineffective age verification” process, and that its parental controls are too complex for even well-educated parents to navigate.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Among other addictive qualities of Instagram’s app, Lembke described the notification tool as a potent feature that “triggers” or induces cravings to return to the platform. She added that the 24-hour time limit on stories creates a “fear of missing out,” or “FOMO,” which compels users to check the platform more frequently.

Adam Mosseri, head of Instagram, is expected to be questioned in court Wednesday.

FOX Business’ Eric Revell contributed to this report. 

Editor’s note: The story has been updated to clarify that Dr. Anna Lembke testified at a California trial, not New Mexico.

This post was originally published here

Page, Brin, Ellison, Thiel, Sacks — and now, Zuckerberg.

Meta CEO Mark Zuckerberg is the latest California billionaire heading for Florida, snapping up a massive waterfront mansion in Miami’s exclusive “Billionaire Bunker,” as Golden State lawmakers push a proposed 5% tax on the ultra-wealthy.

Zuckerberg and his wife, Priscilla Chan, are buying a newly built mansion on Indian Creek, one of the area’s most expensive enclaves. The deal has not been confirmed as closed, sources with knowledge of the transaction told The Wall Street Journal, but neighbors said Zuckerberg plans to move in by April — signaling a relocation rather than a vacation home.

“People like Zuckerberg plan three moves ahead. That billionaire tax chatter has a lot of Palo Alto owners doing real math. If you’re staring at a potential 5% hit tied to net worth, Florida becomes a business decision. And Indian Creek is the clearest signal you’re serious, because it’s built for privacy and control,” Troy Dean Home CEO Troy Ippolito told Fox News Digital in reaction.

PETER THIEL DONATES $3M TO GROUP FIGHTING PROPOSED CALIFORNIA BILLIONAIRE TAX

“This is a loud signal that South Florida is a primary market now. When someone at Zuckerberg’s level buys here, it changes buyer psychology overnight,” he continued. “If that tax actually moves forward, you’ll see the impact first at the very top, because there’s so little true trophy inventory.”

The nearly 2-acre property is estimated to be worth $150 million to $200 million, based on comparable sales, and the reported seller is a limited liability company tied to Jersey Mike’s Subs founder Peter Cancro.

Cancro cashed out big in 2024 when he sold a majority stake in Jersey Mike’s to Blackstone for $8 billion, including debt. His home sale to Zuckerberg was off-market, a common move for ultra-wealthy buyers seeking privacy.

Aerial views of the property show that it sits across Biscayne Bay and features a private dock, wraparound terraces, lush landscaping, a waterfront pool, charming blue shutters and other elaborate amenities. The estate joins Zuckerberg’s already extensive real estate portfolio in places like Lake Tahoe and Palo Alto in California, and Kauai, Hawaii.

“It’s one entrance, tightly controlled, and only about 41 homes. You’re minutes from Miami, but it feels isolated. If you’re a global name, and you want a truly private backyard, this is as close as it gets,” Ippolito said.

Meta responded after publication, telling Fox News Digital, “We do not have a comment on the WSJ reporting from yesterday.”

Some of Zuckerberg’s new neighbors on Indian Creek include Jeff Bezos, Tom Brady, Carl Icahn, Ivanka Trump and Jared Kushner, David Guetta, Julio Iglesias, Jaime Gilinski and Edward Lampert.

Zuckerberg’s move comes on the heels of other notable, longtime California-based billionaires who have solidified residency in South Florida in response to a proposed California wealth tax.

Though the initiative has not yet received the required 875,000 signatures to qualify for the November ballot, the proposal — backed by the Service Employees International Union–United Healthcare Workers West — would impose a one-time 5% tax on the net worth of California residents with assets exceeding $1 billion.

The tax would be due in 2027, and taxpayers could spread payments over five years, with additional costs, according to the California Legislative Analyst’s Office.

If voters approve the measure, anyone who was a California resident on Jan. 1, 2026, would owe the tax, according to the proposal’s language.

Many South Florida real estate agents have told Fox News Digital that since the new year, a fresh wave of buyer interest has flooded in from California, with increased calls and broker website traffic.

“There’s a few other very big founders and also tech giants and also venture capitalist firms, the heads of which I’ve also moved here,” luxury real estate broker Julian Johnston of The Corcoran Group previously said. “It was always a layover, one night, an event, but Miami’s changed a lot in the last 10 years. It’s culturally more interesting… They said they were quite happy to move here and then see what happens in the next few years.”

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“One client said, ‘You know, this could be like a $5 billion tax for me,’” he recalled. “So they’re moving because of that.”

“Florida feels predictable. You have a clearer tax picture, fewer hurdles, and a much easier day-to-day,” Ippolito weighed in. “A lot of buyers feel like California treats them like a target. Florida treats them like they belong here.”

READ MORE FROM FOX BUSINESS

This post was originally published here

The Hamptons housing market just made a new splash, but the surge is not being driven by everyday homebuyers.

Instead, cash-rich Wall Street and tech executives are powering a boom in multimillion-dollar sales, pushing median prices to an all-time high even as overall sales activity softens, according to new data.

According to a new report from Douglas Elliman and Miller Samuel, Hamptons homes hit the highest median sales price on record at $2.34 million, up 25% year over year. The average sales price also rose 25% annually to $3.76 million.

“The catalyst is absolutely tied to capital markets,” Douglas Elliman’s Adam Hofer told Fox News Digital. “The Hamptons has always been a discretionary, wealth-driven marketplace. When Wall Street performs, when liquidity events happen in tech, when bonuses are strong, that money needs a place to land and for many high-net-worth buyers – that place is the Hamptons.”

MIAMI MOVES AHEAD OF NEW YORK IN $1M-PLUS HOMES AFTER NEARLY A DECADE

“That said, this isn’t just a speculative spike,” he said. “Inventory remains structurally constrained, especially south of the highway and in turnkey properties. Unlike the pre-2008 era, today’s buyers are largely cash-heavy and less leveraged, which makes this appreciation feel more sustainable.”

“So yes, Wall Street momentum fuels the top end, but limited supply and long-term lifestyle demand are what’s keeping values elevated.”

Luxury sales are doing the heavy lifting in the Hamptons, with sales over $5 million reaching a record high in the fourth quarter of 2025. Douglas Elliman internal data also shows property closings over $10 million were up 75% year over year, and there were four closings of $20 million or more in 2025, compared to just one the previous year.

“The luxury buyer is operating in an entirely different universe from the average homeowner. All cash transactions at $5 million and above signal confidence, liquidity and a long-term mindset. These buyers are less sensitive to interest rates and more focused on lifestyle, legacy and asset diversification,” Hofer said.

“In contrast, the middle market is highly rate-sensitive. A one-point swing in mortgage rates dramatically impacts affordability. But when you’re writing an $8 million or $15 million check in cash, rate volatility becomes background noise,” he said. “It highlights a divided market that’s becoming more pronounced nationally. Rate sensitivity is creating friction in the middle tier, while the top 10% of buyers continue to transact with relative ease. The Hamptons is simply a magnified version of what’s happening across the country.”

But inventory is tight. Despite a slight increase in listings across the area in the fourth quarter of last year, months of supply fell to 6.8, down 24% from 2024, while luxury months of supply also declined sharply to 16.4 months.

Buyers are reportedly competing hardest for ocean and waterfront properties, turnkey, renovated homes in prime neighborhoods such as Southampton, Sag Harbor and East Hampton.

“Construction timelines, labor costs and permitting uncertainties have made move-in-ready product a premium commodity,” Hofer noted. “Waterfront and properties with protected water views continue to command outsized demand, and that’s where buyers are willing to stretch the furthest. There’s a finite amount of waterfront in the Hamptons, and sophisticated buyers understand that scarcity.”

While not fully captured in the report, the early summer rental surge lines up with the data, as buyers are committing earlier, luxury confidence remains high, and seven-figure demand is not slowing.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“Strong rental demand is often a leading indicator of buyer confidence. When high-end rentals lock in early and at premium rates, it signals that people want to be here and that the Hamptons lifestyle remains a priority,” Hofer pointed out.

“For buyers waiting for a significant price correction,” he said, “the rental market suggests that underlying demand hasn’t weakened. In fact, many renters ultimately convert to buyers after experiencing the market firsthand. Sitting on the sidelines in hopes of a dramatic pullback may mean competing later in an even tighter inventory environment.”

READ MORE FROM FOX BUSINESS

This post was originally published here

For decades, purchasing a Florida condo was a leap of faith masked by palm trees and ocean views. But in the new year, the veil of secrecy has lifted.

Between a new mandatory digital transparency law and a landmark court ruling that handed a so-called “poison pill” to developers, the power dynamic in the Sunshine State has shifted dramatically.

“I think it’s definitely correcting,” Douglas Elliman Palm Beach agent Jessica Julian told Fox News Digital about the state of the condominium market. “I would say last year we saw more of these older buildings were hurting, not as many buyers for them. Everybody was kind of scared to dip their toes into an older building after what happened in Miami on Surfside. And so now that assessments are being paid and repairs are being done, we’re definitely seeing that correction.”

“I think momentum is probably the best word that we have. Things have stabilized. We are gonna move forward… And again, the demand here in South Florida is so strong,” MIAMI REALTORS Chief of Residential & Advocacy Danielle Blake also told Fox News Digital.

FLORIDA’S AGING WATERFRONT CONDOS BECOME GOLD MINES AS OWNERS CASH IN ON DEVELOPER BUYOUTS

The first major shift of 2026 includes provisions that took effect under House Bill 913, which requires associations with 25 units or more to have a dedicated, secure digital portal where prospective buyers can see a condo’s bank statements, reserve details and even structural reports of a building.

“The click of the button, you can go in there, you can look at all these documents – including the budget – before you make that offer,” Blake said. “We’re huge proponents of it. It brings transparency and accountability, and we continue to promote that.”

“It’s making the condo market more predictable. So condos that have delayed reserves or delayed issues with their building are seeing a lot more ongoing negotiations,” Julian noted, “where buildings that have thought ahead and have fully funded reserves, they have a competitive edge in the market.”

In Miami-Dade, 65% of active inventory consists of older condo buildings, and sales in the $200,000 to $400,000 range are up 21% year over year despite rising insurance costs and assessments, according to REALTORS data. The experts weighed in on whether buyers are being brave or just eager for a slice of paradise.

“I would like to say it’s all because of our advocacy work. I mean, transparency is really important, but I think it has to do more with market conditions. And in South Florida, it’s a very hot market. Everybody wants to move here. The weather is absolutely beautiful. People want to take advantage of that. And so this is really the last affordable inventory that we have, and they are moving in,” Blake explained.

“I am getting a lot of buyers that are eager to get down here in South Florida, but they’re very well-informed. They’re usually coming to me already doing their due diligence,” Julian added. “They might already have the buildings that they’ve pinpointed. They’ve researched the other ones, found out which ones seem a little weak on those reserve studies.”

The second major shift in Florida’s condo market is the recent Biscayne 21 court ruling, which set a legal precedent effectively granting minority holdouts, as few as 5% to 10% of owners, the power to block major redevelopments if the original declaration requires unanimous consent.

OLDER SOUTH FLORIDA CONDOS NOW SELLING FASTER THAN NEW CONSTRUCTION UNITS AMID AFFORDABILITY CRUNCH

Julian called the decision a “poison pill” for developers who were eyeing older, waterfront Miami buildings as prime targets for ultra-luxury conversions.

“The poison pill, which is [a] 100% buyout, it makes things very difficult. So they haven’t been pursuing those as much,” she said. “It’s too much unknown to try to do that, to change the condo bylaws, and try to take a building down that way. So I think it’s gonna change going forward as developers are going to look at buildings a lot more with scrutiny and patience.”

Julian dealt with buyout wars personally in late 2025 at Harbor Towers & Marina in West Palm Beach when two developers sued multiple owners caught in the crosshairs of a battle for control of the building.

“There are a handful of buildings out there that still have language in their condo bylaws that say 75 to 80% can terminate a building… So developers are most likely going to do their due diligence and they’re going to be looking towards those buildings first,” Julian said.

“I think this case really highlights the importance of reading the government docs,” Blake noted. “It’s really important for developers to check that and know what you’re getting into before you incorporate that into your plan.”

With her advocacy role in mind, Blake also offered advice on what fixes realtors may push for to ensure that one or two residents can’t prevent an entire community from escaping the financial burden of an older building: “Talk to local government, talk to the state. Everybody needs to be informed so they can come up with the right solution. And we would support that.”

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

And while both experts agree that the two major changes in Florida’s condo market put an important emphasis on clarity and communication, Julian did share one warning about the future of the market environment.

“Greed is kind of taking place a little bit. So [buyers] are holding back until they get many more millions of dollars [from developer offers]. But what they don’t realize, that I see behind the scenes, is these developers are scooping up other buildings that are more affordable to them, that make more sense in pencil. And eventually we’re gonna be oversaturated,” she said.

“So if they are waiting, thinking that they’re going to get the ultimate payout, they might want to rethink that.”

READ MORE FROM FOX BUSINESS

This post was originally published here


Three of the nation’s largest housing markets are seeing a sharp rise in the number of homes for sale, giving buyers more choices even as the overall U.S. housing market shows signs of cooling.

In January, 46 of the country’s biggest metro areas had more homes on the market than they did a year earlier. Seattle saw the biggest increase, with inventory jumping 32.4%.

Charlotte, North Carolina, followed at 28.6%, while Washington, D.C., ranked third with a 26.8% rise, according to Realtor.com’s January 2026 Monthly Housing Market Trends Report.

In Seattle and Charlotte, much of the inventory growth is being driven by homes lingering on the market longer rather than a surge of new sellers, Realtor.com Senior Economist Jake Krimmel told FOX Business.

HOMEBUILDERS REPORTEDLY DEVELOPING “TRUMP HOMES” PROGRAM TO IMPROVE AFFORDABILITY

Homes in Seattle took about 15 days longer to sell than they did a year ago, while Charlotte homes remained on the market roughly 12 days longer. 

“[Washington], D.C., is a little different, where stronger new listing growth seems tied to uncertainty over the local job outlook,” Krimmel told FOX Business.

Seattle’s expanding supply is also being influenced by layoffs in the tech sector, according to Michael Orbino, a managing broker at Compass.

“Several companies, including T-Mobile, Microsoft and Amazon, are repositioning their workforces,” Orbino said in a statement. “This is not a large part of the inventory but often puts buyers in pause mode, which has the effect of slowing down absorption, which increases inventory.”

JUST 17% OF VOTERS THINK NOW IS A GOOD TIME TO BUY A HOME AS AFFORDABILITY CONCERNS WEIGH: POLL

Several other metro areas also saw significant increases in homes for sale.

Louisville, Kentucky, was up 25.6%, while Las Vegas and Indianapolis each rose 25.4%. Baltimore saw inventory climb 24.1%, San Jose increased 23.3% and Cincinnati rose 21%, Realtor.com reported.

Regionally, the West posted the largest year-over-year inventory gain in January, up 12.2%. The Midwest followed at 10.3%, with the South close behind at 10.1%. The Northeast continued to lag, with inventory rising just 6.6%, according to the report.

COALITION WARNS TRUMP MORTGAGE CREDIT SHIFTS COULD SPARK ANOTHER 2008-STYLE CRASH

Nationally, housing inventory is up 10% from a year ago, but the pace of recovery is slowing. Year-over-year inventory growth has declined for nine consecutive months, and new listings rose just 0.7% compared with last year, Krimmel said.

January inventory remained more than 17% below 2017 to 2019 levels, according to Realtor.com.

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

“Even though January is the slow season for housing, it’s an important moment to take stock,” Krimmel added. “The data and trends coming in right now will set the stage for how the market might behave once things pick up in the spring.”

This post was originally published here

New York and New Jersey sued the Trump administration on Tuesday for freezing $16 billion in federal funding for a new rail tunnel under the Hudson River between the two states, seeking a quick ruling because construction that has been underway could be forced to shut down as early as Friday.

The administration put a hold on the funding in September, citing the government shutdown. The White House budget director, Russ Vought, said on the social platform X at the time that officials believed the spending was based on unconstitutional diversity, equity and inclusion principles, and the U.S. Department of Transportation said it was reviewing any “unconstitutional practices.”

The lawsuit, filed in federal court in Manhattan by New York Attorney General Letitia James and New Jersey Acting Attorney General Jennifer Davenport, asks a judge to declare the funding suspension unlawful and order payments to resume immediately so construction can continue without interruption.

“Allowing this project to stop would put one of the country’s most heavily used transit corridors at risk,” James said in a statement Tuesday evening. ”Our tunnels are already under strain, and losing this project could be disastrous for commuters, workers, and our regional economy.”

The White House and U.S. Transportation Department did not immediately return emails seeking comment Tuesday night.

A similar lawsuit over the tunnel funding was filed Monday against the federal government by the Gateway Development Commission, a local panel overseeing the project.

The construction project calls for building a new rail tunnel under the river to carry Amtrak and area transit trains between New Jersey and New York City, as well as repairing an existing, 116-year-old rail tunnel that was damaged by Superstorm Sandy in 2012.

Work began in 2023. The project is funded by the 2021 federal infrastructure law signed by Democratic President Joe Biden.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here


Sunshine, low taxes and luxury living continue to draw wealthy buyers to Florida — and one city in particular is reaping the rewards.

New housing data from GOBankingRates reveals the top five towns across Florida that have become the fastest-growing home-value markets, fueled by strong demand and limited supply.

In Palm Beach, homeowners have seen their property values more than double — with the average home now worth about $9.8 million. The data show a 1.5% increase over the past year and a 118.2% jump over five years, making Palm Beach the top spot for those seeking the highest return on investment.

“Previous cycles in Palm Beach were largely tied to broader economic expansions or speculative waves. What’s different this time is the permanence,” Douglas Elliman Exclusive Group’s Nick Malinosky told Fox News Digital. “Buyers today are relocating businesses, moving family offices, enrolling their children in local schools, and embedding themselves in the community.”

MIAMI MOVES AHEAD OF NEW YORK IN $1M-PLUS HOME AFTER NEARLY A DECADE

“There’s also far more institutional-level capital and long-term wealth involved compared to prior booms. Inventory remains limited, land is finite and barriers to entry are high, which makes this cycle feel more structurally supported rather than momentum-driven,” he continued.

Malinosky echoed what many other Florida agents have said about Palm Beach’s future — expressing bullish optimism as a new wave of high-net-worth individuals establishes families and businesses there.

“Palm Beach today is not just benefiting from a migration wave, it’s benefiting from wealth consolidation. We’re witnessing a generational shift where capital is becoming more mobile, and Florida is a strategic destination for that capital,” he said.

But he also cautioned against misconceptions about Palm Beach’s headline numbers.

“When people see 100% growth, they often assume it’s uniform across the board, and that’s rarely the case. Appreciation in Palm Beach has been highly segmented. Trophy waterfront estates and prime in-town properties have seen extraordinary gains, while other categories may have appreciated at a more moderate pace,” Malinosky explained.

“Another nuance that gets lost is replacement cost. Construction costs, land scarcity and development restrictions have all risen dramatically,” he added. “In many cases, current values reflect the true cost of recreating these assets today, not just speculative appreciation.”

While Palm Beach caters to glitz and glamour, the remaining towns on the list are smaller, quieter parts of Florida — with average home values around $290,000 or less.

Wauchula — an agricultural city about 90 minutes southeast of Tampa — ranked second, with home values up 3.1% over the past year and 64.8% over five years.

Old Town, Florida, ranked third with 3.2% and 48% increases over the one- and five-year periods. The unincorporated community sits near the Suwannee River, west of Gainesville and just north of Manatee Springs State Park — offering more tropical nature than concrete jungle.

South Bay — the westernmost municipality in the South Florida metro area — ranked fourth, with home values rising 1.2% over the past year and 61.5% over five years, according to GOBankingRates. The town is known for its proximity to Lake Okeechobee and its laid-back, tight-knit community.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Rounding out the list is Bell — a small town of fewer than 520 people nestled in North Florida’s forests, not far from Old Town. Home values average $290,622, up 1.2% over the past year and 61.5% over five years.

“Major markets like Miami or Tampa already experienced earlier, sharper growth curves and started from higher baseline values. When you measure percentage growth over five years, smaller or less established markets can sometimes show more dramatic jumps simply because they began at a lower price point,” Malinosky explained.

READ MORE FROM FOX BUSINESS

This post was originally published here

Miami is now home to more million-dollar listings than New York — a sign the luxury housing market’s center of gravity continues to drift south.

According to Realtor.com’s December luxury housing report, Miami surpassed New York with 10,591 homes listed at $1 million or more, compared to New York’s 10,176 million-dollar listings.

New York held the top ranking for nearly a decade, and by late December, Miami solidified its lead as a long-term destination for wealth and housing demand.

“This is not a temporary surge, it’s an evolving market. The drivers supporting Miami’s growth are long-term: demographic trends favoring the Sun Belt, increasing international capital flows, and a deepening presence of finance, technology and global business infrastructure,” Douglas Elliman Vice Chair Dottie Herman told Fox News Digital.

FLORIDA WINS AGAIN: QUANTUM COMPUTING COMPANY JOINS EXODUS FROM HIGH-TAX CALIFORNIA

“That said, growth is not unlimited,” she said. “Insurance costs, climate considerations, and the risk of overdevelopment in certain submarkets will require disciplined planning and thoughtful execution.”

Miami’s luxury buyers are more likely to be cash buyers, international purchasers, retirees or second-home buyers. The report says these demographics are less sensitive to mortgage rates, school calendars and seasonal norms — keeping inventory levels higher yearlong.

Seasonality appears to favor the Magic City, as inventory stays more stable and allows developers to rebuild supply faster with a higher baseline. By contrast, New York luxury listings follow a more traditional cycle, with a spring surge and winter drop-off.

“Miami surpassing New York in million-dollar listings is more reflective of Miami’s expansion, versus New York’s weakness,” Herman said.

“Over the past decade, Miami has fundamentally broadened its definition of luxury. The market offers waterfront living, newer construction, resort-level amenities and a lifestyle component that’s directly embedded into the product. By contrast, New York’s luxury market is inherently finite and vertical, constrained by land, zoning and supply,” she explained.

New York’s market isn’t collapsing, but rather losing ground in a mature environment, as the report puts it. The Big Apple saw its housing market contract after the pandemic, driven by fewer new high-end listings, a slowdown in the city exodus and owners holding onto properties longer.

“Florida’s lack of a state income tax versus New York’s combined state and city tax burden represents a meaningful financial difference for high earners,” Herman said. “For many buyers, those savings translate directly into enhanced purchasing power or long-term capital preservation.”

Notably, 26.3% of Miami’s luxury demand comes from the New York metro area — more than the next eight source metros combined.

“New Yorkers have played a critical role as market shapers. A meaningful share of Miami’s luxury demand originates from the New York metro area,” Herman said. “This is not a broad-based migration of the entire New York population. It’s a targeted relocation of high-earning professionals working in fields like finance, tech and real estate, who have both the means and flexibility to choose where they live.”

Looking through a more national lens, luxury prices are stabilizing, with the top-tier threshold at $1.19 million, down slightly from the previous year. Luxury homes are taking longer to sell, with a median time of 88 days, reflecting cautious buyers and seasonal cooling.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Overall, price gaps are wide — luxury homes range between two and five times the local median home price, depending on the specific market.

“The most accurate framing is this,” Herman said. “Miami is not replacing New York. It is joining New York as a co-capital of American luxury real estate. New York remains the cultural, financial and institutional anchor — Miami has emerged as the lifestyle center, the flexibility market and a global magnet for mobile wealth.”

READ MORE FROM FOX BUSINESS

This post was originally published here

A Bel Air mega-mansion with nightclub-level amenities, museum-style car storage — and a seller willing to accept cryptocurrency — is back on the market at just under $100 million, following a dramatic price cut from its original $139 million listing.

Called “La Fin,” the $99.9 million property became Realtor.com’s most expensive listing in America for the week ending on Jan. 22. It first came to market in 2022, and the reported seller — former emergency room director Joe Englanoff — enlisted seven agents to help market it.

“A reset like this doesn’t signal weakness, it signals recalibration. Ultra-luxury is no longer aspirational pricing; it’s precision pricing. In Los Angeles especially, buyers at this level are disciplined, global and value-driven. When pricing realigns with today’s realities such as interest rates, liquidity and opportunity cost, serious conversations restart,” Douglas Elliman’s Cory Weiss told Fox News Digital.

“High agent turnover usually reflects a mismatch between strategy and expectations, not a lack of interest in the asset itself,” he continued. “This property has lived through multiple market cycles, from ultra-low rates to geopolitical uncertainty and shifting tax dynamics.”

CALIFORNIA RESIDENTS FACE BRUTAL CHOICE ONE YEAR AFTER LOS ANGELES FIRE DESTROYED THEIR LIVES

La Fin, located at 1200 Bel Air Road, has 12 bedrooms and 17 bathrooms and sits on more than two acres of land with panoramic views of Los Angeles. Located in one of the country’s most exclusive exclaves, the property also has separate residences for staff and guests.

A few standout amenities include a 44-foot chandelier made of 55,000 crystals; an automated six-car vehicle elevator display; a 6,000-square-foot entertainment level with a wine cellar, vodka tasting room and cigar lounge; an infinity pool with a rising 23-foot LED screen; and rooftop deck with spa and fireplace features.

Some elements go beyond lifestyle and into investment-grade excess, like the custom Italian furnishings, Calacatta gold marble, commercial-grade catering facilities and fingerprint and “command center” security.

“Amenities that win are the ones that integrate into daily life. Wellness facilities, seamless indoor-outdoor flow, smart security and turnkey functionality. What’s losing relevance are novelty features that photograph well but rarely get used. Buyers are asking, ‘Will this improve my life?’ not, ‘Will this impress my guests?’” Weiss said.

“Today’s buyer is less trophy-driven and more thesis-driven. They’re high-profile global entrepreneurs, private equity principals, family offices, often buying with generational thinking,” he added. “Five years ago, size and spectacle sold. Today, buyers want privacy, security, flexibility and a clear lifestyle narrative — not just bragging rights.”

For an estate of this magnitude, Weiss said storytelling plays a major role in marketing a one-of-a-kind property that’s been on the market for several years.

“Storytelling is everything, but it has to evolve,” he argued. “After years on [the] market, the story can’t be about excess. It has to be about purpose — why this home exists, who it’s truly built for and how it fits into a buyer’s life today.”

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

The nearly $40 million price cut reflects changing buyer behavior and illustrates some of the tension between aspirational pricing and market reality.

“It shows there is a ceiling, but it’s fluid. The market will support extraordinary pricing when the asset, timing and buyer align. What’s changed is patience,” Weiss explained. “The ultra-luxury market is still there, but it now rewards realism, restraint and long-term thinking over hype.”

READ MORE FROM FOX BUSINESS

This post was originally published here

Buy now, pay later giant Affirm is looking to help renters break up housing payments in ways that align with their biweekly paychecks.

Affirm is piloting a program in partnership with financial technology platform Esusu that will allow renters to split their monthly rent in two equal payments every two weeks at 0% APR. There are no hidden or late fees, or compounding interest with this pilot program, either, according to Affirm.

Esusu helps renters build credit by reporting their on-time rent payments to major credit bureaus.  

JPMORGAN CFO WARNS TRUMP’S PROPOSED CREDIT CARD CAP COULD CAUSE PEOPLE TO ‘LOSE ACCESS TO CREDIT’

The pilot program is designed to give “eligible renters a flexible option for managing one of their largest monthly expenses,” Affirm said in a statement to FOX Business, calling it “a transparent option that offers flexibility for renters to align expenses with their paychecks.”

Affirm said it underwrites every application individually and only approves people for what it believes they can responsibly afford to repay. 

‘BUY NOW, PAY LATER’ SERVICES ARE DANGEROUS TRAP FOR YOUNG AMERICANS, FINANCIAL EXPERT WARNS

“We’re approaching this use case thoughtfully and evaluating it alongside Esusu, which shares our focus on clear, consumer-first financial tools,” Affirm continued. 

The company didn’t confirm when the pilot program would be officially rolled out as it is still in the early stages of the pilot.

LendingTree’s chief consumer finance analyst Matt Schulz told FOX Business that this could be useful to those on a tight budget, but he cautioned that it is too soon to make a final judgment. 

BUY NOW, PAY LATER PITFALLS: MANY CONSUMERS AREN’T PAYING LOANS

“This is just another example of how it is getting easier seemingly by the day for people to use BNPL to finance most anything,” Schulz said. 

He noted that this doesn’t appear to be a typical pay-in-four BNPL loan, which, if it was, he cautioned that there could be serious risks. For instance, Schulz noted that a consumer could still have people paying off the previous month’s BNPL loan for rent when the next month’s rent comes due. 

“That could get messy,” he said, adding that this financial tool can be really useful when used wisely, but “the danger with BNPL is when you have multiple loans that you have to manage.” 

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“That can get tricky, especially if you’re not used to managing credit,” he said. 

The other key thing with this payment method is that it is tied to a debit card or checking account, so it is critical that users have enough cash in that account to pay the bill. 

This post was originally published here

EXCLUSIVE: The realization hit fast — and the response was even faster.

As California’s proposed “billionaire tax” began gaining momentum late last year, some of the wealthiest people in the country didn’t wait for ballots, lawmakers or court challenges — they moved. “Then a couple more flew into Miami, bought properties and closed within seven days,” luxury real estate broker Julian Johnston of The Corcoran Group told Fox News Digital. “So then it was a tipping point.”

According to Johnston — who told Fox News Digital that he’s currently working with three billionaires to move them from California to South Florida — the urgency was driven by staggering potential losses.

“One client said, ‘You know, this could be like a $5 billion tax for me,’” he recalled. “So they’re moving because of that.”

KEN GRIFFIN’S FLORIDA TAKEOVER: CITADEL FOUNDER SHELLS OUT $180M FOR LATEST PIECE OF MIAMI EMPIRE

The chatter all started at Miami’s high-profile Art Basel fair in early December, Johnston said, and carried into many of the ultra-wealthy’s holiday celebrations on the island of St. Barts.

“They’re all dining and wining together and talking about this proposed tax. And then when the proposed tax gained speed, they then understood that they had to either rent or purchase something out of California to establish residency and reduce their net worth exposure to the proposed billionaire tax,” he explained.

“It’s a melting pot and they’re all friends. And that’s the thing. The tipping point was when four or five of them bought and three more were going into contract. The rest of them, all their friends are here. And they talked about the office buildings as well.”

“I think this happened very quickly, even for them,” Johnston continued. “Now that it’s… January, into 2026, it has slowed down a little bit… So if you didn’t buy or rent before the end of the year, it may be too late. It may apply to you no matter what now.”

While it has not yet qualified for the November ballot, the proposal — backed by the Service Employees International Union–United Healthcare Workers West — would impose a one-time 5% tax on the net worth of California residents worth more than $1 billion. The tax would be due in 2027, and taxpayers could spread payments over five years, with additional costs, according to the Legislative Analyst’s Office.

If the measure is approved by voters, anyone who was a California resident on Jan. 1, 2026, would owe the tax, according to the proposal.

When asked to describe the billionaires he’s working with, Johnston mentioned “Palo Alto guys” who haven’t spent much time in Miami before.

FLORIDA DOMINATES NATION’S LUXURY REAL ESTATE MARKET WITH LARRY PAGE’S MIAMI ESTATE TOPPING DECEMBER SALES

“There’s a few other very big founders and also tech giants and also venture capitalist firms, the heads of which I’ve also moved here,” he said. “It was always a layover, one night, an event, but Miami’s changed a lot in the last 10 years. It’s culturally more interesting… They said they were quite happy to move here and then see what happens in the next few years.”

Florida famously has no state income tax for residents who live there at least 183 days out of the year, but Johnston explained what South Florida offers that other tax havens like Texas, Tennessee and Nevada can’t match.

“I think that you have to look at the culture amongst these VC firms and tech guys, that they like to be around each other… They’re already moving here, some of them are already here or have established residency here, they’re gonna spend more time and then they’re going to have the multiplier effect of their friends coming in to spend time with them,” he said.

“Miami has a very outdoor lifestyle similar to California,” Johnston further argued. “I think that the climate suits them. I think there’s a lot of security here. Politically it’s safe and economically, I mean, two of the largest capital projects in the country are in Miami right now.”

Beyond real estate, the California billionaires are aware they’re taking investment capital with them — and that lawmakers may not fully grasp how mobile wealth has become.

“That was a discussion point amongst some of them [in] the lunchroom. They were talking about the fact that, [if] enough of them move, it’s actually gonna cause change,” Johnston said. “It will financially change the landscape for the government’s budget… And they want reform… they want reform before they move back.”

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Across his 25-year career in luxury sales, Johnston agrees this current migration wave feels different in terms of the sheer scale of wealth and the speed at which high-net-worth individuals want to divest from the West Coast.

“I think Florida has a positive net migration for the next 20 years… it’s a boomtown,” he said. “Those big companies are going to push the state to spend more money on just activities and amenities and bring so many people from around the world that had never been to Miami before, because I do think it’s a [city of the future] for America.”

READ MORE FROM FOX BUSINESS

This post was originally published here


A billionaire sports and real estate magnate has quietly completed the largest private land purchase in the United States in more than a decade — propelling him past other moguls to the top of the nation’s private landownership rankings.

Stan Kroenke — who owns the NFL’s Los Angeles Rams and England’s Premier League club Arsenal — purchased more than 937,000 acres of ranchland in New Mexico in a major off-market deal for property once owned by the heirs of Teledyne founder Dr. Henry Singleton, The Land Report first reported.

MATTHEW STAFFORD’S LATE HEROICS LIFT RAMS PAST PANTHERS IN WILD-CARD THRILLER

The acquisition catapulted Kroenke from No. 4 to No. 1 on the 2025 Land Report 100, surpassing other billionaire landowners such as Ted Turner and John Malone. It also marked the largest single land transaction in the United States in more than a decade. Financial terms were not disclosed by either party.

With this deal, Kroenke now owns more land than any other private individual in the United States, surpassing the Emmerson family’s 2.44 million acres, Malone’s 2.2 million acres, and Turner’s 2 million acres.

A spokesperson for The Kroenke Group declined to comment to Fox News Digital.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Kroenke’s portfolio now spans much of the American West and Canada, including 560,000 acres in Wyoming, 124,000 in Montana, the historic W.T. Waggoner Ranch in Texas, 800,000 acres in Nevada, and British Columbia’s Douglas Lake Ranch.

Born in Columbia, Missouri, Kroenke built his fortune through real estate development and professional sports, owning the Los Angeles Rams, the NBA’s Denver Nuggets, the NHL’s Colorado Avalanche, and the Premier League’s Arsenal FC. He is married to Ann Walton Kroenke, an heiress to the Walmart fortune, and has expanded his land and ranching empire across the American West for decades.

READ MORE FROM FOX BUSINESS

This post was originally published here

Hedge fund billionaire Ken Griffin appears to be expanding his business presence in Miami, adding to his already sizable real estate portfolio.

The Citadel founder partnered with Goldman Properties to purchase the 545Wyn office building for $180 million from Chicago-based developer Sterling Bay, according to the South Florida Business Journal.

Anonymous sources close to the deal told the outlet that Griffin is a partner in the purchase, though the listed buyer is Goldman Properties CEO Scott Srebnick.

Neither Citadel nor Goldman Properties immediately responded to Fox News Digital’s request for confirmation or comment.

FLORIDA DOMINATES NATION’S LUXURY REAL ESTATE MARKET WITH LARRY PAGE’S MIAMI ESTATE TOPPING DECEMBER SALES

Two of Miami’s top-grossing real estate agents told Fox News Digital the move appears strategic and is unlikely to be a one-off purchase, but rather the beginning of a larger Wynwood land grab.

“This looks more strategic than operational. Brickell is about scale and visibility — Wynwood is about flexibility and culture,” the Corcoran Group’s Mick Duchon said. “Creative office [space] attracts a different workforce and tenant mix. Owning both allows to hedge across asset classes while controlling the ecosystems around where talent actually wants to work.”

“Given previous track records, it’s unlikely to be a one-off. It often marks the beginning of a longer-term vision rather than a single transaction,” Douglas Elliman’s Lourdes Alatriste added. “The endgame is balance. This portfolio touches luxury living, global business and cultural innovation. It reflects a belief in Miami not just as a place to invest, but as a city with multiple centers of gravity, each serving a different purpose yet reinforcing the whole.”

Located at 545 NW 26th Street in Miami’s Wynwood neighborhood, the 10-story building spans nearly 400,000 square feet, the property listing on Blanca Commercial Real Estate’s website states.

Wynwood has traditionally been a tech and creative hub in Miami, and the deal would mark Griffin’s first entry into the neighborhood after he spent hundreds of millions of dollars on properties in Star Island, Coconut Grove and Palm Beach.

“When an investor of his caliber enters a neighborhood, underwriting assumptions immediately change, cap rates compress, land pricing recalibrates, and long-term institutional capital feels safer stepping in. For Wynwood, this isn’t a short-term spike; it’s a structural re-rating of the district,” Duchon noted.

“Wynwood needed time to mature beyond its creative roots. Brickell offered certainty early on, such as financial infrastructure, zoning clarity and scale. Wynwood today is different,” Alatriste said. “It has stabilized, it’s proven demand for high-quality offices, and it’s become a place where people want to spend time, not just work. The timing reflects confidence that Wynwood has fully arrived.”

“Wynwood is Miami’s second most expensive office market behind Brickell, according to a report last year from CRE Daily. Real estate values are set by true mixed-use demand and the neighborhood’s ability to function as a real daily hub and not just a weekend destination,” ALP.X Group founder Sebastian Lüdke — who works with Goldman Global Arts — told Fox News Digital. “This transaction is just the latest example of the opportunity Wynwood presents to investors in the greater Miami market.”

Citadel is also breaking ground on its new 1.2 million-square-foot global headquarters tower in Miami’s Brickell financial district but currently holds a temporary lease at 830 Brickell Plaza, according to the company’s website.

Griffin moved his hedge fund from Chicago to Miami in 2022, and recently opened up about what led to that decision during an appearance at the America Business Forum in November.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“I’ve lived in a failed city-state. I lived in Chicago for 30-some years. I had two colleagues who had bullets fly through their cars,” Griffin told Fox News’ Bret Baier.

“I had 25 bullet holes in the front of my building where I lived. You can’t live in a city awash [with] violent crime,” he continued.

READ MORE FROM FOX BUSINESS

This post was originally published here

.

Mortgage buyer Freddie Mac reported on Thursday that mortgage costs dropped to their lowest level in more than three times.

According to Freddie Mac’s most recent primary mortgage market survey, the benchmark 30-year fixed mortgage‘s average rate dropped to 6. 6 % from the previous week’s 6. 1 % reading.

A 30-year loan’s average price was 7. 04 % a year ago. The 30-year mortgage rate average was 6. 02 %, whiçh is the lowest Ievel since Sept. 15, 2022.

As MORTGAGE RATES DOWNFLOW, THESE 10 Industry ARE COMING TO BE THE BIGGEST HOMEBUYING SURGE.

Mortgage rates dropped late last monƫh, causing thȩ weekly average tσ ƒall to its loweȿt level įn more than three decades, accordiȵg to Freddie Mac’s chief ecσnomist Sam Khater. The effects are obvious, as regular requests for purchases and refinancing have increased, which highlights the advantages for both customers and existing owners. It is obvious thαt cover action iȿ oȵ the rise and reαdy for strong flower sales.

Tⱨe Federal Housing Finance Agency, ωhich reǥulates Freddie Mac and another mortgage financȩ sȵob, was ǥiven ƫhe order by President Donalḑ Trumρ to seize$ 200 billion in bonds issued by thȩ two entities last week.

HOME DELISTINGS SURGE AS SELLERS RUGGLE TO GET THEIR PRICE.

Agent: THE Areas IN 2026 WHERE HOMEBUYERS MAY FINALLY GET A RESTRICTION. COM SAYS

William Pulte, the chairman of FHFA, reported last week that the first round of buying had been completed with a$ 3 billion target. In this year’s midterm electioȵs, Trump and hiȿ fellow Republicαns are fighting to kȩep conƫrol of the U. Ș. Congress. They are under pressure to Iower prices, inçluding accommodation.

Additionally, Trump has suggested outlawing administrative owners from purchasing single-family residences.

The president claimed in a blog on Truth Social that” the British Dream’s highest level of ownership was for a very long time. “

” It was the reward for working hard and doing what was right, but nowadays, thanks to the record-high inflation caused by Joe Biden and the Democrats in Congress, far too many people, especially younger Americans, are unable to achieve the American Dream. “

I’m soon taking steps to stop big institutional traders from buying more single-family houses, and I’m calling on Congress to define it, Trump said.

Since the 2008 financial crisis, which led to a flood of home mortgages, big financial institutions like Blackstone have repurchased dozens of single-family properties.

Clicking HERE WILL GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO.

The average rate on a 15-year fixed mortgage decreased to 5. 348 % from the previous week’s 5. 446 % reading.

According to Hannah Jones, senior economic research analyst for Realtor. com,” we anticipate mortgage rates to be broadly in the low-6 % range this year. ” Even so, affordability concerns and the remaining share of low-rate foreclosures suggest that any treatment in house sales is likely to be steady rather than quick.

This report was written by Reuters.

This post was originally published here

ewsom-says-california-wealth-tax-really-damaging-billionaires-move-money-businesses-out-of-state” target=”_blank” rel=”noopener”>NEWSOM SUBSTANCES CALIFORNIA WEALTH Income AS BILLIONAIRES MOVE MONEY AND BUSINESSES OUT OF STATE AS” REALLY DAMAGING”

As the price of a business like this approaches$ 7, 000 per square foot, the entire community is rebalanced. We’ve sȩen it įn Coconut Grove, Bal Harƀour, Miami Beach, and Golden Beach, according tσ Goldentayer.

Two Palm Beach homes came in second and third place in December’s most expensive sales, coming in at$ 97. 5 million and$ 66. 15 million respectively. Both qualities even appeared on Redfin’s 2025 record of the priciest U. Ș. homes sold, at No. 1. 5 and No. 9 and 9, both.

In total, southern Florida cities made up si𝑥 oƒ the ten mosƫ expensive sαles in December. Another high-end markets that month, including Manhattan, the Bay Area, and Nevada’s Lake Tahoe region, were outpaced by The Sunshine State.

According to Redfin, Florida components made up half of the ten most expensive house sales in the United States overall in 2025.

Clicking HERE WILL GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO.

According to Michael Martinez, one of the best South Florida agents for ONE Sotheby’s International Realty,” I’m seeing continued northbound fascination from California and the Northeast, with buyers seeking protection, security, and turnkey waterfront or estate properties. “

More showings with wealthy buyers, more off-market discussions, he continued, and buyers move more quickly when a really unique property becomes available.

FOX BUSINESS: Extra

This post was originally published here

For years, home buyers have been told the housing market would eventually “normalize” — meaning if mortgage rates came down or inventory improved, affordability would return to something resembling pre-pandemic levels such as 2019.

But new data from Realtor.com suggests that version of the market may never come back, and returning to pre-pandemic affordability would require outcomes economists say are extremely unlikely.

The numbers underscore a tougher reality for buyers, one expert points out: America’s housing affordability problem isn’t merely cyclical but largely structural.

“It’s not a realistic benchmark. I think that the problem in the housing market is a structural problem that’s been going on for decades,” PMG Affordable principal Dan Coakley told Fox News Digital.

TRUMP HOUSING PLAN COULD BRING ‘BIG WIN’ FOR AMERICANS, PULTE SAYS

“While it might appear that things were more affordable in 2019, this kind of march toward lack of affordability has been going on for a long time,” he continued. “And it’s gonna take a long time to make a dent in it.”

“I don’t think that affordability is going to go all the way back to a point where people feel like it’s manageable.”

In order for the U.S. housing market to feel affordable again, a recent Realtor.com report found that would require mortgage rates falling to about 2.65%, median household incomes rising by roughly 56% or home prices dropping about 35%. Realtor.com defines “affordable” as a mortgage payment equal to about 21% of median household income, compared with more than 30% currently.

“Just how radical those moves would be with respect to interest rates or home price depreciation or income increases, it just shows you how much work we have to do,” Coakley reacted. “I have to compliment the Trump administration now for really putting this into bright focus, because I think it’s going to be really necessary, and moving all of those levers as much as we can is going to be super, super important.”

Coakley added that he doesn’t see rates going below about 3% or even close to that level, while noting that median incomes have not kept up with surging rents and home prices.

“People at the lower income levels or middle income levels, even upper-middle income levels, have not been able to access and participate in that asset level appreciation that’s been so fundamental to the American dream and what’s driven people’s net worth,” he explained.

“Increasing supply is probably one of the most important things we can do and that the administration can kind of foster to help in this crisis,” Coakley said. “Similar type moves — incentives, [subsidies] to incentivize a developer to build affordable for-sale product – would be very welcome in the sector.”

ESCROW PAYMENTS RISING NATIONWIDE WITH HOMEOWNERSHIP LESS ATTAINABLE

Attempts to fix one side of the equation often backfire, Coakley said, because housing sits at the intersection of financing, wages and long-term price trends that have outpaced incomes.

“You play with one lever, and you bring interest rates down too much, that’s probably an indicator that the economy is not healthy — and incomes aren’t going to keep up with the inflation that that might cause,” he said.

Last week, the Trump administration proposed two major federal housing policies that Coakley said he views optimistically: directing Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac to buy up to $200 billion in mortgage bonds and proposing limits on large institutional investors buying single-family homes.

“Politicians on both sides of the aisle should be able to support [this],” the homebuilder said. “I think those are the kind of big structural moves that, actually, combined with other things, can actually move the needle… It just can be encouraging to people psychologically that they have an administration that understands what is fair and what is not fair.”

Looking out at the housing horizon, Realtor.com estimates that if mortgage rates hold around the mid-6% range and wages and prices grow at a 2025 pace, a return to pre-pandemic affordability could be delayed until around 2047 — underscoring the depth of the challenge.

Coakley ultimately argues that chasing the past is a mistake and that policymakers and the wider real estate sector should focus on realigning the housing cost structure for greater long-term affordability.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“I think we definitely are at risk of normalizing this level of affordability, a disastrous problem that we have,” he noted. “Psychologically, it’s not good for family creation. It’s not good for job creation. It’s not good for our cities, for our communities.”

“You can chip away at it on interest rate policy, but really, we need to come back to the table with ways to bring the cost down to bill-for-sale housing… I think starting to think about ways to develop new programs that facilitate similar affordable housing, but that can be for sale, and where people can feel like they’re participating in the upside of their most important or maybe largest asset, I think will be critical in thinking through the strategy.”

READ MORE FROM FOX BUSINESS

This post was originally published here

There are plenty of conventional indicators that signal that a product is turning heads: Weekly active user figures start to soar, products fly off the shelves, there is unsolicited praise.

But for San Diego-based Shield AI, validation has looked a little different. In April of this year, Russian armed forces fired two HESA Shahed 136 missiles into a hangar in Kyiv, where a team of 30 Shield AI employees had been doing research and development just two weeks earlier. The missiles turned the facility into a skeleton of twisted metal and rubble, according to a photo and video footage reviewed by Fortune.

Incredibly, no one was harmed. James Lythgoe, a former U.K. Royal Marine who is now Shield AI’s managing director of Ukrainian operations, had moved the Shield AI employees to a new site, as he had been concerned about the newfound attention that its sprawling nine-foot-tall surveillance drone, the V-BAT, was picking up. “We were advised that the Russians were very aware of a new capability on the battlefield,” Lythgoe says.

On the frontlines in Ukraine, Russian jammers intersect communications and radio signals, leading drones to veer off course or even fall from the sky and crash. Many U.S. drones haven’t been able to perform. But after an eight-month iteration period in 2024, Shield AI’s V-BAT cleared rigorous Ukrainian jamming tests. In 2025 alone, the drones have executed more than 35 missions and identified more than 200 Russian targets in the warzone, according to the company.

The initial success Shield AI has seen with V-BAT in Ukraine and on U.S. shores with the Coast Guard and Marines has helped the startup land a $5.6 billion valuation and positioned it as one of the hottest defense startups of 2025, right behind its higher-valued and more hardware-heavy rival Anduril Industries. Major government contractors, known as the “primes,” have begun to pilot Shield AI’s autonomous aircraft software system, Hivemind, for the experimental aircraft they are building for the U.S. military. Foreign allies and U.S. partners like Romania, Indonesia, and Japan have purchased its surveillance drones.

Shield AI wants to harness this traction and turn it into meaningful financial results. It’s looking to a brand-new autonomous fighter jet it’s building, the X-BAT, to help make it happen. 

It’s also looking to a new CEO. In May, the company brought in a new chief executive—Gary Steele—who has a track record of taking tech companies to multi-billion exits. With Shield AI’s cofounder and former CEO, Ryan Tseng, stepping into another leadership position, Steele has plans to grow the company’s revenue 70%-100% each year until it hits $1 billion in annual revenue for the year ending March 2028, up from the approximately $300 million Shield AI notched in the year ending in March 2025.

“I think the number one thing I think about is: How do we scale this?” says Steele, who spoke with Fortune over two interviews, his first since being named Shield AI’s CEO.

Gary Steele of Shield AI.
Gary Steele became CEO of Shield AI in May 2025.
Courtesy of Shield AI

It won’t be easy. As part of Shield AI’s strategy, the 1,200-person company will need to convince legacy defense shops that the AI-powered autonomous software Hivemind can do more than power Shield AI’s own drone. A gruesome accident in 2024—in which a U.S. Navy servicemember had the tips of his fingers effectively sliced off during a drill with the V-BAT—put a damper on last year’s revenue, and gave the company a public black eye that its executives are anxious to put behind them. And Steele, who is likable and seemingly adept at navigating internal politics, has walked into a leadership position notoriously difficult in the startup world: a CEO seat at a company where the founders maintain key leadership roles, board seats, and stakes in the business they created.

Shield AI is at an inflection point. Now Steele will have to prove that he’s the one who can take it to the next level. 

‘This inflection was happening’

Even before Anduril, there was Shield AI. 

Brandon Tseng, a former Navy SEAL, partnered up with his brother after he, Ryan Tseng, had sold a startup to Qualcomm. The two of them, with cofounder Andrew Reiter, wanted to take the autonomy that Elon Musk and Jeff Bezos were promising would transform the auto and e-commerce industries and translate it to the battlefield. This was back in 2015—two years before Anduril started to take shape, and not long before protests erupted within Google over a contract it was renewing with the Department of Defense. 

While Palantir had been securing government contracts for years, building military technology was rare among Silicon Valley tech-types at the time, not to mention exceedingly controversial. The Shield AI team turned down an initial $5 million investment because it had been contingent on Shield AI ditching its intended military focus and going commercial—which its founders weren’t willing to do. “It was really, really uncommon, if non-existent, for venture firms to be doing DoD-first companies,” says Peter Levine, a general partner at Andreessen Horowitz, who sits on Shield AI’s board.

As the venture capital-backed defense tech industry has matured, however, the Tseng duo have become synonymous with the industry and with the traction the sector has garnered since geopolitical tensions started climbing in 2021. That climb sped up, of course, in 2022, when Russia invaded Ukraine and views on the space shifted dramatically.

Shield AI had started with the now-discontinued quadcopter called the “Nova,” which, on first glance, looks like a superbly beef-ed up version of a drone you might buy at Radio Shack. Its innovation was in its tech stack, the AI-powered autonomous software system Shield AI calls “Hivemind,” which ingests data from onboard sensors—things like infrared cameras, radar, signals intelligence, and satellites—to build a model of its environment, then use AI to navigate, plan routes, avoid threats, and execute missions without the need for remote control. 

Shield AI’s first product, the Nova quadcopter, was used in missions to go into the most dangerous parts of a building and gather intelligence of potential ambushes or hidden combatants, so soldiers wouldn’t have to walk in blind.
Courtesy of Shield AI

With Hivemind, the quadcopter could go into the most dangerous parts of a building and gather intelligence of potential ambushes or hidden combatants, so soldiers wouldn’t have to walk in blind. The Nova has been used for several missions in the Middle East, inlcuding in October 2023, when Israeli forces used it to explore Hamas’ tunnel network below the Gaza Strip.

The Defense Department’s budget for quadcopters is relatively small, however, according to Ryan Tseng, so Shield AI pivoted in 2021 via its acquisition of the V-BAT, a towering surveillance drone capable of flying up to 18,000 feet and for 13 hours into enemy territory. The drone, which takes off and lands vertically, can fly from a ship or boat without a runway or launch mechanism, which has helped it notch contracts with the U.S. Coast Guard and Marines. But it’s the war in Ukraine that has really put V-BAT on the map. 

Like many other U.S. defense startups, Shield AI donated technology and hardware to Ukraine’s military for testing and experimentation—for proof that their drones could stand up in a conflict zone. Many of those companies quickly came to realize that they couldn’t, including Shield AI. 

The drones weren’t equipped to operate in areas where combatants could jam their communication signals or GPS, says Nathan Michael, Chief Technology Officer at Shield AI, who says the V-BATs they initially sent to Ukraine didn’t have Hivemind on board. “We had to come back and revisit our strategy,” he says.

It took roughly eight months for Shield AI’s tech team to incorporate Hivemind into the V-BAT. After the update, V-BAT underwent two new rounds of intense testing in summer 2024: a two-day test-run where seven jammers tried to knock it down, as well as a 60-mile test mission, where the V-BAT was used in jammed airspace to spot a Russian surface-to-air missile system and alert the Ukrainians, who hit it with a rocket. Both tests were successful, according to Ukrainian documents reviewed by Fortune, and Shield AI eventually sent over 16 V-BAT drones to Ukraine—most of them purchased by European allies—and they’ve been serving in the field ever since.

“I suspect that this year, more than half of our business is international”

Gary Steele, CEO, Shield AI

One of its most noteworthy missions thus far was in April, when a V-BAT flew some 80 kilometers into Russian-held territory, south of Zaporizhzhia, over two days to identify—then help destroy—two military headquarters and barracks, where Russian pilots and operators were remotely controlling the country’s highly-lethal FPV drone fleet. 

New business has been pouring in in the months since, according to Steele. Shield AI started selling its V-BATs to the Netherlands, Ukraine, and Egypt this year. Steele wouldn’t give specifics, but said that Shield has “hundreds of millions” of dollars worth of new contracts in Asia, Europe, and the Middle East alone. And this summer, in late August, the Ministry of Defence of Ukraine formally named Shield AI one of its “verified business partners,” allowing it to compete for state procurement contracts and access programs—and making it a true player in the war effort.

“I suspect that this year, more than half of our business is international,” Steele says, noting that he arrived at the company “as this inflection was happening.”

Shield AI is currently manufacturing the V-BATs out of its 200,000‑square‑foot “Batcave” production and engineering facility outside of Dallas, where the company is building 200 aircraft per year, though it just inked a deal with the manufacturer JSW to eventually start producing them in India as well. 

Shield AI’s surveillance drone, the V-BAT, on the flight deck with the crew of the Coast Guard’s USCGC Midgett.
Courtesy of DVIDS

Shield AI either sells the V-BAT outright, or, as is the case for nearly all of its contracts with the U.S. military, serves as a contractor operating the V-BATs for the customer, and the orders or contracts range from 4 to 300 aircraft, according to the company. For purchase, each V-BAT costs about $1 million, though the cost can vary depending on how many the customer is purchasing or the tech that is integrated into the system. Shield AI also licenses Hivemind to customers, including Singapore and South Korea, as an autonomy software suite and developer platform. Hivemind made up approximately 30% of the company’s revenue in the 12 months ending in March 2025. While the company says it makes “some revenue” from the early demonstrations and integration work it is doing with primes, including Airbus, RTX, and Northrup Grumman, the future of that business line will largely depend on whether the Department of Defense eventually opts to purchase those products.

‘Every single investor made money’

Steele was almost gliding around the light brown wooden floors of his San Francisco condo when we first met in August. He had left his loafers in his office and was enthusiastically sliding about in his grey slacks and socks, pointing out various paintings that scatter the walls of his second home, a corner apartment with floor-to-ceiling windows on the top floor of a skyrise near the Ferry Building. 

“It’s hard to get the colors right,” Steele says as he points to a painting hanging in a guest bathroom. The artist, Doron Langberg, is one of many recent art school graduates that Steele began following on Instagram shortly after they graduated—a habit he picked up after he started collecting art in 2014. 

Steele—with his kind smile and knack for an emerging artist—was not the pick one might have expected at the helm of Shield AI, whose drones have helped destroy some $400 million worth of Russian weapons. 

Steele’s background is in software, running the companies Splunk and Proofpoint, which focused on data analytics and cybersecurity. Steele founded Proofpoint and says he scaled it to $1.5 billion in revenue before Thoma Bravo purchased it in an all-cash $12.3 billion deal in 2021. At Splunk, Steele came in when it was losing money, then sold it to Cisco two years later for $28 billion in 2024. Cisco kept him on, making him president of the company’s $55 billion go-to-market strategy. 

He is confident—maybe even a bit smug—in his track record of returns. “If you look at my history at Proofpoint, literally every single investor made money,” Steele says. “Every single one.” That, he says, is one of the reasons that Shield AI’s board, lined with Silicon Valley investors from Andreessen Horowitz and Point72 Ventures that have backed the company, thought Steele would do well in the CEO seat.

“He has scaled very large companies,” Andreessen Horowitz’s Levine says. “We wanted an emphasis on software, because as we go forward, we intend to make that software available to many other organizations who will use that software on their hardware. And Gary had that background.”

Steele joined the company just as Shield AI had announced its most recent funding round, $240 million at a $5.3 billion valuation. Shortly after the round closed, Shield AI extended the round by raising an additional $300 million, hoisting its valuation to $5.6 billion, Fortune is first to report. In total, the company has raised $1.4 billion in equity and $200 million in debt—taking it from a GPS-denied quadcopter company to one of the most well-funded private defense companies in the U.S. and one of the definitive players working on autonomy in the private markets.

“They’re right there with Anduril,” says Ali Javaheri, an emerging tech analyst at PitchBook. “They have serious venture backing from the big firms. They have serious backing from the Primes. They are winning contracts.”

But Shield AI hasn’t enjoyed the same scale that Anduril has. Anduril said it had notched $1 billion in revenue in 2024. Shield AI, comparatively, hit $300 million at the end of its most recent fiscal year, according to the company. That was a $100 million shortfall of the $400 million it had been aiming for.

Gary Steele (right) with Michael Yang (center), Chief Legal Officer, and Brandon Tseng, president.
Courtesy of Shield AI

Shield AI credits the shortfall to an incident that took place during a test with the U.S. Navy in 2024, which was first reported by Forbes earlier this year. One of its V-BAT drones had tipped over during a test, and a Navy servicemember who rushed to capture it inadvertently grabbed the propeller and severed the tops of three fingers, according to a summary of the subsequent investigation, which was obtained by Fortune via a records request. The Navy’s investigation said that, because of poor signal, it took 45 minutes for anyone to get a hold of emergency services before the servicemember, as well as the pieces of his fingers on ice, could be transported to the hospital, according to witness testimony and findings from the Navy’s investigation. Shield AI says it had a Tactical Combat Casualty Care-qualified employee who provided immediate medical care on site and then initiated immediate ground transport to the nearest medical facility.

The incident was gruesome and publicly embarrassing. While most of the findings of the Navy’s subsequent investigation were redacted, the Navy documents say that Shield AI’s preflight brief packet didn’t have sufficient instructions for emergency procedures, and that Shield AI’s tip-over training did not include practical training exercises, according to the records. The V-BAT—even the drones operational and in the field—was grounded for two weeks as the investigation ensued, and it ended up delaying a series of contracts.

“Many purchasing decisions were delayed as a consequence of that investigation”

Ryan Tseng, Chief Strategy Officer, Shield AI

“Aviation is dangerous. Machines are complicated, and through a Swiss cheese situation, a person lost their fingertips, and it was an unfortunate event,” says Ryan Tseng, who was still CEO at the time of the incident. After the incident, the company added a warning on the duct surrounding the propeller, along with “extensive” hands-on practical exercise requirements. It later rolled out an unassisted launch and landing capability that eliminated the need for a person to be involved at all. 

Tseng described the Forbes story about the incident as “sensationalized” and contested the notion that there were any deeper-rooted safety issues at the company, or that the accident had any relation to his decision to step aside. While “many purchasing decisions were delayed as a consequence of that investigation,” Tseng says, “for a long time, it’s been back to normal.” 

In interviews, Ryan Tseng and Levine emphasized that it was Tseng’s idea to step into the chief strategy officer role and bring on a new CEO. “He wasn’t pushed out,” Levine insists, adding: “It’s not like he did anything wrong.” 

Ryan Tseng says that, as the company hit 1,000 employees, he questioned whether he was the person to take it to 5,000 people. “I’ve told people, and I don’t think they believe me, but I’ve never felt a particular attachment to the CEO role,” Tseng says. Tseng says he first approached the board this past winter, but they encouraged him to stay on. After the funding round closed, he suggested they revisit the conversation.

About seven months into the leadership transition, the Tseng brothers and Steele say they have found a balance and that they talk every day. Ryan Tseng has moved into the strategy role, where he oversees corporate development and M&A. Brandon Tseng, who is based out of Washington, D.C., continues to lead growth and is focused on customers and investor relationships. Steele is focused on running the business, making money, and bringing on new people, having hired four new executives since he joined, including a Chief Legal Officer and Chief Marketing Officer.

“This transition between Ryan and Gary has been the best transition from a founder to a new CEO that I’ve ever seen. And I’ve been around for a while,” Levine says.

But proof will come with time, as these kinds of transitions can be exceptionally difficult to pull off. Sometimes cofounders struggle to give up control in the company they’ve built themselves, or become skeptical their replacements are doing an adequate job. Bumble founder Whitney Wolf Herd, for example, stepped back as CEO in 2023, only to come back around one year later after a rocky few months at the company. Or at Uber, when CEO Travis Kalanick stepped back from his position but remained on the board, there were reports of conflicting vision and power struggles.

When asked about the dynamic between himself and the Tseng brothers, Steele says he was well aware of the importance of their roles, because he was a founder himself. “I understand what that means,” he says, noting that he wouldn’t have joined the company if he didn’t feel like they could work well together. “I needed to feel like we saw the world in a similar way,” he says. For him, he says he was convinced that the Tseng brothers approached the world with the same instincts as him, a “relentless” work ethic, and a “hands-on, problem solver’s mindset.”

The company wouldn’t share what voting power the brothers still have, only that they are “still significant shareholders.” The company said that Shield AI “operates with a mature governance structure and an independent Board. No single individual has the ability to make leadership changes on their own; those decisions rest with the Board as a whole, just like any well-run company.”

What’s coming next

At the end of October, Shield AI unveiled a brand-new product: an autonomous fighter jet with a 2,000-mile nautical range called the X-BAT. Shield AI has been working on the X-BAT for 18 months, designing a massive vertical take off and landing aircraft that wouldn’t need a runway, according to Brandon Tseng. Shield is aiming to have its first test flight sometime next year, and start production in 2029. The X-BAT is intended to complement the V-BAT, which is proving to be the company’s workhorse—at least for now.

But in the meantime, Shield AI wants to put more emphasis on the Hivemind software to meet its lofty revenue goals—hoping that product will make up 50% of the company’s revenue by 2028. While the company currently licenses its software out to foreign governments to use on their defense systems, it also wants to lean further into partnerships with the “primes”—the behemoth military contractors that have been the primary customers of the U.S. military for decades—so that Hivemind can eventually be incorporated into everything from helicopters to fighter jets.

So far, Shield AI is working with eight of the military’s main 25 contractors, according to Ryan Tseng. For starters, it is being incorporated into General Atomics’ MQ-20 unmanned combat aerial vehicle, a Kratos BQM-177A target drone, and an Airbus H145 twin-engine light utility helicopter.

Shield AI unveiled a new autonomous fighter jet it is has been building, the X-BAT, in October. The X-BAT will be flown using Shield AI’s autonomous software, Hivemind.
Courtesly of Shield AI

But, importantly, these have been demonstrations, not deployments, with little revenue. Shield AI still has to prove its capabilities to these primes—and eventually to the Defense Department—before they would roll the technology out widely. “The customer has to have confidence to go do this,” Steele says. 

One of those early partners is Airbus, which started working with Shield AI in spring 2025 on an Airbus DT25 target drone as well as an autonomous developmental Lakota helicopter that it hopes to deliver to the Marine Corps in the next “couple of years,” according to Carl Forsling, director of business development and strategy at Airbus. “If that’s successful, then that market is going to continue to expand—both with the Lakota and potentially other platforms,” Forsling says.

Steele emphasized that the company wants to position itself across a series of platforms. “While we’ve been very focused on aircraft, because that’s the place we started, there’s tremendous opportunity as we cross domains,” he says.

PitchBook’s Javaheri pointed out that Shield AI is likely to benefit from the Defense Department’s recent decision to hone in its 14 priorities down to six, one of which is “applied artificial intelligence” systems, which would include autonomy. “Aerospace and defense autonomy is the name of the game, and Shield AI is one of the leaders in that,” he says.

On the front lines

While defense tech companies are becoming increasingly prevalent in Silicon Valley—and Washington, D.C.—there is something intrinsically different about a defense company than its enterprise or consumer counterparts, even if the same storied venture capital firms have begun backing all of them. 

Shield AI is a case in point. For one, its makeup: 18% of its 1,200 employees are veterans, including Shield AI’s head of communications, Lily Hinz, who served in the Navy. Nearly all of the 30 employees stationed in Kyiv are former Ukrainian soldiers. 

But more importantly, there’s a difference in mentality and approach—perhaps due to the high stakes and real-life consequences of the projects people work on and the soldiers they work on them for. This is very evident from Shield AI’s 41-page document explaining its culture, which the company publishes on its website. In it, cofounder Brandon Tseng lays out a personal anecdote behind one of the company’s values—“do what honor dictates.” He writes about how one of his Navy SEAL instructors had dragged a team member to safety with one arm after being shot in the other.

“While there are many ways to conduct ourselves, we choose to act in a manner that is moral, good, and of high standards—leaving the world better than we found it, simply because it’s the right thing to do,” Tseng wrote.

“‘Move fast and break things’ is the wrong mantra when ‘things’ are people and escalation paths.” 

Garrett Smith, CEO, Reveal Technology

There are ethical grey areas for defense tech companies that don’t exist in the rest of Silicon Valley—when you build a surveillance machine or a weapon, and when the thing that you build is responsible for saving human life, or for taking it. “It’s a huge responsibility to get it right,” says Ryan Gury, who had a background in consumer drones before he started the defense drone company PDW. “You’re selling equipment that is going to extend the life and lethality of our operators.”

Garrett Smith, an active Marine Officer who is CEO of the tactical edge tech company Reveal Technology, says that, when a product lives in a “life-and-death” environment, it “changes everything.” 

“You prioritize reliability, safety, and mission outcomes over vanity metrics. You also have to think about escalation dynamics and law-of-war implications in a way a typical startup never does,” he says. “‘Move fast and break things’ is the wrong mantra when ‘things’ are people and escalation paths.” 

Several tech companies that operate in this space have set up teams to wrestle with these topics. Palantir has a “Privacy & Civil Liberties Engineering” team designed to “foster a culture of responsibility” around how their technology is used. Even then, Palantir is extraordinarily controversial among many, particularly because of its contracts with Immigration and Customs Enforcement.

Risk is very real for Shield AI employees. In contractor-operated deals, as well as in complex, high-risk environments, employees are often stationed for months on the ground (or at sea) where its drones are deployed. In Ukraine, its 30 operators regularly travel between cities to support mission planning, monitor sorties, and troubleshoot in real time to adapt to new threats and feed lessons learned back into the V-BAT. 

That level of proximity is all about trust, according to Lythgoe, Shield AI’s head of Ukrainian operations, who says that, if you are going to ask a soldier to trust their life with your technology, you need to be able to prove that you are just as committed to them. That has meant Lythgoe has only been home with his wife back in the U.S. four weeks over the last year, which is “not ideal,” he admits. “That is the job, I believe,” Lythgoe says. “Inherently, it’s the role of the defense sector to understand problems and to give the war fighter the edge. And to do that, you have to understand the problem, otherwise you’re guessing. And so you really do need to be close to the problem to do that.”

It’s curious, then, that Shield AI’s new CEO talks in circles about whether he feels a heightened sense of responsibility running a defense tech business, and seems uncomfortable to be asked about it at all. When asked about increasing disagreement about U.S. involvement in Ukraine or the controversy around the Coast Guard carrying out the Trump Administration’s agenda for Venezuela, he said: “We literally spend no time talking about the politics of particular missions.” While Steele acknowledged Shield AI has different protocols and processes because there is “human life involved,” he repeatedly stated that Shield AI isn’t much different from other tech companies. His focus is on the “mission,” he says, and how to “deliver the customer outcomes.” 

Update, December 21, 2025: This story was updated to reflect that the Batcave facility is now 200,000 square feet.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Mexico’s anti-money laundering office has frozen the bank accounts of the Mexican co-owner of Miss Universe as part of an investigation into drugs, fuel and arms trafficking, an official said Friday.

The country’s Financial Intelligence Unit, which oversees the fight against money laundering, froze Mexican businessman Raúl Rocha Cantú’s bank accounts in Mexico, a federal official told The Associated Press on condition of anonymity because he was not authorized to comment on the investigation.

The action against Rocha Cantú adds to mounting controversies for the Miss Universe organization. Last week, a court in Thailand issued an arrest warrant for the Thai co-owner of the Miss Universe Organization in connection with a fraud case and this year’s competition — won by Miss Mexico Fatima Bosch — faced allegations of rigging.

The Miss Universe organization did not immediately respond to an email from The Associated Press seeking comment about the allegations against Rocha Cantú. Mexico’s Secretary of Security and Citizen Protection, Omar García Harfuch, publicly dismissed potential wrongdoing.

“We have no indication whatsoever that there is money from organized crime involved in the Miss Universe pageant, none whatsoever,” Harfuch said in a report by PubliMetro. “Nor have we found anything related to the pageant itself in connection with the corresponding investigations.”

Mexico’s federal prosecutors said last week that Rocha Cantú has been under investigation since November 2024 for alleged organized crime activity, including drug and arms trafficking, as well as fuel theft. In November 2025, a federal judge issued 13 arrest warrants for some of those involved in the case, but on Dec. 26, 2025 another judge issued a definitive suspension of the order, which halts authorities from taking action against Rocha Cantú that could cause irreparable harm to his rights while the case is resolved.

The organization’s other 50% belongs to JKN Global Group Public Co. Ltd., a company owned by Jakkaphong “Anne” Jakrajutatip.

A Thai court last week issued an arrest warrant for Jakrajutatip who was released on bail in 2023 on the fraud case. She failed to appear as required in a Bangkok court on Nov. 25. Since she did not notify the court about her absence, she was deemed to be a flight risk, according to a statement from the Bangkok South District Court.

The court rescheduled her hearing for Dec. 26.

Rocha Cantú was also a part owner of the Casino Royale in the northern Mexican city of Monterrey, when it was attacked in 2011 by a group of gunmen who entered it, doused gasoline and set it on fire, killing 52 people.

Baltazar Saucedo Estrada, who was charged with planning the attack, was sentenced in July to 135 years in prison.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Are data centers the new REIT? Not quite — but Meta’s new mega–data center in northeast Louisiana marks what one expert calls a “decisive shift” in how hyperscalers finance the AI era: by turning data centers into a new investable asset class.

“This is where capital markets meet compute,” said Sean McDevitt, a partner at management consulting firm Arthur D. Little, which provided commercial due diligence advice to Meta

Traditionally, tech giants like Meta, Google, and Microsoft have funded their data center buildouts directly. This time, Meta is partnering with Blue Owl Capital, a private-credit investment firm, on the $27 billion data center known as Hyperion. As reported by The Wall Street Journal, Blue Owl owns 80% of the project, while Meta holds 20%, operating and leasing the facility long-term. BlackRock bought more than $3 billion of bonds that the joint venture (dubbed Beignet) issued last week to finance the project, in a sale arranged by Morgan Stanley.

The deal stands out for its scale—the largest private-debt offering ever—and for its A+ rating from S&P, which reflects Meta’s backing of the project (albeit with just a single agency rating). Yet the debt had a yield of 6.58% at issue, a level closer to high-yield, or “junk,” bond territory.

That structure allows Meta to build its data center without putting the full $27 billion of debt on its own balance sheet. The approach—known as a special-purpose vehicle (SPV) or off–balance-sheet financing—is largely new territory for hyperscale infrastructure.

“By being able to access outside capital, you’re not limited to your own free cash flow generation,” McDevitt said. “You’re bringing on investors with return profiles on an infrastructure-type investment that allows companies to build bigger, larger, quicker, and faster.” He compared it to taking out a mortgage: you can buy a bigger house—or, in this case, build more data centers—by borrowing instead of paying cash up front.

McDevitt believes the Hyperion deal could become a template for the industry. He estimates that roughly $150 billion in AI-driven data center construction is coming in the next few years. If other hyperscalers—Microsoft, Google, Amazon, and OpenAI among them—adopt similar models, capital markets rather than tech companies themselves will effectively fund the infrastructure of the AI era. “This is replicable,” he said, though he cautioned that it remains to be seen how the project performs in practice.

“Now what has to happen? Meta has to build this thing, then put workloads in it and operate under the presumption that they’ll monetize those computing loads driven by AI in the future,” McDevitt added. 

That is precisely where criticism of the deal lies: According to Global Data Center Hub analysis, “If AI workloads or margins stumble, these SPVs could echo the dark-fiber overbuild of the 1990s vast capacity sitting idle while debt remains outstanding.” 

Still, for now, there’s no reason to think other major banks won’t try the same thing, said McDevitt. “Why wouldn’t others look to mimic [this deal]?”

Sharon Goldman
X:
@sharongoldman
Email: sharon.goldman@fortune.com

Submit a deal for the Term Sheet newsletter here.

Joey Abrams curated the deals section of today’s newsletter. Subscribe here.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

If you’ve been conscious lately and haven’t heard of Apple Computer, you’d better have your ears examined. But don’t worry if that name zooming up from the Apple tombstone doesn’t ring a bell. Hambrecht & Quist, which co-managed Apple’s (AAPL) first public offering with the prestigious Wall Street firm of Morgan Stanley, is a San Francisco upstart only 13 years old. In 1980 Merrill Lynch, the industry leader, did 45 times as much underwriting business as Hambrecht & Quist. But when it comes to financing small high-technology companies like Apple, Hambrecht & Quist has a special touch.

The firm is both underwriter and venture capitalist. It has five venture-capital funds, with about $100 million in assets, which it manages primarily for large institutional investors. The oldest one invested in over 100 companies in ten years and returned an average of 29.8% a year, compounded. The second fund, launched two years ago, has returned a breathtaking 59.9% a year. A competitor, Sanford R. Robertson, a partner of San Francisco’s Robertson Colman Stephens & Woodman, remarks: “If you can beat them it’s like winning a game of golf against Arnold Palmer.”

Hambrecht & Quist pours its venture capital into fledgling enterprises, gets seats on the boards, and often takes the companies public. It underwrote 25 equity issues worth more than $400 million this year, its best ever. But its several roles—as investor, director, underwriter—have raised questions about whose interest it serves, its own as investment banker or that of all the shareholders.

Click to enlarge.

The firm’s founders—William R. Hambrecht, 45, and George Quist, 55—are as venturesome as the entrepreneurs they underwrite. The son of a San Francisco milkwagon driver who emigrated from Denmark, Quist played his way through Berkeley and Stanford on football scholarships. He likes to point out that he’s “the only living person” who has been captain of both those arch-rival teams. After college he joined Price Waterhouse as a CPA, later worked for Kaiser Gypsum, and, when he was 26, became president of Mandrel Industries, a money-losing manufacturer of precision instruments. Through mergers and acquisitions he built Mandrel’s annual sales from $600,000 to $20 million and eventually sold out to Ampex, a maker of videotape recorders and data-processing equipment. In 1961 he started Explosive Technology, which makes devices for missiles, and later sold it to Ducommun Inc. Then he joined Bank of America as president of its venture-capital operation.

Tall, boyish-looking Bill Hambrecht, the son of a Mobil Oil manager, grew up on Long Island, and graduated from Princeton in 1957. He got his first exposure to the world of high technology when he took a job with Security Associates, a Florida investment-banking firm. He sold securities and managed underwritings for small technology companies even though, he confesses, “science was always my worst subject.” But he caught on, and in 1965, shortly after Francis I. du Pont & Co. acquired the firm, Hambrecht was dispatched to San Francisco to set up a corporate-finance office.


Agreement at the Kona Kai

Collaborating on several West Coast venture-capital deals, Hambrecht and Quist became kindred entrepreneurial spirits. One evening in 1968, after spending the day together studying the investment possibilities of a budding San Diego outfit, they stopped for a drink at the Kona Kai Club. It didn’t take too many Scotches before Hambrecht started complaining to his buddy: du Pont wanted him back in New York, but he was having fun underwriting little companies. “I really wanted to be responsive to smaller technical companies,” he says. “But it was difficult to do that in a large New York firm.” After a couple of drinks and a couple of bottles of wine, they decided to strike out on their own.

With Silicon Valley nearby, it takes just picoseconds to pursue a hot tip.

Over black coffee the next morning, Quist says, the idea “still sounded good.” On the plane back to San Francisco they hastily drew up a business plan. In those heady times, backers weren’t hard to find. They raised $1 million that very day from Prentice Hale, then chairman of Carter Hawley Hale department stores, and Henry McMicking, a major investor in Ampex, among others who became limited partners.

Hambrecht and Quist invested most of that $1 million in new ventures. To pay the rent, they cajoled Smith Barney, Lehman Bros., and other big firms to hand over underwriting jobs they considered too small or risky to handle. The “rejects” Hambrecht & Quist took public included Spectra-Physics, Datapoint, and Tymshare—now big names on the Big Board.

When the equity market fizzled in 1974, Hambrecht & Quist underwrote just two issues all year. The limited partners, who by then had invested $4.8 million, got jittery. Liquidating part of their venture-capital portfolio and taking out a $2-million personal loan, Hambrecht and Quist paid back most of the limited partners’ capital. They cut their own salaries in half and closed their New York office. Hambrecht put his 17-room Marin County house up for sale, but there were no takers. “In 1974,” he says, “we used to sleep every other night.”

Whom the Apples Fell on

In the 45-mile stretch between San Jose and San Francisco called Silicon Valley lives a computer-age version of the American dream. It turned to reality recently when Apple Computer went public at $22 a share. Venture capitalist Arthur Rock, who invested $57,600 in the company three years ago, ended up with stock worth $14 million; Teledyne Chairman Henry Singleton’s investment of $320,800 blossomed into $26 million. Impressive enough, but nothing like what happened to Apple’s young founders, Steven P. Jobs, 25, and Stephen G. Wozniak, 29.

Graduates of Santa Clara’s Homestead High School, Jobs and Wozniak dropped out of college. The self-taught computer whizzes went to work for local electronics companies. The two began collaborating five years ago at the Home Brew Computer Club in Palo Alto. They designed their first machine in Jobs’s bedroom, built it in his parents’ garage, and showed it to a local computer-store owner, who promptly ordered 25. Demand for the “personal” computer, mainly from hobbyists, soon outstripped the young men’s ability to produce, so they began looking for help.

Enter A. C. Markkula Jr., 38, who had been marketing manager at Intel, the fast-growing producer of integrated circuits. “Mike” Markkula was soon convinced that the two Steves, as they are known at Apple, were on to something big. He put up $91,000, secured a line of credit, and later raised some $600,000 from venture capitalists. Markkula became chairman of the company in May 1977, and Michael Scott, 37, signed on as president a month later, taking a 50% pay cut from his job as a director of manufacturing at National Semiconductor.

You don’t need an Apple computer to tell you that at least four new multimillionaires are now roaming the Silicon Valley. The four men own 40% of the company, which earned $11.7 million on sales of $117 million last year. At the public-offering price, Scott’s shares were worth $62 million, Wozniak’s $88 million, Markkula’s $154 million, and Jobs’s $165 million. Wozniak spread the wealth among his relatives. His parents and siblings own nearly $3 million in Apple stock. His wife, Alice, owns $27 million. They are separated.

—Grant F. Winthrop


Something out of the Depression

From those days they learned to stay small and keep overhead down. Hambrecht & Quist’s scruffy quarters look like government offices in the Depression. No Eames chairs, no Kirman carpets, no Touch-Tone telephones. The staff totals 90, with only three professionals in the syndicate department and five in corporate finance.

Employees are treated more like entrepreneurs than hired hands. Institutional salesmen have to pay half their expenses, including secretaries’ salaries, telephone calls, and airplane tickets. Analysts not only write research reports but also help put together prospectuses and study venture-capital deals. They earn less than the industry average in base salary, but can cash in on hefty bonuses depending on their contribution to profits. The annual paycheck for an analyst can run as high as $300,000.

For more on Apple, watch this Fortune video:

Only a few investment-banking firms have venture-capital funds—Blyth Eastman Paine Webber, the Rothschild family’s New Court Securities, Donaldson Lufkin & Jenrette—and none of the others plays its hand as aggressively as Hambrecht & Quist. Of its venture-capital funds three are exclusively for Europeans, partly for tax reasons. The firm invests $150,000 to $2 million in a young company’s second round of financing; it rarely puts up seed capital. It takes shares as small as 0.2% (Cetus Scientific Laboratories, a gene-splicing outfit) and up to 50% (Margaux Controls, a manufacturer of energy-saving devices). The funds contribute 70% of the investment and Hambrecht & Quist’s partners put up the rest. Then one of the senior partners goes on the board. Between them Hambrecht and Quist serve as directors of 23 companies.

Hambrecht & Quist isn’t free to bully.

The partners prod the management on strategic planning, product development, and finance, and are on call around the clock to help chief executives solve their problems. So when the time comes to go public, Hambrecht & Quist is well positioned to get the underwriting job. The boardroom also becomes a listening post to learn of other opportunities. Last month Hambrecht & Quist agreed to invest $1.4 million in VLSI Technology, a semiconductor outfit in Los Gatos, California, after getting a tip from David Evans, chief executive of Evans & Sutherland, a designer of computer-graphics systems of which Hambrecht is a director. With Silicon Valley in its backyard, the firm can follow a lead practically within picoseconds. “I always ask a company who else is doing something interesting in the field,” says Hambrecht. “It’s important to invest in a company that has its competitors’ and suppliers’ respect—not in one that Wall Street thinks is hot.”

Click to enlarge.

Three years ago Hambrecht & Quist’s research department wanted to buy a word-processing machine and, after listening to sales pitches from IBM, Xerox, and Wang, settled on an obscure outfit from Boulder called NBI. Once Hambrecht bought the machine he called up NBI President Thomas Kavanagh and asked if he needed money. He did, and Hambrecht & Quist snapped up an 8% stake in the company at $4.20 a share. Last year it took NBI public at $20. The shares are now trading around $65.


How big a man thinks

In finding winners, Hambrecht & Quist looks for a unique technology, good products, a strong balance sheet, and common-sense-oriented managers. The balance sheet is more critical than the income statement. “You can show beautiful profits,” Hambrecht says, “by burying inventories.” Competent managers, he adds, pull the whole thing together: “You can tell by the way a guy hires how big he thinks. The guy who hires weak people is the one youhave to worry about.” What finally sold Hambrecht on NBI was that its top executives came from places like Storage Technology, Xerox, and Data General.

Hambrecht & Quist has been fooled at least a dozen times in its more than 100 venture-capital investments. Last year it put $1 million into Logisticon, a Sunnyvale, California, manufacturer of automated systems for warehouses. “The problem was that the president was a perennial optimist,” says Hambrecht. “He was always betting the company would have a big order and so he got stuck with a lot of inventory.” Last summer Hambrecht & Quist successfully urged the board to change management. Hambrecht says that if he had spent more time with the company, he could have avoided the problem. Now he reports Logisticon is “starting to approach profitability.”

Click to enlarge.

When the firm gets stuck with a loser, it may call in its corporate doctor, Quentin T Wiles. A 61-year-old former executive of TRW, “Q. T.” Wiles makes house calls. He moves into the company, takes over as chief executive, and stops the bleeding. His fourth and most recent patient is Granger Associates, a Santa Clara manufacturer of telephone systems for Third World countries. Granger ran into trouble when its newly installed telephone system in Iran was confiscated by the revolutionary government without restitution. Called in when the company reported a $3-million loss last year, Wiles has put three profitable quarters back to back.

As its business picked up with the market for small stocks over the last three years, Hambrecht & Quist invited Wiles and other investors to become limited partners. For the most part, the firm’s 13 limited partners are high-powered venture capitalists on the West Coast. Each has put $50,000 to $150,000 into the firm, and they can join Hambrecht & Quist’s general partners in venture-capital deals. The limited partners also bring in business. One’of them, Thomas J. Perkins, a member of the San Francisco venture-capital firm of Kleiner Perkins Caufield & Byers, introduced Genentech to Hambrecht & Quist, which took the gene-splicing company public in October.

You want people to feel they invested in a winner.”

A lot of investment bankers criticize the close connection between Hambrecht & Quist’s venture-capital and investment-banking operations. Declares John Castle, president of Donaldson Lufkin & Jenrette: “If Hambrecht & Quist puts its money in a venture, you can bet it will end up being the underwriter too.” He calls this “a shotgun approach” and “investment-banking exploitation.” Those are strong words considering that investment bankers have been directors of large companies for years. Felix Rohatyn of Lazard Frères sits on the ITT board and Lehman’s Peter Peterson on RCA’s; in each case the firm represented on the board handles investment-banking business for the company.

Critics insist there’s a difference with Hambrecht & Quist. With 10% ownership of a company, the firm may have considerable clout with inventor-managers who are unsophisticated about finance. If Hambrecht & Quist were eager for more underwriting business, critics argue, it could pressure a company into going public even if the time weren’t right. In bringing out an issue, it could underprice the shares, making them easy to sell and currying favor with institutional buyers at the expense of its clients.

The potential for wrongdoing clearly exists, but critics are hard-pressed to cite specific instances. Hambrecht & Quist may have an influential director on the board, but it isn’t free to bully. Nowadays, the boards of high-tech companies tend to be sprinkled with several venture capitalists savvy about finance. With their own investments at stake, they are sure to oppose any action detrimental to the company.


“I want the underwriting, but …”

Hambrecht & Quist has a reputation for standing by entrepreneurs in hard times even when doing so isn’t to the firm’s short-term advantage. Modular Computer of Fort Lauderdale was on the verge of bankruptcy two years ago. “Certainly Bill [Hambrecht] stood to gain if the company was sold,” says ModComp Chairman Alexander W. Giles, “but he said it would be a shame to sell and never once went against management on any issue.” Defending his own position, Hambrecht says: “If you’ve got your own money up, you’re on the board to protect your investment. Sure I want to do the underwriting, but not at the expense of the shareholders.”

Controversy also surrounds the pricing of new issues. Hambrecht says his rule of thumb is to set the price high enough to raise the capital needed but low enough so that in a few weeks, after immediate speculative trading has abated, the stock will have appreciated 10% to 20%. “When you’re selling stock to the public for the first time,” he says, “you want people to feel that they invested in a winner.” Alfred “Bud” Coyle of Blyth Eastman Paine Webber agrees: “The worst thing is to price a new issue too high and then let it fall. You want happy customers.”

The trouble with corporate nestlings is they can fly away.

An issuing company might logically argue that it would like to capture some of that extra 10% to 20% for itself. And if there’s a bigger run-up, the question is whether the stock was badly underpriced. When Blyth and Hambrecht & Quist brought out Genentech, they set the price at $35 a share and it hit a high of $89 the first day; it has since settled back to the high 30s. The price for Genentech, a company without product or profit—and unlikely to have either for years—was based on a guess of what the market would bear.


A $1.2-billion Apple

Morgan Stanley and Hambrecht & Quist priced Apple at $22. The price ran up to $29 during the first day of trading, a 30% gain. In calculating the price, Hambrecht & Quist compared Apple with nine somewhat similar companies, including Magnuson Computer, Tandem Computer, Rolm, and Paradyne. These companies were selling at an average of about 18 times anticipated 1981 earnings. But the underwriters figured that Apple’s spectacular growth rate—earnings went up 700% in the last three years—and a faddish enthusiasm for the stock made the company worth a lot more, perhaps 35 to 45 times anticipated earnings.

Click to enlarge.

The sale placed the total market value of Apple, a company that earned $11.7 million in the fiscal year that ended last September, at $1.2 billion. By comparison, St. Regis Paper, which earned $158.5 million last year, has a market value of $1.1 billion. At a stock price of $22, Apple’s earnings would have to more than double this fiscal year, to 55 cents a share, for its multiple to be as low as 40. Massachusetts refused to allow the issue to be sold there, on the ground that it was overpriced; Apple wasn’t offered in 25 other states where laws are stringent.

After the go-go Sixties, the big Wall Street firms lost interest in underwriting new issues. Although the spread, or margins, is high—typically 7.5% of the value of the offering vs. 4% for a large offering of an established corporation—the dollars earned pale by comparison. But now that investors are again infatuated with high-technology issues, Hambrecht & Quist has lots of competitors to contend with, including such heavy hitters as Shearson, Kidder Peabody, Blyth Eastman Paine Webber, and Morgan Stanley. “If you don’t get associated with these [high-technology] companies,” says Robert Baldwin, president of Morgan Stanley, “you’ll miss out on the winners of the future.” Morgan Stanley has targeted 20 technology companies it wants as clients; Apple is the first.


“We got outsold”

For a small, specialized investment banker, the trouble with nurturing corporate nestlings is that they can grow up and fly away. As Datapoint matured, it left Hambrecht & Quist for Kidder Peabody. Four-Phase, a leading producer of video-display computer systems, was picked up by Lehman Bros. Hambrecht, who has been content to share initial underwritings with big Wall Street houses, has discovered that friendly co-managers can become fierce rivals when competing for new clients.

Heightened competition took its toll two months ago, when Network Systems, a Minneapolis-based manufacturer of data-communications equipment, decided to go public. Hambrecht & Quist thought itself certain to get the business. It had sunk $567,000 in venture capital into the company and owned about 3% of the stock. But the job was awarded to Shearson, San Francisco’s Montgomery Securities, and Dain Bosworth of Minneapolis—the first time Hambrecht & Quist had ever lost an initial underwriting for one of its venture offspring. “We got outsold,” Hambrecht admits. “The competition convinced them we were too busy. Maybe they were right.”

Hambrecht & Quist may have been hurt by its “stay lean” mentality. An investment banker who has co-managed offerings with the firm complains: “When we’re drafting a prospectus, there’s a new person every day from Hambrecht & Quist who doesn’t know what was done the day before.” Many potential clients see the firm as depending on a single partner. Quist, the administrator, is not as active as Hambrecht in making deals or drumming up business. Clients gravitate to Hambrecht, the imaginative intellect, a man of energy and drive who is willing to live out of a suitcase four days a week in search of deals.

This year, Hambrecht and Quist sought to broaden the firm’s base by diluting their 30% interests and creating three additional managing partners. Each of the five now owns 12%. Hambrecht thinks the firm needs to add at least 12 to its staff of about 30 professionals just to handle current business. Tops on the list is finding a senior corporate-finance executive to handle business on the East Coast. (“I don’t want to go on a board east of Denver,” says Hambrecht. “Traveling kills time.”)

Nor will Hambrecht & Quist be content to let clients keep outgrowing its services. To hold onto them, it wants to add to its venture-capital and equity-underwriting operations the ability to handle Eurodollar offerings, project financings, bond underwritings, and mergers and acquisitions. Hambrecht would like to do all this without abandoning the firm’s high-technology niche. “I want to be the best risk-type investment-banking firm in the business,” he says. “I’d like to see us end up as a major like Lazard Frères—smart people with a specialty.”

One outsider calls that “self-delusion.” Only time will tell whether Hambrecht & Quist can cultivate an orchard full of Apples, and keep Wall Street from picking them.

Research associate: Grant F. Winthrop

A version of this article was originally published in the January 12, 1981 issue of Fortune.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here